Sie sind auf Seite 1von 348

PCS-915IC

Centralized Busbar Relay


Instruction Manual

NR Electric Co., Ltd.


Preface

Preface

1.1 Introduction
This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment provide
full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment.

Documentation for equipment ordered from NR is dispatched separately from manufactured goods
and may not be received at the same time. Therefore, this guide is provided to ensure that printed
information normally present on equipment is fully understood by the recipient.

Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of
this manual, and read relevant chapter carefully.

This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the equipment. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.

1.2 Health and Safety


The information in this chapter of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that
equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.

When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of
the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger
personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.

Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.

Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and
servicing. For this reason, only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.

Qualified personnel are individuals who:

 Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the
system to which it is being connected;

 Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety
engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to
isolate, ground, and label it;

 Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering
practices;

 Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

1.3 Instructions and Warnings


The following indicators and standard definitions are used:

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay i


Date: 2015-07-13
Preface

DANGER! means that death, severe personal injury and considerable equipment damage
will occur if safety precautions are disregarded.

WARNING! means that death, severe personal and considerable equipment damage
could occur if safety precautions are disregarded.

CAUTION! means that light personal injury or equipment damage may occur if safety
precautions are disregarded.

NOTICE! is particularly applies to damage to device and to resulting damage of the protected
equipment.

DANGER!

NEVER allow a open current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this
device while the primary system is live. Open CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage that cause death.

WARNING!

ONLY qualified personnel should work on or in the vicinity of this device. This personnel
MUST be familiar with all safety regulations and service procedures described in this
manual. During operating of electrical device, certain part of the device is under high
voltage. Severe personal injury and significant device damage could result from
improper behavior.

WARNING!

Do NOT touch the exposed terminals of this device while the power supply is on. The
generated high voltage causes death, injury, and device damage.

WARNING!

Thirty seconds is NECESSARY for discharging the voltage. Hazardous voltage can be
present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply.

CAUTION!

 Earthing

Securely earthed the earthing terminal of the device.

 Operating environment

ONLY use the device within the range of ambient environment and in an
environment free of abnormal vibration.

ii PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
Preface

 Ratings

Check the input ratings BEFORE applying AC voltage/current and power supply to
the device.

 Printed circuit board

Do NOT attach or remove printed circuit board if the device is powered on.

 External circuit

Check the supply voltage used when connecting the device output contacts to
external circuits, in order to prevent overheating.

 Connection cable

Carefully handle connection cables without applying excessive force.

NOTICE!

The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify existing


features, please MAKE SURE that the version of this manual is compatible with the
product in your hand.

Copyright © 2015 NR. All rights reserved.

We reserve all rights to this document and to the information contained herein. Improper use in particular reproduction and dissemination
to third parties is strictly forbidden except where expressly authorized.

The information in this manual is carefully checked periodically, and necessary corrections will be included in future editions. If
nevertheless any errors are detected, suggestions for correction or improvement are greatly appreciated.

We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without notice.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD. Tel: +86-25-87178888


Headquarters: 69, Suyuan Avenue, Jiangning, Nanjing 211102, China Fax: +86-25-87178999
Manufactory: 18, Xinfeng Road, Jiangning, Nanjing 211111, China Website: www.nrelect.com, www.nrec.com

PN: ZL_PCS-915IC_X_Instruction Manual_EN_Overseas General_X Version: R2.13

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay iii


Date: 2015-07-13
Preface

Documentation Structure

The manual provides a functional and technical description of this relay and a comprehensive set
of instructions for the relay’s use and application.

All contents provided by this manual are summarized as below:

1 Introduction
Briefly introduce the application, functions and features about this relay.

2 Technical Data
Introduce the technical data about this relay, such as electrical specifications, mechanical
specifications, ambient temperature and humidity range, communication port parameters, type
tests, setting ranges and accuracy limits and the certifications that our products have passed.

3 Operation Theory
Introduce a comprehensive and detailed functional description of all protective elements.

4 Supervision
Introduce the automatic self-supervision function of this relay.

5 Measurement and Recording


Introduce the management function (measurment and recording) of this relay.

6 Hardware
Introduce the main function carried out by each plug-in module of this relay and providing the
definition of pins of each plug-in module, typical wiring is provided.

7 Settings
List settings including system settings, communication settings, label settings, logic links and etc.,
and some notes about the setting application.

8 Human Machine Interface


Introduce the hardware of the human machine interface (HMI) module and a detailed guide for the
user how to use this relay through HMI. It also lists all the information which can be view through
HMI, such as settings, measurements, all kinds of reports etc.

9 Configurable Function
Introduce how to make function configuration, binary input configuration, binary output
configuration and LED indicator configuration etc. through PCS-Explorer software.

10 Communication
Introduce the communication port and protocol which this relay can support, IEC60970-5-103,
IEC61850 and DNP3.0 protocols are introduced in details.

iv PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
Preface

11 Installation
Introduce the recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of this relay. A
guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of this relay is also provided, incorporating
earthing recommendations. A typical wiring connection to this relay is indicated.

12 Commissioning
Introduce how to commission this relay, comprising checks on the calibration and functionality of
this relay.

13 Maintenance
A general maintenance policy for this relay is outlined.

14 Decommissioning and Disposal


A general decommissioning and disposal policy for this relay is outlined.

15 Manual Version History


List the instruction manual version and the modification history records.

Typographic and Graphical Conventions

Deviations may be permitted in drawings and tables when the type of designator can be obviously
derived from the illustration.

The following symbols are used in drawings:

&
AND gate

≥1

OR gate

Comparator

BI Binary signal via opto-coupler

SET I> Input signal from comparator with setting

EN Input signal of logic setting for function enabling

SIG Input of binary signal except those signals via opto-coupler

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay v


Date: 2015-07-13
Preface

OTH Input of other signal

XXX Output signal

Timer
t
Time (optional definite-time or inverse-time characteristic)
t

10ms 2ms
Timer [delay pickup (10ms), delay dropoff (2ms), non-settable]

[XXX] 0ms
Timer (delay pickup, settable)

0ms [XXX]
Timer (delay dropoff, settable)

[XXX] [XXX]
Timer (delay pickup, delay dropoff, settable)

IDMT Timer (inverse-time characteristic)

---xxx is the symbol

Symbol Corresponding Relationship

Basic Example
A, B, C L1, L2, L3 Ia, Ib, Ic, I0 IL1, IL2, IL3, IN
AN, BN, CN L1N, L2N, L3N Ua, Ub, Uc VL1, VL2, VL3
ABC L123 Uab, Ubc, Uca VL12, VL23, VL31
U (voltage) V U0, U1, U2 VN, V1, V2

vi PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
1 Introduction

1 Introduction

Table of Contents
1 Introduction ....................................................................................... 1-a
1.1 Application....................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Function ........................................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 Feature ............................................................................................................. 1-2
1.4 Abbreviation .................................................................................................... 1-4

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 1-a


Date: 2013-12-13
1 Introduction

1-b PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2013-12-13
1 Introduction

1.1 Application
PCS-915IC is a numerical busbar differential protection intended to be used for protecting and
monitoring various busbar arrangement of various voltage levels. It is capable to protect up to 25
bays including bus coupler/section.

PCS-915IC utilizes NR’s innovative hardware platform which supports both conventional CT/VT
and electronic current and voltage transformer (ECVT). It is compliant to several communication
protocols, such as IEC60870-5-103, IEC61850, DNP3.0 and Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP).

The maximized functions are introduced in this manual, for a specific project, some functions
maybe not configured or disabled according to user’s requirement.

NOTICE!

The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings
and sampled values related with each bay and busbar will change with the
corresponding label settings.

In this instruction manual, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding
busbar and “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay. For a bus
coupler bay, “@BCy” is also used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus
coupler. For a bus section bay, “@BSz” is also used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding bus section.

For example, the tripping signal of ground overcurrent protection of bay 02 can be
described as “@Bay02.50/51G.Op_Trp”, if the label setting of bay 02 i.e. [Name_Bay02]
is set as “Fdr01”, the displayed tripping signal of ground overcurrent protection of bay
02 is [Fdr01.50/51G.Op_Trp]. If [Name_Bay02] is set as “BC1”, the displayed tripping
signal of ground overcurrent protection of bay 02 is [BC1.50/51G.Op_Trp]. Please refer
to Section “Label Settings” in Chapter 7 for details.

1.2 Function

PCS-915IC provides the following functions

1. Protection function

 Busbar differential protection (87B)

 Steady-state percentage restraint differential protection

 DPFC percentage restraint differential protection

 Bus coupler protection

 Breaker failure protection (50BF)

 Dead zone fault protection (50DZ)

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 1-1


Date: 2013-12-13
1 Introduction

 Pole disagreement protection (62PD)

 Switch-onto-fault protection (50SOTF)

 Overcurrent protection (50/51)

 Feeder protection

 Breaker failure protection (50BF)

 Dead zone fault protection (50DZ)

 Pole disagreement protection (62PD)

 Overcurrent protection (50/51)

NOTICE!

DPFC is the abbreviation of “deviation of power frequency component”. When a fault


occurs in the power system, the fault current consists of three parts: the pre-fault power
frequency components, the power frequency variables during the fault and the transient
variables during the fault. DPFC is the power frequency variables during the fault.

2. Auxiliary function

 Dynamic busbar replica

 CT circuit supervision

 VT circuit supervision

 Disconnector position alarm

1.3 Feature

1. Protection and Control

 Parallel calculation of double DSP system

 Independent fault detector element

 Accurate measurement which can prevent any undesired trip

 Less than 20ms typical trip time for busbar differential protection

 High sensitive percentage restraint differential protection

 Matching to different CT ratios

 A well proven adaptive weighted anti-saturation algorithm

 Comprehensive event recorder

 Language switchover—English+ selected language

1-2 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2013-12-13
1 Introduction

2. Four kinds of clock synchronization methods

 Conventional

 PPS (RS-485): Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level

 IRIG-B (RS-485): IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level

 PPM (DIN): Pulse per minute (PPM) via the optical coupler

 PPS (DIN): Pulse per second (PPS) via the optical coupler

 SAS

 SNTP (PTP): Unicast (point-to-point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network

 SNTP (BC): Broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network

 Message (IEC103): Clock messages through IEC103 protocol

 Advanced

 IEEE1588: Clock message via IEEE1588

 IRIG-B (Fiber): IRIG-B via optical-fibre interface

 PPS (Fiber): Pulse per second (PPS) via optical-fibre interface

 No clock syncronization

3. Event recorder and disturbance recorder

 1024 latest fault reports

 1024 latest self-supervision reports

 1024 latest status change of binary input reports

 32 latest fault waveforms (The file format of disturbance recorder is compatible with the
international COMTRADE file)

4. Communication

 Optional 2 RS-485 communication rear ports conform to IEC 60870-5-103 protocol

 1 RS-485 communication rear ports for clock synchronization

 Optional 2 or 4 Ethernet ports (depend on the chosen type of MON plug-in module) conform
to IEC 61850 protocol, DNP3.0 protocol or IEC 60870-5-103 protocol over TCP/IP

 Optional 2 Ethernet ports via optic fiber (ST interface) conform to IEC 61850 protocol, DNP3.0
protocol or IEC 60870-5-103 protocol over TCP/IP

 Optional additional module that supports PRP.

 GOOSE and SV communication function (optional NET-DSP plug-in module)

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 1-3


Date: 2013-12-13
1 Introduction

5. User Interface

 Friendly HMI interface with LCD and 9-button keypad on the front panel.

 1 RS-232 rear port for printer

 1 front multiplex RJ45 port for testing and setting

 Language switchover—English+ selected language

 Auxiliary software—PCS-Explorer

1.4 Abbreviation

Symbol Description
FD Fault detector
BBx Busbar No.x, x is the number of each busbar
BCy Bus coupler No.y, y is the number of each bus coupler
BSz Bus section No.z, z is the number of each bus section
feeder m Feeder No.m, m is the number of each feeder
bay n Bay No.n (includes each BC/BS and each feeder), n is the number of each bay
VCE Voltage controlled element
BBP Busbar differential protection
BFP Breaker failure protection
BFI Breaker failure initiation
DZP Dead zone fault protection
PD Pole disagreement protection
IDMT Inverse Definite Minimum Time
SAS Substation automatic system
RTU Remote terminal unit
DPFC Deviation of power frequency component
CT Current transformer
VT Voltage transformer
SV Sampled value

1-4 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data

2 Technical Data

Table of Contents
2 Technical Data ................................................................................... 2-a
2.1 Electrical Specifications ................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 Alternating Analog Current ................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.2 Alternating Analog Voltage ................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.3 Power Supply ....................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.4 Binary Input .......................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.5 Binary Output ....................................................................................................................... 2-2

2.2 Mechanical Specifications.............................................................................. 2-3


2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range .................................................. 2-3
2.4 Communication Port ....................................................................................... 2-3
2.4.1 EIA-485 Port ........................................................................................................................ 2-3

2.4.2 Ethernet Port ........................................................................................................................ 2-4

2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port ................................................................................................................. 2-4

2.4.4 Print Port .............................................................................................................................. 2-4

2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port ................................................................................................. 2-5

2.5 Type Tests ........................................................................................................ 2-5


2.5.1 Environmental Tests............................................................................................................. 2-5

2.5.2 Mechanical Tests ................................................................................................................. 2-5

2.5.3 Electrical Tests ..................................................................................................................... 2-5

2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility ............................................................................................. 2-5

2.6 Certifications ................................................................................................... 2-6


2.7 Protective Functions....................................................................................... 2-6
2.7.1 Busbar Differential Protection .............................................................................................. 2-7

2.7.2 Switch-onto-fault Protection................................................................................................. 2-7

2.7.3 Overcurrent Protection......................................................................................................... 2-7

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 2-a


Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data

2.7.4 Pole Disagreement Protection ............................................................................................. 2-7

2.7.5 Bus Coupler Breaker Failure Protection .............................................................................. 2-7

2.7.6 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection ...................................................................................... 2-7

2-b PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data

2.1 Electrical Specifications

2.1.1 Alternating Analog Current


Phase rotation ABC
Nominal frequency (fn) 50Hz, 60Hz
Rated current (In) 1A 5A
Linear to 0.05In~40In
Thermal withstand
-continuously 4In
-for 10s 30In
-for 1s 100In
-for half a cycle 250In
Burden < 0.15VA/phase @In < 0.25VA/phase @In
Accuracy ±0.5%In

2.1.2 Alternating Analog Voltage


Phase rotation ABC
Nominal frequency (fn) 50Hz, 60Hz
Rated voltage (Un) 100V~130V
Linear to 1V~170V
Thermal withstand
-continuously 200V
-10s 260V
-1s 300V
Burden at rated < 0.20VA/phase @Un
Accuracy ±0.5%Un

2.1.3 Power Supply


Standard IEC 60255-11:2008
Rated voltage 110Vdc/125Vdc/220Vdc/250Vdc
Permissible voltage range 88~300Vdc
Permissible AC ripple voltage ≤15% of the nominal auxiliary voltage
Burden
Quiescent condition <40W
Operating condition <60W

2.1.4 Binary Input


Rated voltage 24Vdc 48Vdc
Rated current drain 1.2mA 2.4mA
On value 16.8-28.8Vdc 33.6-57.6Vdc
Off value <12Vdc <24Vdc

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 2-1


Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data

Maximum permissible voltage 100Vdc


Withstand voltage 2000Vac, 2800Vdc (continuously)
Response time for logic input ≤1ms

Rated voltage 110Vdc 125Vdc 220Vdc 250Vdc


Rated current drain 1.1mA 1.25mA 2.2mA 2.5mA
On value 77-132Vdc 87.5-150Vdc 154-264Vdc 175-300Vdc
Off value <55Vdc <62.5Vdc <110Vdc <125Vdc
Maximum permissible voltage 300Vdc
Withstand voltage 2000Vac, 2800Vdc (continuously)
Response time for logic input ≤1ms

2.1.5 Binary Output


1. Tripping/signaling contact

Output mode Potential free contact


Maximal system voltage 380Vac, 250Vdc
Continuous carry 8A
Pickup time (Typical) <8ms (3ms)
Dropoff time <5ms
0.65A@48Vdc
0.35A@110Vdc
Breaking capacity (L/R=40ms) 0.30A@125Vdc
0.20A@220Vdc
0.15A@250Vdc
12A@3s
18A@1s
Short duration current
24A@0.5s
40A@0.2s
Durability (Loaded contact) 10000 operations
Number Maximum 55

2. Signaling contact

Output mode Potential free contact Potential free contact


Maximal system voltage 380Vac, 250Vdc 380Vac, 250Vdc
Continuous carry 8A 8A
Pickup time <10ms <10ms
Dropoff time <6ms <10ms
0.7A@48Vdc 1.00A@48Vdc
0.4A@110Vdc 0.50A@110Vdc
Breaking capacity (L/R=40ms) 0.3A@125Vdc 0.40A@125Vdc
0.2A@220Vdc 0.25A@220Vdc
0.15A@250Vdc 0.20A@250Vdc
Short duration current 12A@3s 12A@3s

2-2 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data

15A@1s 15A@1s
20A@0.5s 20A@0.5s
30A@0.2s 30A@0.2s
Durability (Loaded contact) 10000 operations 10000 operations
Number Maximum 8 Maximum 3

2.2 Mechanical Specifications

Mounting Way Flush mounted


Housing color Silver grey
Approx. 35kg (8U chassis)
Weight per device
Approx. 10kg (4U extended chassis)
Housing material Aluminum
Location of terminal Rear panel of the device
Device structure Plug-in modular type @ rear side, integrated frontplate
Protection class
Standard IEC 60225-1:2009
Front side IP40
Other sides IP30
Rear side, connection terminals IP20

2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range

Standard IEC 60225-1:2009


Operating temperature -40°C to +70°C (Readability of display may be impaired below -20°C)
Transport and storage temperature
-40°C to +70°C
range
Permissible humidity 5%-95%, without condensation
Pollution degree Ⅱ
Altitude <3000m

2.4 Communication Port

2.4.1 EIA-485 Port


Baud rate 4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103:1997
Maximal capacity 32
Transmission distance <500m
Safety level Isolation to ELV level
Twisted pair Screened twisted pair cable

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 2-3


Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data

2.4.2 Ethernet Port


Connector type RJ-45
Transmission rate 100Mbits/s
Transmission standard 100Base-TX
Transmission distance <100m
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103:1997, DNP 3.0 or IEC 61850
Safety level Isolation to ELV level

2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port


2.4.3.1 For Station Level

Characteristic Glass optical fiber


Connector type ST
Fibre type Multi mode
Transmission distance <2km
Wave length 1310nm
Transmission power Min. -20.0dBm
Minimum receiving power Min. -30.0dBm
Margin Min +3.0dB

2.4.3.2 For Process Level

Characteristic Glass optical fiber


Connector type LC
Fibre type Multi mode
Transmission distance <2km
Wave length 1310nm
Transmission power Min. -20.0dBm
Minimum receiving power Min. -30.0dBm
Margin Min +3.0dB

2.4.3.3 For Synchronization Port

Characteristic Glass optical fiber


Connector type ST
Fibre type Multi mode
Wave length 820nm
Minimum receiving power Min. -25.0dBm
Margin Min +3.0dB

2.4.4 Print Port


Type RS-232
Baud Rate 4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s
Printer type EPSON® 300K printer
Safety level Isolation to ELV level

2-4 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data

2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port


Type RS-485
Transmission distance <500m
Maximal capacity 32
Timing standard PPS, IRIG-B
Safety level Isolation to ELV level

2.5 Type Tests

2.5.1 Environmental Tests


Dry cold test IEC60068-2-1:2007
Dry heat test IEC60068-2-2:2007
Damp heat test, cyclic IEC60068-2-30:2005

2.5.2 Mechanical Tests


Vibration IEC 60255-21-1:1988 Class I
Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2:1988 Class I

2.5.3 Electrical Tests


Standard IEC 60255-27:2005
Dielectric tests Test voltage 2kV, 50Hz, 1min
Standard IEC 60255-5:2000
Impulse voltage tests Test voltage 5kV
Overvoltage category Ⅲ
Insulation resistance
Isolation resistance >100MΩ@500VDC
measurements

2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility


IEC 60255-22-1:2007
1MHz burst disturbance test Common mode: class III 2.5kV
Differential mode: class III 1.0kV
IEC60255-22-2:2008 class IV
Electrostatic discharge test For contact discharge: 8kV
For air discharge: 15kV
IEC 60255-22-3:2007 class III
Frequency sweep
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80~1000MHz
Radio frequency interference tests
Spot frequency
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80MHz/160MHz/450MHz/900MHz
Radiated pulse-modulated

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 2-5


Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data

10V/m (rms), f=900MHz


IEC 60255-22-4:2008
Fast transient disturbance tests Power supply, I/O, Earth: class IV, 4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns
Communication terminals: class IV, 2kV, 5kHz, 5/50ns
IEC 60255-22-5:2008
Power supply, AC input, I/O port: class IV, 1.2/50us
Surge immunity test
Common mode: 4kV
Differential mode: 2kV
IEC 60255-22-6:2001
Conducted RF Electromagnetic
Power supply, AC, I/O, Comm. Terminal: Class III, 10Vrms, 150
Disturbance
kHz~80MHz
Power Frequency Magnetic Field IEC 61000-4-8:2001
Immunity class V, 100A/m for 1min, 1000A/m for 3s
IEC 61000-4-9:2001
Pulse Magnetic Field Immunity
class V, 6.4/16μs, 1000A/m for 3s
Damped oscillatory magnetic field IEC 61000-4-10:2001
immunity class V, 100kHz & 1MHz–100A/m

Auxiliary power supply performance IEC60255-11: 2008


- Voltage dips Up to 500ms for dips to 40% of rated voltage without reset
-Voltage short interruptions 100ms for interruption without rebooting

2.6 Certifications

 ISO9001:2008

 ISO14001:2004

 OHSAS18001:2007

 ISO10012:2003

 CMMI L5

 EMC: 2004/108/EC, EN50263:1999

 Products safety(PS): 2006/95/EC, EN61010-1:2001

2.7 Protective Functions

The meanings of symbols mentioned in the following sections are given here.

In -- rated secondary current of CT

Un -- rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage of VT

2-6 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data

2.7.1 Busbar Differential Protection

Current setting range 0.05In~20.00In

Tolerance of current setting ≤2.5% of setting or 0.02In whichever is greater

Undervoltage setting range 0 ~Un

Residual voltage setting range 0 ~Un

Negative-sequence voltage setting range 0 ~Un

Accuracy of voltage setting ≤2.5% of setting or 0.01Un, whichever is greater

2.7.2 Switch-onto-fault Protection

Current setting range 0.05In~20.00In

Tolerance of current setting ≤2.5% of setting or 0.02In whichever is greater

2.7.3 Overcurrent Protection

Current setting range 0.05In~20.00In

Tolerance of current setting ≤2.5% of setting or 0.02In whichever is greater

Time setting range 0.00~10.00s

Tolerance of time setting ≤1%xSetting + 40ms

2.7.4 Pole Disagreement Protection

Residual current setting range 0.05In~20.00In

Negative-sequence current setting range 0.05In~20.00In

Tolerance of current setting ≤2.5% of setting or 0.02In whichever is greater

Time setting range 0.00~10.00s

Tolerance of time setting ≤1%xSetting + 40ms

2.7.5 Bus Coupler Breaker Failure Protection

Current setting range 0.05In~20.00In

Tolerance of current setting ≤2.5% of setting or 0.02In whichever is greater

Time setting range 0.00~10.00s

Tolerance of time setting ≤1%xSetting + 40ms

2.7.6 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection

Phase current setting range 0.05In~20.00In

Residual current setting range 0.05In~20.00In

Negative-sequence current setting range 0.05In~20.00In

Tolerance of current setting ≤2.5% of setting or 0.02In whichever is greater

Time setting range 0.00~10.00s

Tolerance of time setting ≤1%xSetting + 40ms

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 2-7


Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data

Undervoltage setting range 0 ~Un

Zero-sequence voltage setting range 0 ~Un

Negative sequence voltage setting range 0 ~Un

Accuracy of voltage setting ≤2.5% of setting or 0.01Un, whichever is greater

2-8 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2013-12-13
3 Operation Theory

3 Operation Theory

Table of Contents
3 Operation Theory .............................................................................. 3-a
3.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Supported Busbar Arrangements .................................................................. 3-1
3.3 Market Ordering Table (MOT) Configuration ................................................. 3-7
3.4 Function Configuration ................................................................................ 3-10
3.5 Busbar Differential Protection ..................................................................... 3-13
3.5.1 Fault Detector (FD) Element.............................................................................................. 3-14

3.5.2 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 3-15

3.5.3 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 3-22

3.5.4 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-22

3.5.5 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-25

3.5.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-27

3.6 BC/BS Dead Zone Fault Protection ............................................................. 3-30


3.6.1 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 3-30

3.6.2 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 3-32

3.6.3 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-32

3.6.4 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-33

3.6.5 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-33

3.7 Feeder Dead Zone Fault Protection (DZP) .................................................. 3-34


3.7.1 Fault Detector Element ...................................................................................................... 3-34

3.7.2 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 3-34

3.7.3 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 3-35

3.7.4 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-35

3.7.5 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-36

3.7.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-37

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-a


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

3.8 BC/BS Switch-onto-fault (SOTF) Protection ............................................... 3-38


3.8.1 Fault Detector Element ...................................................................................................... 3-38

3.8.2 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 3-38

3.8.3 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 3-39

3.8.4 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-39

3.8.5 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-40

3.8.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-41

3.9 Overcurrent (OC) Protection ........................................................................ 3-42


3.9.1 Fault Detector Element ...................................................................................................... 3-42

3.9.2 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 3-43

3.9.3 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 3-44

3.9.4 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-44

3.9.5 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-46

3.9.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-46

3.10 Pole Disagreement (PD) Protection ........................................................... 3-51


3.10.1 Fault Detector Element .................................................................................................... 3-51

3.10.2 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 3-51

3.10.3 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 3-51

3.10.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-51

3.10.5 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-52

3.10.6 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-53

3.11 BC/BS Breaker Failure Protection (BFP) ................................................... 3-54


3.11.1 Fault Detector Element .................................................................................................... 3-54

3.11.2 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 3-55

3.11.3 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................... 3-56

3.11.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................. 3-56

3.11.5 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-57

3.11.6 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-58

3.12 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection (BFP) .................................................. 3-59


3.12.1 Fault Detector Element .................................................................................................... 3-59

3-b PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

3.12.2 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 3-59

3.12.3 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 3-62

3.12.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-63

3.12.5 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-64

3.12.6 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-65

3.13 CT Circuit Supervision ............................................................................... 3-68


3.13.1 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 3-68

3.13.2 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 3-71

3.13.3 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-71

3.13.4 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-76

3.14 VT Circuit Supervision ................................................................................ 3-77


3.14.1 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 3-77

3.14.2 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 3-78

3.14.3 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-78

3.14.4 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-79

3.15 Position of Disconnector and Circuit Breaker .......................................... 3-79


3.15.1 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 3-79

3.15.2 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-81

3.15.3 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-84

3.15.4 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-86

3.16 BC/BS Breaker Substitution and Bypass Breaker Substitution.............. 3-86


3.16.1 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 3-87

3.16.2 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-90

3.17 GOOSE and SV Function ............................................................................ 3-90


3.17.1 The Effect of Data Abnormality ........................................................................................ 3-91

3.17.2 Out of Service of a Bay .................................................................................................... 3-91

3.17.3 Maintenance Binary Input ................................................................................................ 3-92

3.17.4 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-92

3.17.5 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-93

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-c


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

List of Figures
Figure 3.2-1 Single BB ................................................................................................................ 3-1

Figure 3.2-2 Single BB with one BS (single CT)....................................................................... 3-2

Figure 3.2-3 Single BB with one BS (dual CTs) ........................................................................ 3-2

Figure 3.2-4 Single BB with two BS (single CT) ....................................................................... 3-3

Figure 3.2-5 Single BB with two BS (dual CTs) ........................................................................ 3-3

Figure 3.2-6 Double BB with one BC (single CT) ..................................................................... 3-4

Figure 3.2-7 Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) ...................................................................... 3-4

Figure 3.2-8 Double BB with one BC (single CT) and two BS (single CT) ............................ 3-5

Figure 3.2-9 Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) and two BS (single CT).............................. 3-6

Figure 3.2-10 Double BB with two BC (single CT) and one BS (single CT) .......................... 3-7

Figure 3.2-11 Double BB with two BC (dual CTs) and one BS (dual CTs) ............................. 3-7

Figure 3.5-1 Sketch diagram of double busbars with one BC (single CT) arrangement ... 3-14

Figure 3.5-2 Operation characteristic of steady-state percentage restraint differential


element ................................................................................................................................ 3-16

Figure 3.5-3 Operation characteristic of DPFC percentage restraint differential element 3-18

Figure 3.5-4 Waveform of CT saturation during external fault ............................................. 3-21

Figure 3.5-5 Logic of busbar differential protection .............................................................. 3-23

Figure 3.5-6 Logic diagram of voltage controlled element ................................................... 3-25

Figure 3.6-1 Logic of BC/BS dead zone fault protection....................................................... 3-33

Figure 3.7-1 Logic of feeder dead zone fault protection ....................................................... 3-36

Figure 3.8-1 Logic of SOTF protection .................................................................................... 3-40

Figure 3.9-1 Logic of overcurrent protection ......................................................................... 3-45

Figure 3.10-1 Logic of pole disagreement protection ........................................................... 3-52

Figure 3.11-1 The logic scheme of BFI of BS ......................................................................... 3-55

Figure 3.11-2 Logic of BC/BS BFP ........................................................................................... 3-56

Figure 3.11-3 Logic of BS BFP (BS is at the edge of the protected zone) .......................... 3-57

Figure 3.12-1 Logic of feeder BFP ........................................................................................... 3-63

Figure 3.13-1 Logic of CT circuit failure.................................................................................. 3-71

3-d PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Figure 3.13-2 Logic of BBx differential current low value alarm .......................................... 3-72

Figure 3.13-3 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that only one CT is available)
.............................................................................................................................................. 3-72

Figure 3.13-4 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that double CTs are available)
.............................................................................................................................................. 3-73

Figure 3.13-5 Logic of CT circuit abnormality ........................................................................ 3-74

Figure 3.13-6 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that only one CT is
available) ............................................................................................................................. 3-75

Figure 3.13-7 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that double CTs are
available) ............................................................................................................................. 3-76

Figure 3.14-1 Logic of VT circuit failure .................................................................................. 3-78

Figure 3.15-1 Logic of inter-connection mode alarm ............................................................ 3-81

Figure 3.15-2 Logic of disconnector position alarm ............................................................. 3-82

Figure 3.15-3 Logic of automatic correction of disconnector position ............................... 3-83

Figure 3.15-4 Logic of dual-position alarm............................................................................. 3-84

Figure 3.16-1 BC/BS breaker substituting through BB2 ....................................................... 3-88

Figure 3.16-2 BC/BS breaker substituting through BB1 ....................................................... 3-88

Figure 3.16-3 Bypass breaker substitution (the CT of the substituted feeder is located at the
inside of the transfer bus disconnector) ......................................................................... 3-89

Figure 3.16-4 Bypass breaker substitution (the CT of the substituted feeder is located at the
outside of the transfer bus disconnector)....................................................................... 3-90

List of Tables
Table 3.3-1 MOT configuration table in PCS-Explorer software ............................................. 3-8

Table 3.3-2 Contents of the option “Software Version”........................................................... 3-9

Table 3.4-1 Function configuration table in PCS-Explorer software.................................... 3-10

Table 3.5-1 Restraint coefficients of DPFC BBP .................................................................... 3-18

Table 3.5-2 Input signals of busbar differential protection ................................................... 3-25

Table 3.5-3 Output signals of busbar differential protection ................................................ 3-26

Table 3.5-4 Busbar differential protection settings ............................................................... 3-27

Table 3.5-5 Function links of busbar differential protection................................................. 3-30

Table 3.6-1 Input signals of BC/BS dead zone fault protection ............................................ 3-33

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-e


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Table 3.6-2 Output signals of BC/BS dead zone fault protection ......................................... 3-33

Table 3.6-3 BC dead zone fault protection settings ............................................................... 3-34

Table 3.7-1 Input signals of feeder dead zone fault protection ............................................ 3-36

Table 3.7-2 Output signals of feeder dead zone fault protection ......................................... 3-37

Table 3.7-3 Feeder dead zone fault protection settings ........................................................ 3-37

Table 3.7-4 Function links of feeder dead zone fault protection .......................................... 3-38

Table 3.8-1 Input signals of BC/BS SOTF protection............................................................. 3-40

Table 3.8-2 Output signals of BC/BS SOTF protection ......................................................... 3-41

Table 3.8-3 Switch-onto-fault protection settings .................................................................. 3-41

Table 3.8-4 Function links of BC/BS SOTF protection .......................................................... 3-42

Table 3.9-1 Input signals of overcurrent protection .............................................................. 3-46

Table 3.9-2 Output signals of overcurrent protection ........................................................... 3-46

Table 3.9-3 Overcurrent protection settings........................................................................... 3-46

Table 3.9-4 Function links of overcurrent protection ............................................................ 3-50

Table 3.10-1 Input signals of pole disagreement protection ................................................ 3-52

Table 3.10-2 Output signals of pole disagreement protection ............................................. 3-53

Table 3.10-3 PD protection settings ........................................................................................ 3-53

Table 3.10-4 Function links of pole disagreement protection .............................................. 3-54

Table 3.11-1 Input signals of BC/BS breaker failure protection ........................................... 3-57

Table 3.11-2 Output signals of BC/BS breaker failure protection ........................................ 3-58

Table 3.11-3 BC/BS breaker failure protection settings ........................................................ 3-58

Table 3.12-1 Input signals of feeder breaker failure protection............................................ 3-64

Table 3.12-2 Output signals of feeder breaker failure protection ........................................ 3-65

Table 3.12-3 Feeder breaker failure protection settings ....................................................... 3-65

Table 3.12-4 Function links of feeder breaker failure protection ......................................... 3-68

Table 3.13-1 Output signal of CT circuit supervision ............................................................ 3-76

Table 3.14-1 Output signal of VT circuit supervision ............................................................ 3-79

Table 3.15-1 Position status of disconnector ......................................................................... 3-80

Table 3.15-2 Position status of circuit breaker ....................................................................... 3-80

Table 3.15-3 Input signals of position of disconnector and circuit breaker ....................... 3-84

3-f PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Table 3.15-4 Output signals of position of disconnector and circuit breaker .................... 3-85

Table 3.15-5 Function link of circuit breaker .......................................................................... 3-86

Table 3.16-1 Input signal of breaker substitution .................................................................. 3-90

Table 3.16-2 Output signal of breaker substitution ............................................................... 3-90

Table 3.17-1 Output signal of GOOSE and SV function ........................................................ 3-92

Table 3.17-2 Function link ......................................................................................................... 3-93

Table 3.17-3 GOOSE sending link ............................................................................................ 3-93

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-g


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

3.1 Overview
PCS-915 can provide busbar differential protection (BBP), bus coupler/section protection (includes
overcurrent protection, switch-onto-fault protection, pole disagreement protection, dead zone fault
protection and breaker failure protection), feeder protection (includes overcurrent protection, pole
disagreement protection, dead zone fault protection and breaker failure protection), CT circuit
supervision and VT circuit supervision. For a specific project, some functions maybe not
configured or disabled according to user’s requirement.

The device has 2 plug-in modules (protection DSP module and fault detector DSP module) to
perform calculation. The protection DSP module is responsible for calculation of protection
elements, and fault detector DSP module is responsible for calculation of fault detectors. Any fault
detector on fault detector DSP module picks up to provide positive supply of output relays. The
relays will trip only if the fault detector and the corresponding protection element operate
simultaneously. On the premise of 24 samples per cycle, all data measurement, calculation and
logic discrimination can be processed within one sampling period. The event recording and
protection logic calculation are completed simultaneously.

3.2 Supported Busbar Arrangements


The following figures show the applications of PCS-915 for several typical busbar arrangements.

BB: busbar; BC: bus coupler; BS: bus section.

Panel A

PCS-915

* * * * * *
……

VT1

BB1

Figure 3.2-1 Single BB

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-1


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Panel A

PCS-915
*

*
BS1
……
*

……
VT1 VT2

BB1 BB2

Figure 3.2-2 Single BB with one BS (single CT)

Panel A

PCS-915
*

BS1
……
*
*

…… VT2
VT1 CT2 CT1

BB1 BB2

Figure 3.2-3 Single BB with one BS (dual CTs)

3-2 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Panel A

PCS-915

* * * *
…… ……
VT1 VT2 VT3
* *
BS1 BS2

BB1 BB2 BB3

Figure 3.2-4 Single BB with two BS (single CT)

Panel A

PCS-915

* * * *
…… ……
VT1 VT2 VT3
* * * *
CT2 CT1 CT2
BS1 BS2 CT1

BB1 BB2 BB3

Figure 3.2-5 Single BB with two BS (dual CTs)

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-3


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Panel A

PCS-915

* * * *
……

VT1

* BB1

VT2
BC1

BB2

Figure 3.2-6 Double BB with one BC (single CT)

Panel A

PCS-915

* * * *
……

VT1

CT2
* BB1

VT2
BC1
* CT1 BB2

Figure 3.2-7 Double BB with one BC (dual CTs)

3-4 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Panel A

PCS-915-A

Panel B

PCS-915-B

* …… * * …… *
*

VT1 BS1 VT1

BB1 BB1
* *

BC1 VT2 VT2 BC2

BB2 BB2

BS2
*

Figure 3.2-8 Double BB with one BC (single CT) and two BS (single CT)

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-5


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Panel A

PCS-915-A

Panel B

PCS-915-B

* …… * * …… *
*

VT1 BS1 VT1

BB1 BB1
CT2 CT2 *
*
BC1 VT2 VT2 BC2

* CT1 CT1 *
BB2 BB2

BS2
*

Figure 3.2-9 Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) and two BS (single CT)

3-6 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Panel A

PCS-915

* * *

VT1 …… …… VT3
*
BS1

* BB1 BB3 *
VT2
BC1 BC2

BB2

Figure 3.2-10 Double BB with two BC (single CT) and one BS (single CT)

Panel A

PCS-915

* * *

VT1 …… …… VT3
*
BS1

BB1 BB3
CT2 CT2
* *
VT2
BC1 BC2
* CT1 CT1 *
BB2

Figure 3.2-11 Double BB with two BC (dual CTs) and one BS (dual CTs)

3.3 Market Ordering Table (MOT) Configuration


PCS-Explorer software is developed in order to meet customer’s demand on functions of UAPC
platform device such as device configuration and programmable design. Please refer to Chapter 9
for detailed configuration method about PCS-Explorer software.

MOT is provided for users to order the device. According to the selected series number of MOT,
the applied busbar arrangement, some software and hardware related function can be configured
via the PCS-Explorer software (Please refer to Chapter 9 for detailed configuration method).

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-7


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Table 3.3-1 MOT configuration table in PCS-Explorer software

Application Remark
A: Single BB, 1½ Breakers
B: Single BB with one BS (single CT)
C: Single BB with one BS (dual CTs)
D: Single BB with two BS (single CT)
E: Single BB with two BS (dual CTs) BB: busbar;
F: Double BB with one BC (single CT) BC: bus coupler;
G: Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) BS: bus section.
H: Double BB with one BC (single CT) and two BS (single CT)
I: Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) and two BS (single CT)
J: Double BB with two BC (single CT) and one BS (single CT)
K: Double BB with two BC (dual CTs) and one BS (dual CTs)
The option is reserved for other busbar
L: Other arrangement, further modifications for
the program are required
Software Version
A: Standard 1 Please refer to Table 3.3-2 for concrete
B: Standard 2 contents
Language
C: English + Chinese
F: English + French
R: English + Russian
S: English + Spanish
Protocol
A: IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS & GOOSE)
B: IEC 60870-5-103 (Ethernet, Serial port)
C: DNP 3.0 (Ethernet)
Number of Terminals
Only a 8U chassis Each BC/BS
A: 1~16 (use 8U device)
is available (double CTs are
A 4U extended available) will take
B: 17~25 (use 8U+4U device)
chassis is added up two terminals
Dual-position Binary Inputs (BI)
X: Not required
A: Dual-position BI for disconnector
B: Dual-position BI for circuit breaker
C: Dual-position BI for disconnector and circuit breaker
Voltage Concerned Functions
A: With voltage concerned functions
B: Without voltage concerned functions
Communication Ports&Time Synchronization Mode

3-8 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

A: 3 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ45) + 2 x RS-485 + RS-485 The MON plug in module is NR1101F


(IRIG-B or PPS) + RS-232 (Printer) module
B: 4 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ45) + RS-485 (IRIG-B or PPS) + The MON plug in module is NR1102M
RS-232 (Printer) module
C: 2 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ45) + 2 x 100Base-FX The MON plug in module is NR1102N
(ST-Connector) + RS-485 (IRIG-B or PPS) + RS-232 (Printer) module
AC Input
A: CT 1A
B: CT 5A
Power Supply for Device
A: 110~250Vdc

1) “Voltage Concerned Functions”

If “B: Without voltage concerned functions” is selected, all the voltage related functions will quit
(DPFC voltage FD element and VT circuit supervision will not function, busbar differential
protection and breaker failure protection will not controlled by respective voltage controlled
element), and all settings and information related to voltage will be hidden.

If “A: With voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions”, voltage
related settings and information can be displayed, but all the voltage related function will be
controlled by the device setting [En_Volt_BB] (refer to Section 7.1). If [En_Volt_BB] is set as “0”,
all the voltage related functions will be disabled (DPFC voltage FD element and VT circuit
supervision will not function, busbar differential protection and breaker failure protection will not
controlled by respective voltage controlled element); if [En_Volt_BB] is set as “1”, DPFC voltage
FD element and VT circuit supervision are enabled, voltage controlled element of busbar
differential protection and breaker failure protection will be controlled by respective logic setting
([87B.VCE.En] and [50BF.VCE.En]).

2) “Dual-position Binary Inputs (BI)”

In this option, if dual-position BI for disconnector is enabled, the device will get both normally
closed auxiliary contact and normally open auxiliary contact of a disconnector to indicate the
position of the disconnector. If dual-position BI for disconnector is disabled, the device will only get
normally open auxiliary contact of a disconnector to indicate the position of the disconnector.

If dual-position BI for circuit breaker is enabled, the device will get both normally closed auxiliary
contact and normally open auxiliary contact of a breaker to indicate the position of the breaker. If
dual-position BI for circuit breaker is disabled, the device will only get normally closed auxiliary
contact of a breaker to indicate the position of the breaker.

The concrete contents about the two options of “Software Version” are listed in following table.

Table 3.3-2 Contents of the option “Software Version”

Function Standard 1 Standard 2


Busbar differential protection √ √
BC/BS dead zone fault protection √ √

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-9


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

BC/BS breaker failure protection √ √


BC/BS pole disagreement protection √ √
BC/BS overcurrent protection √ √
BC/BS switch-onto-fault protection √ √
Feeder breaker failure protection √ √
Feeder dead zone fault protection √
Feeder pole disagreement protection √
Feeder overcurrent protection √
Configurable I/O, LED and programmable logic √ √
CT and VT circuit failure supervision (CTS, VTS) √ √
Timing standard: PPS, PPM, IRIG-B, SNTP √ √

NOTICE!

If “Standard 1” is selected for “Software Version”, feeder dead zone fault protection,
feeder pole disagreement protection and feeder overcurrent protection are disabled,
and all the related settings and information are hidden.

3.4 Function Configuration


The ancillary protection functions also can be configured via the PCS-Explorer software (Please
refer to Chapter 9 for detailed configuration method).

Table 3.4-1 Function configuration table in PCS-Explorer software

Basic information configuration

1 All protective function Enable/Disable

2 Phase-segregated breaker position Enable/Disable

3 Phase-segregated binary input for initiating BFP Enable/Disable

4 Enforced disconnector position Enable/Disable

5 BC/BS breaker substitution Enable/Disable

Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is configured


6 Enable/Disable
according to each bay

7 Logic setting of a protective element is configured according to each bay Enable/Disable

Protective function configuration

8 Breaker failure protection re-tripping function Enable/Disable

9 Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection Enable/Disable

10 IDMT overcurrent characteristic Enable/Disable

DNP3.0

11 TCP1 Enable/Disable

12 TCP2 Enable/Disable

13 TCP3 Enable/Disable

14 TCP4 Enable/Disable

3-10 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

1) “All protective function”

If it is set as “Enable”, the binary input [BI_En_Prot] and the function link [Link_Prot] are enabled.
All the protective function will be controlled by [BI_En_Prot], [Link_Prot], their respective enabling
binary input and function link. If [BI_En_Prot] is de-energized or [Link_Prot] is set as “0”, all the
protective functions are disabled.
If it is set as “Disable”, the binary input [BI_En_Prot] and the function link [Link_Prot] are not
configured. All the protective function will only be controlled by their respective enabling binary
input and function link.
Takes BBP as an example, if “All protective function” is set as “Enable”, BBP can be enabled only
if [BI_En_Prot] and [87B.BI_En] are all energized and the function links [87B.Link] and [Link_Prot]
are set as “1”. If any condition is not met, BBP is disabled. If “All protective function” is set as
“Disable”, the binary input [BI_En_Prot] and the function link [Link_Prot] are not configured, and all
the protective functions will not be controlled by them.

2) “Phase-segregated breaker position”

If it is set as “Enable”, phase-segregated breaker position binary input is configured, if it is set as


“Disable”, three-phase breaker position binary input is configured.

3) “Phase-segregated binary input for initiating BFP”

If it is set as “Enable”, phase-segregated tripping contact and three-phase tripping contact for
initiating breaker failure protection are configured, if it is set as “Disable”, only three-phase tripping
contact for initiating breaker failure protection is configured.

4) “Enforced disconnector position”

If it is set as “Enable”, and the corresponding enforced disconnector position link [@Bayn.Link_DS]
is set as “1”, the disconnector position of bay n will be decided by function link(s)
[@Bayn.Link_DS_@BBx] (x=1, 2 …..), if [@Bayn.Link_DS_@BBx] is set as “1”, BBx disconnector
of bay n is taken as closed enforcedly, When [@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”, if
[@Bayn.Link_DS_@BBn] and [@Bayn.Link_DS_@BBm] are set as “1” at the same time (n≠m),
the corresponding alarm signal [Alm_IntLinkx] will be issued. If the enforced disconnector position
link [@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”, [@Bayn.Link_DS_@BBx] (x=1, 2 …..) are all set as “0”, but
current is detected in bay n, disconnector position alarm [@Bayn.Alm_DS] will be issued
simultaneously.

If it is set as “Disable”, the position status of disconnector is identified according to normally open
auxiliary contact and normally closed auxiliary contact of disconnector.

5) BC/BS breaker substitution

For the busbar system arrangement that BC/BS breaker can be used temporarily to substitute one
of feeder breakers through transfer bus, it should be set as “Enable”, otherwise it should be set as
“Disable”.

6) Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is configured according
to each bay

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-11


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

When it is set as “Enable”, the enabling binary inputs and function links of feeder dead zone fault
protection, switch-onto-fault protection, overcurrent protection and pole disagreement protection
are configured according to each bay. For each bay, disabling binary input is not configured.

When it is set as “Disable”, there is only one enabling binary input and function link of feeder dead
zone fault protection, switch-onto-fault protection, overcurrent protection and pole disagreement
protection for all bays.

Takes overcurrent protection as an example, if it is set as “Enable”, the enabling binary input and
function link of overcurrent protection is [@Bayn.50/51.BI_En] and [@Bayn.50/51.Link]
respectively (one for per bay); if it is set as “Disable”, the enabling binary input and function link of
overcurrent protection is [50/51.BI_En] and [50/51.Link] respectively (one for all bays).

7) Logic setting of a protective element is configured according to each bay

When it is set as “Enable”, the logic setting of feeder dead zone fault protection, switch-onto-fault
protection, overcurrent protection and pole disagreement protection are configured according to
each bay.

When it is set as “Disable”, there is only one logic setting of feeder dead zone fault protection,
switch-onto-fault protection, overcurrent protection and pole disagreement protection for all bays.

Takes overcurrent protection as an example, if it is set as “Enable”, the logic setting of overcurrent
protection is [@Bayn.50/51P.En] (phase overcurrent protection) and [@Bayn.50/51G.En] (ground
overcurrent protection) (one for per bay); if it is set as “Disable”, the logic setting of overcurrent
protection is [50/51P.En] (phase overcurrent protection) and [50/51G.En] (one for all bays).

8) “Breaker failure protection re-tripping function”

When it is set as “Enable”, breaker failure protection re-tripping function will be enabled, once BFP
operates, it will operate to re-trip concerned breaker after the time delay of [50BF.t_ReTrp]. If it is
set as “Disable”, breaker failure protection re-tripping function will be disabled and the time setting
for BFP [50BF.t_ReTrp] will be hidden.

9) “Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection”

When it is set as “Enable”, the binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker
failure protection is enabled. Then if the releasing voltage controlled element binary input is
energized and the corresponding logic setting [Bayn.50BF.En_BI_RlsVCE] is set as “1”, the
voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection for the bay will be released. If the
releasing voltage controlled element binary input is energized for over 10s, it will be invalid and an
alarm signal will be issued.
When it is set as “Disable”, the binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker
failure protection is disabled.

10) “IDMT overcurrent characteristic”

When “IDMT overcurrent characteristic” is set as “Enable”, there will be an option of IDMT
characteristic for both BC/BS overcurrent protection and feeder overcurrent protection. When
“IDMT overcurrent characteristic” is set as “Disable”, all settings related to IDMT characteristic will

3-12 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

be hidden.

11) “TCPx”

When it is set as “Enable”, network No.x DNP client is enabled, then the related DNP
communication settings correspond to network No.x will be released. When it is set as “Disable”,
network No.x DNP client is disabled, then the related DNP communication settings correspond to
network No.x will be hidden.

If DNP3.0 protocol is not adopted, “TCPx” (x=1, 2, 3 and 4) should be set as “disable”.

3.5 Busbar Differential Protection


NOTICE!

The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings
and sampled values related with each bay and busbar will change with the
corresponding label settings.

In Section 3.5, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding busbar and
“@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay. For a bus coupler
bay, “@BCy” is also used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus coupler. For
a bus section bay, “@BSz” is also used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus
section.

The primary protection of PCS-915 is phase-segregated percentage restraint differential


protection. The differential circuits include check zone differential circuit and discriminating zone
differential circuits of each busbar zone. The check zone differential element is used to distinguish
between internal and external fault of the overall busbar system, it measures the current from all
the circuits connected to the busbar system except BC and BS (For the occasion that BS is at the
edge of the protected zone, BS will be taken as an feeder bay, such as BS1 and BS2 in Figure
3.2-9, the BS current will be included in check zone differential element). The discriminating zone
differential elements are used to select faulty zone by measuring the current of all the circuits
connected to individual zones of the busbar system separated by BC and BS.

Figure 3.5-1 shows a primary power system of double busbars with one BC (single CT)
arrangement, the two busbars are defined as busbar No.1 (BB1) and busbar No.2 (BB2)
respectively. The polarity mark of feeder CT is on the busbar side, and the polarity mark of BC CT
is on BB1 side.

For usual busbar system arrangement, the polarity mark definition are shown in Figure 3.2-1 to
Figure 3.2-11.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-13


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Discriminative Discriminative
Check zone
zone No.1 zone No.2

……

* * * *

BB1
*

BC1

BB2

Figure 3.5-1 Sketch diagram of double busbars with one BC (single CT) arrangement

NOTICE!

The protective device ONLY identifies the physical position of busbar, ignoring the
number of busbar, takes the busbar arrangement in Figure 3.5-1 as an example, if only
one CT is available at BC1, the protective device will refer the busbar of which the
polarity of BC1 CT is towards as BB1.

Discriminative zone No.1 is defined as discriminative differential element of BB1. Discriminative


zone No.2 is defined as discriminative differential element of BB2.

3.5.1 Fault Detector (FD) Element

PCS-915 provides three independent FD elements for busbar differential protection, which are
DPFC voltage FD element, DPFC current FD element and differential current FD element. If any of
these three elements picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then available and wait
for the tripping signal from busbar differential protection. The fault detector output signal will last
for 500ms after the corresponding fault detector element drop off.

1. DPFC voltage FD element

When DPFC voltage of any phase of any busbar is larger than the threshold, DPFC voltage FD
element picks up, the operating criterion is:

Δu>ΔUFloat+0.05Un Equation 3.5-1

Where:

Δu: Instantaneous value of phase-to-ground DPFC voltage

ΔUFloat: Float threshold value, automatically varied with the gradually voltage changing

3-14 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

0.05Un: Fixed threshold value, Un is the rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage.

If “B: Without voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions” during
MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3) or the device setting [En_Volt_BB] is set as “0” or VT
circuit failure is detected, DPFC voltage FD element will quit automatically.

2. DPFC current FD element

If DPFC check zone restraint current is larger than the threshold, DPFC current fault detector
element will operate, the operating criterion is:

Δsi>ΔSIFloat+0.5In Equation 3.5-2

Where:

Δsi: Instantaneous value of DPFC check zone restraint current of any phase (scalar sum of current
change of all circuits/bays for check zone)

ΔSIFloat: Float threshold value, automatically varied with the gradually current changing

0.5In: Fixed threshold value, In is the rated secondary current of reference CT.

3. Differential current FD element

When any phase of the check zone differential current is larger than the setting, this element will
operate. The operating criterion is:

ID> [87B.I_Pkp] Equation 3.5-3

Where:

ID: Differential phase current of check zone

[87B.I_Pkp]: Current setting of busbar differential protection

3.5.2 Function Description

3.5.2.1 Percentage Restraint Differential Element

The percentage restraint differential element includes steady-state percentage restraint differential
element and DPFC percentage restraint differential element.

 Steady-state percentage restraint differential element

m
The differential current: ID = Ij1
j

m
The restraint current: IR = I
j1
j

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-15


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

The operating criterion is:

I D  [87B.I _ Pkp]
 Equation 3.5-4
 I D  KI R

Where:

K: Restraint coefficient of steady-state differential element

Ij: The current of the j-th feeder (Feeder j) connected

[87B.I_Pkp]: Current setting of busbar differential protection

The operation characteristic is shown as Figure 3.5-2.

ID

ID=IR Operation region

ID=kIR

[87B.I_Pkp]

IR

Figure 3.5-2 Operation characteristic of steady-state percentage restraint differential element

Take into consideration both the CT anti-saturation capability and the sensitivity of steady-state
check zone differential element for a fault occurred in the weak source bus zone when the BC
breaker is open, dual restraint coefficients [87B.SlopeH_CZ, 87B.SlopeL_CZ] and
[87B.SlopeH_DZ, 87B.SlopeL_DZ] are adopted for steady-state check zone and discriminative
zones respectively.

When one of the following conditions is fulfilled, the busbar steady-state percentage restraint
differential protection will operate.

1. Steady-state check zone differential element with high restraint coefficient ([87B.SlopeH_CZ],
0.5 is recommended) operates and steady-state discriminative zone differential element with
low restraint coefficient ([87B.SlopeL_DZ], 0.5 is recommended) operates.

2. Steady-state check zone differential element with low restraint coefficient ([87B.SlopeL_CZ],
0.3 is recommended) operates and steady-state discriminative zone differential element with

3-16 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

high restraint coefficient ([87B.SlopeH_DZ], 0.6 is recommended) operates.

 DPFC percentage restraint differential element

The DPFC percentage restraint differential element is adopted to enhance the performance of
busbar protection against high impedance fault and the influence of heavy loading condition. The
busbar DPFC differential protection is formed by DPFC percentage restraint differential element
and steady-state check zone percentage restraint differential element with fixed restraint
coefficient 0.2.

m
The DPFC differential current: ΔID =  ΔI
j1
j

m
The DPFC restraint current: ΔIR =  ΔI
j1
j

The operating criterion is:

ΔID  ΔIDFloat  I DP ickup



I D  0.2I R Equation 3.5-5
 ΔID  K / ΔIR

Where:

K': DPFC restraint coefficient

ΔIj: DPFC current of the j-th feeder (Feeder j) connected

ΔIDFloat: Float threshold value of DPFC check zone differential current

IDPickup: Fixed threshold value of DPFC check zone differential current, which derives from the
setting of [87B.I_Pkp]

The operation characteristic is shown as Figure 3.5-4.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-17


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

ΔID

ΔID=ΔIR

Operation region

ΔID=k'ΔIR

[87B.I_Pkp]

ΔIR
IRSet

Figure 3.5-3 Operation characteristic of DPFC percentage restraint differential element

Similar to steady-state percentage restraint differential element, dual restraint coefficients are also
introduced to DPFC differential element. The restraint coefficients are fixed at [0.65, 0.3] and [0.65,
0.5] for DPFC check zone and discriminating zones respectively.

When the steady-state check zone percentage restraint differential element with fixed restraint
coefficient of 0.2 operates, if one of the following conditions is fulfilled, the busbar DPFC
percentage restraint differential protection will operate.

1. DPFC check zone percentage restraint differential element with high restraint coefficient (0.65)
operates and DPFC discriminating zone percentage restraint differential element with low
restraint coefficient (0.5) operates.

2. DPFC check zone percentage restraint differential element with low restraint coefficient (0.3)
operates and DPFC discriminating zone percentage restraint differential element with high
restraint coefficient (0.65) operates.

Following table shows the restraint coefficients for DPFC differential element.

Table 3.5-1 Restraint coefficients of DPFC BBP

Check Zone Discriminative Zone


PCS-915IC
High Low High Low
DPFC differential element 0.65 0.3 0.65 0.5

3.5.2.2 Voltage Controlled Element of Busbar Differential Protection (VCE_BBP)

Voltage controlled element is used as an auxiliary condition.

The operating criteria are:

UP ≤ [87B.VCE.U_Set] Equation 3.5-6

3-18 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

3U0 ≥ [87B.VCE.3U0_Set] Equation 3.5-7

U2 ≥ [87B.VCE.U2_Set] Equation 3.5-8

Where:

UP: Phase voltage

3U0: Residual voltage (calculated internally)

U2: Negative sequence voltage

[87B.VCE.U_Set]: Phase voltage setting for blocking BBP

[87B.VCE.3U0_Set]: Residual voltage setting for blocking BBP

[87B.VCE.U2_Set]: Negative voltage setting for blocking BBP

When the protective device is applied to an unearthed system, i.e. the system setting
[Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as “1”, the criteria of voltage control element will change.

UPP ≤[87B.VCE.U_Set] Equation 3.5-9

U2 ≥[87B.VCE.U2_Set] Equation 3.5-10

Where:

UPP: Phase-to-phase voltage

U2: Negative sequence voltage

[87B.VCE.U_Set]: Phase-to-phase voltage setting for blocking BBP

[87B.VCE.U2_Set]: Negative voltage setting for blocking BBP

VCE_BBP will be controlled by the logic setting [87B.VCE.En], if it is set as “0”, VCE_BBP will be
disabled and busbar differential protection will not controlled by VCE_BBP

If “B: Without voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions” during
MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3), VCE_BBP will quit and related settings will be hidden,
busbar differential protection will not controlled by voltage element.

If the device setting [En_Volt_BB] is set as “0” (refer to Section 7.1), VCE_BBP is invalid no matter
the logic setting [87B.VCE.En] is set as “1” or not, busbar differential protection will not controlled
by voltage element.

Only if “A: With voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions” during
MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3), the device setting [En_Volt_BB] is set as “1” and the logic
setting [87B.VCE.En] is set as “1”, VCE_BBP is enabled.

If VCE_BBP (or VCE_BFP) of BBx operates for over 3s, an alarm [@BBx.Alm_VCE] will be

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-19


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

issued.

3.5.2.3 Faulty Busbar Zone Discrimination

The check zone differential element calculates the current from all circuits connected to the entire
busbar system except BC and BS to distinguish between internal and external fault. The
discriminating zone differential elements calculate the current of all the circuits connected to
individual zones via replica image of disconnector position to determine faulty zone.

When the operation criterion of check zone differential element (steady-state check zone
differential element is supervised by CT saturation detector 2 and DPFC check zone differential
element is supervised by CT saturation detector 1, to be described in the following section) and
any discriminating zone differential element is fulfilled, voltage controlled element of BBP of any
connected busbar is released, the busbar differential protection will operate to trip all bays
connected to the faulty busbar.

The protection has a feature of “inter-connection operation mode”, the feature will be effective
automatically under the following conditions.

1. A binary input [BI_En_IntLinkx] (x=1, 2, ……) is energized, it should be energized when two
bus zones are coupled together and unable to detach for a particular system operation
condition.

2. On-load transfer condition (when two busbar disconnectors of one feeder are closed at the
same time).

Under the inter-connection operation mode, the discriminating zone differential elements measure
the current signals are the same as that of check zone differential element. The coupled busbars
will be tripped simultaneously when there is a fault.

3.5.2.4 Backup Busbar Differential Elements

If only the check zone percentage restraint differential element (supervised by CT saturation
detector 2) operates, two stages of backup protection with fixed time delay are applied to trip the
corresponding circuit breakers (controlled by the logic setting [87B.En_Dly_Biased]). Stage 1 of
backup protection will trip BC/BS (when voltage controlled element of any busbar connected with
the BC/BS is released or voltage controlled element is disabled) and the feeders of which current
is larger than 0.04*In and does not have disconnector position after 240ms. Stage 2 of backup
protection will trip the feeders connected to the busbar of which voltage controlled element has
been released (or voltage controlled element is disabled) and the feeders with current larger than
2*In (In: the rated secondary current of reference CT) after 480ms.

3.5.2.5 Detection of CT Saturation

Two detectors are used to prevent unwanted tripping caused by severe CT saturation during
external close up fault. If the differential current is determined to be caused by CT saturation, the
device will block busbar differential protection to prevent mal-operation.

 CT saturation detector 1

When DPFC voltage or current FD element operates, the adaptive weighted algorithm for CT

3-20 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

saturation detector will be activated. In case of busbar fault occurs, DPFC differential element will
operate almost at the same time with DPFC voltage FD element or DPFC current FD element,
whereas for external fault, DPFC differential element will not operate before CT saturation at the
fault incipient stage, it will only operate after DPFC voltage element and DPFC current element in
case CT is saturated. Adaptive weighted algorithm for CT saturation detector is derived from the
difference of operating time among these DPFC elements. In coordination with DPFC differential
element, it has performed excellently to distinguish between internal and external fault with CT
saturation.

 CT saturation detector 2

Harmonic restraint element is used in CT saturation detector 2 by analyzing the waveforms of


differential current harmonics. The detector enables the busbar differential element to remain
stable for an external fault with CT saturation while to maintain fast tripping for the external fault
evolved to internal fault on the same phase.

The blocking signal of CT saturation detector 2 will only last for 500ms. After that the busbar
differential element is released to operate for complicated fault conditions and minimized affected
area. In practical cases, CT transient saturation will not be more than 500ms.

Figure 3.5-4 Waveform of CT saturation during external fault

Figure 3.5-4 shows the current waveforms recorded in dynamic simulation with heavy CT
saturation during external phase-to-phase fault. Protection stability is well achieved in this extreme
case.

3.5.2.6 External Block Signal

PCS-915 provides a binary input [87B.BI_ExtBlk] to block BBP through external binary signal
(controlled by the logic setting [87B.En_BI_ExtBlk]). If [87B.En_BI_ExtBlk] is set as “1”, BBP will
be blocked if the binary input [87B.BI_ExtBlk] is energized. However, if the binary input
[87B.BI_ExtBlk] is energized for over 1 second, PCS-915IC will issue an alarm

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-21


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

[87B.Alm_BI_ExtBlk] and the blocking for BBP is released.

3.5.2.7 Closing Binary Input

If feeder dead zone fault protection is enabled, in order to prevent BBP from mal-operation when
closing onto the fault, when breaker of a feeder is open, the feeder current is included in
differential circuit instantaneously if the closing binary input of the feeder [@Bayn.BI_Cls] changes
from “0” to “1”. However, if the binary input [@Bayn.BI_Cls] is energized for over 10s, an alarm
[@Bayn.Alm_Cls] will be issued.

3.5.3 Function Block Diagram

87B

87B.BI_ExtBlk 87B.Op_Trp@BBx_DPFC
87B.BI_En 87B.Op_Trp@BBx_Biased
87B.Op_A_Trp@BBx_DPFC
87B.BI_Blk
87B.Op_B_Trp@BBx_DPFC
Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn
87B.Op_C_Trp@BBx_DPFC
Ua_BBx, Ub_BBx, Uc_BBx 87B.Op_A_Trp@BBx_Biased
@Bayn.BI_89a_@BBx 87B.Op_B_Trp@BBx_Biased
@Bayn.BI_89b_@BBx 87B.Op_C_Trp@BBx_Biased
87B.Op_Trp@BCy
@Bayn.BI_52a
87B.Op_A_Trp@BCy
@Bayn.BI_52b
87B.Op_B_Trp@BCy
@Bayn.BI_A_52a 87B.Op_C_Trp@BCy
@Bayn.BI_B_52a 87B.Op_DPFC
@Bayn.BI_C_52a 87B.Op_Biased
@Bayn.BI_A_52b 87B.Op_Trp@BBx
87B.Op
@Bayn.BI_B_52b
87B.Op_Dly1_Biased
@Bayn.BI_C_52b
87B.Op_A_Dly1_Biased
AlmH_CTS 87B.Op_B_Dly1_Biased
@BBx.AlmH_Diff 87B.Op_C_Dly1_Biased
@BCy.AlmH_CTS 87B.Op_Dly2_Biased
@BSz.AlmH_CTS 87B.Op_A_Dly2_Biased
@Bayn.BI_Cls 87B.Op_B_Dly2_Biased
87B.Op_C_Dly2_Biased
87B.FD
87B.Alm_BI_ExtBlk
87B.Alm_Pkp_Biased
@BBx.Alm_VCE
87B.Alm_Off
@Bayn.Alm_Cls

For a BS, Just use “BSz” to instead of “BCy” in the above function block diagram.

3.5.4 Logic

BB1 logic is shown as follows as an example, logic of other bus zone(s) is(are) similar.

3-22 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

SIG Disconnector position abnormality

&

EN [87B.En_DSAlm_Blk]

EN [87B.En_BI_ExtBlk]
0 1s
& ≥1

BI [87B.BI_ExtBlk]

SIG CT circuit failure

&

EN [87B.En_CTS_Blk]

SIG DPFC DIF

CT saturation
SIG DPFC DIF 1
detector 1

SIG DPFC current FD element


&
& 87B.Op_Trp@BB1_DPFC
≥1

SIG DPFC voltage FD element

SIG SP DIF (K=0.2)

&

SIG SP DIF 1 (K=0.2)

SIG HM REL 1

≥1

500ms 0
&

SIG SP DIF 1 &


& 87B.Op_Trp@BB1_Biased

SIG HM REL

≥1
≥1 Diff_BB1
500ms 0
&

SIG SP DIF

SIG 87B is enabled

SIG Voltage_Rls_BBP 1

& 87B.Op_Trp@BC1
SIG Voltage_Rls_BBP x

SIG SP DIF x
240ms 0
& 87B.Op_Dly1
Voltage_Rls_BBP x & BBx is
SIG
in service 480ms 0
87B.Op_Dly2

SIG Δsi>ΔSIFloat+0.5In
& 87B.FD

SIG Δu>ΔUFloat+0.05Un ≥1

SET ID>[87B.I_Pkp]

Figure 3.5-5 Logic of busbar differential protection

Where:

Disconnector position abnormality: if current is detected in a bay but the bay has no disconnector
positions for any busbars.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-23


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

DPFC current FD element: please refer to Section 3.5.1.

DPFC voltage FD element: please refer to Section 3.5.1.

DPFC DIF: DPFC percentage restraint differential element for check zone.

DPFC DIF1: DPFC percentage restraint differential element for bus zone No.1.

SP DIF: Steady-state percentage restraint differential element for check zone.

SP DIF 1: Steady-state percentage restraint differential element for bus zone No.1.

SP DIF x: Steady-state percentage restraint differential element for any bus zone.

HM REL: Harmonic release element for check zone.

HM REL1: Harmonic release element for bus zone No.1.

87B is enabled: busbar differential protection is enabled (the corresponding enabling binary input
[87B.BI_En] is energized, the corresponding disabling binary input [87B.BI_Blk] is de-energized
and the corresponding enabling function link [87B.Link] and logic setting [87B.En] are set as “1”).

Voltage_Rls_BBP 1: Busbar differential protection is not controlled by VCE_BBP or voltage


controlled element of BBP of BB1 operates, please refer to Section 3.5.2.2 for details.

Voltage_Rls_BBP x: Busbar differential protection is not controlled by VCE_BBP or voltage


controlled element of BBP of any busbar operates, please refer to Section 3.5.2.2.

Voltage_Rls_BBP x & BBx is in service: Busbar differential protection is not controlled by


VCE_BBP or voltage controlled element of BBP of any energized busbar operates, please refer to
Section 3.5.2.2.

Diff_BB1: Differential element of BB1 (not controlled by voltage controlled element) operates.

Δu>ΔUFloat+0.05Un, Δsi>ΔSIFloat+0.5In, ID> [87B.I_Pkp]: Please refer to Section 3.5.1.

87B.FD: Any FD element for busbar differential protection picks up.

Different from BC, busbar differential protection operating to trip BS is not controlled by VCE_BBP.

3-24 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

SIG BBx is in service BBx is in service

SIG Ua<87B.VCE.U_Set
& 3s 0 @BBx.Alm_VCE
SIG Ub<87B.VCE.U_Set
VCE_BBP x
SIG UC<87B.VCE.U_Set ≥1
SIG 3U0>87B.VCE.3U0_Set
SIG U2>87B.VCE.U2_Set

SIG Ua<50BF.VCE.U_Set
≥1
SIG Ub<50BF.VCE.U_Set
SIG UC<50BF.VCE.U_Set ≥1
SIG 3U0>50BF.VCE.3U0_Set
SIG U2>50BF.VCE.U2_Set VCE_BFP x
&
SIG 50BF is enabled

Figure 3.5-6 Logic diagram of voltage controlled element

Where:

BBx is in service: Please refer to Figure 3.14-1.

50BF is enabled: Please refer to Section 3.12.4.

VCE_BBP x: Voltage controlled element of busbar differential protection of BBx operates.

VCE_BFP x: Voltage controlled element of breaker failure protection of BBx operates.

@BBx.Alm_VCE: VCE (of BBP or BFP) of BBx picks up for over 3s

3.5.5 I/O Signal

Table 3.5-2 Input signals of busbar differential protection

No. Signal Description

1 87B.BI_En Binary input of enabling BBP

2 87B.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling BBP

Binary input indicating that two busbars are under the inter-connected
3 BI_En_IntLinkx
operation mode

4 87B.BI_ExtBlk External binary input of blocking BBP

5 AlmH_CTS CT circuit failure

6 @BCy.AlmH_CTS BCy CT circuit failure

7 @BSz.AlmH_CTS BSz CT circuit failure

Differential current high value alarm signal of BBx, discriminating zone


8 @BBx.AlmH_Diff
differential current of BBx is larger than [I_AlmH_CTS] for over 5s.

9 @Bayn.BI_89a_@BBx Normally open auxiliary contact of BBx disconnector of bay n

10 @Bayn.BI_89b_@BBx Normally closed auxiliary contact of BBx disconnector of bay n

11 @Bayn.BI_52a Normally open auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n

12 @Bayn.BI_52b Normally closed auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-25


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay


13 @Bayn.BI_A_52a
n

Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay


14 @Bayn.BI_B_52a
n

Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of


15 @Bayn.BI_C_52a
bay n

16 @Bayn.BI_A_52b Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n

17 @Bayn.BI_B_52b Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n

18 @Bayn.BI_C_52b Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay n

19 @Bayn.BI_Cls Binary input of closing circuit breaker of bay n

Table 3.5-3 Output signals of busbar differential protection

No. Signal Description

1 87B.Op_Dly1_Biased Stage 1 of backup protection operates

2 87B.Op_Dly2_Biased Stage 2 of backup protection operates

3 87B.Op_Trp@BBx_Biased Steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx

4 87B.Op_Trp@BBx_DPFC DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx

5 87B.Op_A_Dly1_Biased Phase-A stage 1 of backup protection operates

6 87B.Op_B_Dly1_Biased Phase-B stage 1 of backup protection operates

7 87B.Op_C_Dly1_Biased Phase-C stage 1 of backup protection operates

8 87B.Op_A_Dly2_Biased Phase-A stage 2 of backup protection operates

9 87B.Op_B_Dly2_Biased Phase-B stage 2 of backup protection operates

10 87B.Op_C_Dly2_Biased Phase-C stage 2 of backup protection operates

Phase-A steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip


11 87B.Op_A_Trp@BBx_Biased
BBx

Phase-B steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip


12 87B.Op_B_Trp@BBx_Biased
BBx

Phase-C steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip


13 87B.Op_C_Trp@BBx_Biased
BBx

14 87B.Op_A_Trp@BBx_DPFC Phase-A DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx

15 87B.Op_B_Trp@BBx_DPFC Phase-B DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx

16 87B.Op_C_Trp@BBx_DPFC Phase-C DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx

17 87B.Op_Trp@BCy Busbar differential protection operates to trip BCy

18 87B.Op_Trp@BSz Busbar differential protection operates to trip BSz

19 87B.Op_A_Trp@BCy Phase-A busbar differential protection operates to trip BCy

20 87B.Op_B_Trp@BCy Phase-B busbar differential protection operates to trip BCy

21 87B.Op_C_Trp@BCy Phase-C busbar differential protection operates to trip BCy

22 87B.Op_A_Trp@BSz Phase-A busbar differential protection operates to trip BSz

3-26 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

23 87B.Op_B_Trp@BSz Phase-B busbar differential protection operates to trip BSz

24 87B.Op_C_Trp@BSz Phase-C busbar differential protection operates to trip BSz

25 87B.Op_Biased Steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip any busbar

26 87B.Op_DPFC DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip any busbar

DPFC busbar differential protection or steady-state busbar differential


27 87B.Op_Trp@BBx
protection operates to trip BBx

DPFC busbar differential protection or steady-state busbar differential


28 87B.Op
protection operates to trip any busbar

29 87B.Alm_BI_ExtBlk External binary input of blocking BBP is energized for over 1s

Alarm signal indicating that differential current FD element picks up for


30 87B.Alm_Pkp_Biased
over 10s

31 @BBx.Alm_VCE VCE (of BBP or BFP) of BBx picks up for over 3s

Alarm signal indicating BBP is disabled. If the logic setting


[87B.En_Alm_Off] is set as “1”, once BBP is disabled (BBP can be
32 87B.Alm_Off disabled by the corresponding enabling binary input, function link or
enabling logic setting), the alarm signal indicating BBP is disabled will
be issued

33 @Bayn.Alm_Cls Closing binary input [BI_Cls_@Bayn] is energized for over 10s

3.5.6 Settings

 Busbar Protection Setting

Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsBBP Settings

Table 3.5-4 Busbar differential protection settings

No. Name Range Step Remark

1 87B.I_Pkp 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A Pickup value of differential current

High restraint coefficient for steady-state


2 87B.SlopeH_CZ 0.50-0.80 0.01 check zone, 0.5 is recommended, less
than 0.3 is not recommended

Low restraint coefficient for steady-state


3 87B.SlopeL_CZ 0.30-0.80 0.01 check zone, 0.3 is recommended, less
than 0.3 is not recommended

High restraint coefficient for steady-state


4 87B.SlopeH_DZ 0.50-0.80 0.01 discriminative zone, 0.6 is recommended,
less than 0.3 is not recommended

Low restraint coefficient for steady-state


5 87B.SlopeL_DZ 0.50-0.80 0.01 discriminative zone, 0.5 is recommended,
less than 0.3 is not recommended

6 I_AlmH_CTS 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A Current setting of CT circuit failure

7 I_AlmL_CTS 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A Current setting of CT circuit abnormality

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-27


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

8 87B.VCE.U_Set 0~Un 0.01V Under voltage setting of VCE for BBP

9 87B.VCE.3U0_Set 0~Un 0.01V Residual voltage setting of VCE for BBP

Negative-sequence voltage setting of


10 87B.VCE.U2_Set 0~Un 0.01V
VCE for BBP

1: Enabling busbar differential protection


11 87B.En 0,1 1
0: Disabling busbar differential protection

1: Alarm signal will be issued if BBP is


disabled
12 87B.En_Alm_Off 0,1 1
0: Alarm signal will not be issued if BBP is
disabled

1: two stages of backup busbar differential


protection is enabled
13 87B.En_Dly_Biased 0,1 1
0: two stages of backup busbar differential
protection is disabled

1: breaker failure protection is initiated if


busbar differential protection operates to
14 87B.En_Init50BF 0,1 1 trip
0: breaker failure protection can not be
initiated by busbar differential protection

1: BBP is controlled by the binary input


[87B.BI_ExtBlk], once [87B.BI_ExtBlk] is
15 87B.En_BI_ExtBlk 0,1 1 energized, BBP will be blocked.
0: BBP will not be controlled by the binary
input [87B.BI_ExtBlk]

1: the CT circuit failure alarm signal can


be reset automatically after the CT circuit
returns to normal condition
16 En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS 0,1 1
0: the CT circuit failure alarm signal can
not be reset automatically after the CT
circuit returns to normal condition

1: the CT circuit abnormality alarm signal


can be reset automatically after the CT
circuit returns to normal condition
17 En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS 0,1 1
0: the CT circuit abnormality alarm signal
can not be reset automatically since the
CT circuit returns to normal condition

1: If any disconnector position alarm is


issued, once the abnormality of
disconnector position disappears, the
18 En_AutoRecov_DS 0,1 1
alarm will be reset automatically.
0: If any disconnector position alarm is
issued, the alarm can not be reset unless

3-28 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

energizing the disconnector position


confirm binary input [BI_ConfirmDS]

Enabling busbar differential protection


being blocked by disconnector position
abnormality.
1: if current is detected in a feeder but the
feeder has no disconnector positions for
any busbars, busbar differential protection
19 87B.En_DSAlm_Blk 0,1 1
will be blocked.
0: busbar differential protection will not be
blocked for the disconnector position
abnormality condition.
“0” is recommended. If it is not configured
for a project, its default value is “0”.

1: busbar differential protection is blocked


if CT circuit fails
0: busbar differential protection is not
20 87B.En_CTS_Blk 0,1 1
controlled by CT circuit failure
If it is not configured for a project, its
default value is “0”.

1: BBP is controlled by VCE


21 87B.VCE.En 0,1 1
0: BBP will not be controlled by VCE

Un: Rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage of VT.

1. [87B.I_Pkp]

It should ensure busbar differential protection sensitive enough under minimum fault level
condition and should be larger than maximum load current of its outlets (in order to prevent BBP
from mal-operation when CT secondary circuit fails).

2. [I_AlmL_CTS]

This setting is applied to better identifying the abnormality of CT circuit of light load feeder and
shunt of CT circuit, etc. It should be smaller than [I_AlmH_CTS] and can be set as
0.75*[I_AlmH_CTS].

3. [I_AlmH_CTS]

It should be larger than unbalance current in normal operation mode. The recommended value is
0.06In~0.1In.

4. [87B.VCE.U_Set]

It should make BBP sensitive enough when there is a symmetric fault occurring in the busbar zone.
The recommended value is 0.7Un (Un: Rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage of VT). If the
system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as “1”, the setting should be set as
phase-to-phase voltage. Please refer to Section “System Settings” in Chapter 7.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-29


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

5. [87B.VCE.3U0_Set]

It should make BBP sensitive enough when there is an unsymmetrical fault occurring in the busbar
zone and it should be larger than maximum residual voltage in normal operation mode. It is invalid
if the system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as “1”.

6. [87B.VCE.U2_Set]

It should make BBP sensitive enough when there is an unsymmetrical fault occurring in the busbar
zone and it should be larger than the maximum negative sequence voltage in normal operation
mode.

 Function Link

Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links

Table 3.5-5 Function links of busbar differential protection

No. Symbol Remark

1: Enabling busbar differential protection


1 87B.Link
0: Disabling busbar differential protection

1: Two busbars are under inter-connected operation mode


2 Link_IntLinkx
0: Two busbars are not under inter-connected operation mode

For BBP, the relation is “AND” among the function link [87B.Link], the corresponding enabling
binary input [87B.BI_En] and the corresponding logic setting [87B.En].

For [Link_IntLinkx], the relation is “OR” among the function link and the corresponding enabling
binary input [BI_En_IntLinkx].

3.6 BC/BS Dead Zone Fault Protection


NOTICE!

The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings
and sampled values related with each bay and busbar will change with the
corresponding label settings.

In Section 3.6, for a bus coupler bay, “@BCy” is used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding bus coupler, for a bus section bay, “@BSz” is used to refer to the label
setting of corresponding bus section.

3.6.1 Function Description

One CT or two CTs can be configured for BC/BS. BC/BS dead zone fault protection can operate
under two conditions: BC/BS breaker is open or BC/BS breaker is closed.

3.6.1.1 One CT BC/BS Dead Zone Fault Protection

For BC/BS that only one CT is available, there will be a blind spot for a fault occurs between
BC/BS breaker and BC/BS CT, the fault can not be cleared after busbar on the breaker side is

3-30 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

tripped. In order to clear the fault quickly, BC/BS dead zone fault protection is provided.

 Under the condition that BC/BS breaker is closed

After busbar differential protection sends the command to trip BC/BS, if the BC/BS breaker has
been tripped but the BC/BS current is still detected, then after a time delay of [BC.50DZ.t_Op], the
BC/BS dead zone fault protection will operate to issue a signal and the BC/BS current will be
excluded from discriminating zone percentage restraint differential elements of the two connected
busbars.

 Under the condition that BC/BS breaker is open

If the two connected busbars are in service and BC/BS breaker is open, in order to prevent both
busbars from tripping for an dead zone fault, the BC/BS current will be excluded from
discriminating zone percentage restraint differential element of the connected two busbars, busbar
differential protection will operate to trip the busbar directly connected to the CT to clear the dead
zone fault.

3.6.1.2 Two CTs BC/BS Dead Zone Fault Protection

For BC/BS that double CTs are available, if BC/BS breaker is closed, there is no blind spot for a
internal fault, so BC/BS dead zone fault protection will not function.

If BC/BS breaker is open, BC/BS dead zone fault protection will function as same as that of one
CT BC/BS under the condition that BC/BS is open.

3.6.1.3 Special Situation

If BS current can affect the check zone differential current (such as BS in Figure 3.2-9, the BS
current will be calculated in check zone and discriminating zone differential current), dead zone
fault protection is not configured for the BS (the fault can be cleared by BS breaker failure
protection, refer to Section 3.11). The reason is: if the load current of BS CT is small, and the
breaker position of BS is abnormal (the actual breaker position is closed, but it is identified as open
for the device), then if dead zone fault protection is configured (the BS current is excluded from
discriminating zone percentage restraint differential elements of the two connected busbars), it will
lead the busbar differential protection mal-operate for an external fault.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-31


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

BB1

BC/BS CT

Dead zone fault

BC/BS Breaker

BB2

3.6.2 Function Block Diagram

BC/BS 50DZ

87B.Op_Trp@BCy 50DZ.Op_@BCy
Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn
Ua_BBx, Ub_BBx, Uc_BBx
@BCy.BI_52a
@BCy.BI_52b
@BCy.BI_A_52a
@BCy.BI_B_52a
@BCy.BI_C_52a
@BCy.BI_A_52b
@BCy.BI_B_52b
@BCy.BI_C_52b
87B.Op_Trp@BBx

For a BS, Just use “BSz” to instead of “BCy” in the above function block diagram.

3.6.3 Logic

The logic of BC/BS dead zone fault protection is shown as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-6 as
an example).

3-32 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

SIG BB1 is in service


&
SIG BB2 is in service

SIG Ia_BC1<0.04In 0 400ms


&
SIG Ib_BC1<0.04In & &

SIG Ic_BC1<0.04In

SIG Breaker of BC1 is open


BC1 current is excluded from discriminating
zone percentage differential circuit
≥1
SIG 87B.Op_Trp@BC1 &

SIG DIF_CZ

SIG Ia_BC1>[BC.50DZ.I_Set] BC.50DZ.t_Op 0


&
SIG Ib_BC1>[BC.50DZ.I_Set] ≥1

SIG Ic_BC1>[BC.50DZ.I_Set]
& @BC1.50DZ.Op
SIG 87B.Op_Trp@BBx

Figure 3.6-1 Logic of BC/BS dead zone fault protection

BBx is in service: Please refer to Figure 3.14-1;

Breaker of BC1 is open: please refer to Section 0;

DIF_CZ: Check zone percentage restraint differential element with low restraint coefficient.

3.6.4 I/O Signal

Table 3.6-1 Input signals of BC/BS dead zone fault protection

No. Signal Description

1 87B.Op_Trp@BCy Busbar differential protection operates to trip BCy

2 87B.Op_Trp@BSz Busbar differential protection operates to trip BSz

3 87B.Op_Trp@BBx Busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx

Table 3.6-2 Output signals of BC/BS dead zone fault protection

No. Signal Description

1 @BCy.50DZ.Op Dead zone fault protection of BCy operates

2 @BSz.50DZ.Op Dead zone fault protection of BSz operates

3.6.5 Settings

 BC Dead Zone Fault Protection Setting

Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt Settings50DZ Settings

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-33


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Table 3.6-3 BC dead zone fault protection settings

No. Name Range Step Remark

Current setting for BC/BS dead zone fault


1 BC.50DZ.I_Set 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A
protection, 0.1In is recommended.

Time delay for BC/BS dead zone fault


2 BC.50DZ.t_Op 0.00~10.00s 0.01s
protection, 150ms is recommended.

3.7 Feeder Dead Zone Fault Protection (DZP)


NOTICE!

The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings
and sampled values related with each bay will change with the corresponding label
settings.

In Section 3.7, “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding feeder bay.

3.7.1 Fault Detector Element

Feeder dead zone fault protection is provided for each feeder bay. PCS-915 provides independent
FD element for feeder DZP ([50DZ.FD]), as shown in Figure 3.7-1, if any phase current of feeder
bay n is larger than [Fdr.50DZ.I_Set] and current of feeder bay n is excluded from differential
current, FD element for feeder DZP picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then
available and wait for the tripping signal from feeder DZP. The fault detector output signal will last
for 500ms after the fault detector element drop off.

3.7.2 Function Description

If a fault occurs between breaker and busbar CT of a feeder bay, the fault can not be cleared even
the breaker is tripped. In order to clear the fault quickly, dead zone fault protection for each feeder
bay is provided.

If the breaker of a feeder is open, and three phase currents of the feeder are all smaller than 0.04I n,
then the feeder current will be excluded from differential elements which prevent BBP from
mal-operation for the fault in the dead zone. For a fault occurred between circuit breaker and CT,
FD element of feeder DZP picks up for over 20ms, dead zone fault protection will operates and
initiates transfer trip to trip remote circuit breaker.

In order to prevent BBP from mal-operation when closing onto the fault, when breaker of a feeder
is open, the feeder current is included in differential circuit instantaneously if the closing binary
input of the feeder [@Bayn.BI_Cls] changes from “0” to “1”. However, if the binary input
[@Bayn.BI_Cls] is energized for over 10 second, an alarm [@Bayn.Alm_Cls] will be issued.

3-34 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Busbar

Feeder breaker

Dead zone fault

Feeder CT

3.7.3 Function Block Diagram

Feeder 50DZ

Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn @Bayn.50DZ.Op


@Bayn.BI_52a @Bayn.Op_TT
@Bayn.BI_52b @Bayn.Alm_Cls
@Bayn.BI_A_52a
@Bayn.50DZ.Alm_Pkp
@Bayn.BI_B_52a
@Bayn.BI_C_52a
@Bayn.BI_A_52b
@Bayn.BI_B_52b
@Bayn.BI_C_52b
@Bayn.Alm_52b
@Bayn.BI_Cls
Fdr.50DZ.BI_En or @Bayn.50DZ.BI_En
Fdr.50DZ.BI_Blk

3.7.4 Logic

The logic of dead zone fault protection is shown as Figure 3.7-1.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-35


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

SIG Ia_Bayn<0.04In
≥1
SIG Ib_Bayn<0.04In &

SIG Ic_Bayn<0.04In
0 1s
BI [@Bayn.BI_Cls]

SIG [@Bayn.Alm_52b] & Bay n current is not included in differential current


SIG TBD of bay n is closed

SIG Breaker of bay n is open

SIG Ia_Bayn>[Fdr.50DZ.I_Set] @Bayn.50DZ.FD


Fdr.50DZ.t_Op 0
SIG Ib_Bayn>[Fdr.50DZ.I_Set] ≥1 & [@Bayn.50DZ.Op]

SIG Ic_Bayn>[Fdr.50DZ.I_Set] [@Bayn.Op_TT]

SIG Bayn.50DZ is enabled

Figure 3.7-1 Logic of feeder dead zone fault protection

Where:

@Bayn.50DZ.FD: FD element for feeder bay n dead zone fault protection picks up.

TBD of bay n is closed: transfer bus disconnector (TBD) of bay n is closed.

Bayn.50DZ is enabled: dead zone fault protection of bay n is enabled (the corresponding enabling
binary input ([Fdr.50DZ.BI_En] or [@Bayn.50DZ.BI_En]) is energized, the corresponding disabling
binary input [50DZ.BI_Blk] is de-energized and the corresponding enabling function link
([Fdr.50DZ.Link] or [@Bayn.50DZ.Link]) and logic setting ([Fdr.50DZ.En] or [Bayn.50DZ.En]) are
set as “1”).

3.7.5 I/O Signal

Table 3.7-1 Input signals of feeder dead zone fault protection

No. Signal Description

Binary input of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection (it is


configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary
1 Fdr.50DZ.BI_En
input and function link of a protective element is configured according to
each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))

Binary input of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n (it is
configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary
2 @Bayn.50DZ.BI_En
input and function link of a protective element is configured according to
each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))

3 Fdr.50DZ.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling feeder dead zone fault protection

Normally closed auxiliary contact of bay n breaker is energized but


4 @Bayn.Alm_52b
current can still be detected in bay n

3-36 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

5 @Bayn.BI_Cls Binary input of closing circuit breaker of bay n

Table 3.7-2 Output signals of feeder dead zone fault protection

No. Signal Description

1 @Bayn.50DZ.Op DZP of bay n operates

DZP or BFP of bay n operates to initiate transfer trip to remote circuit


2 @Bayn.Op_TT
breaker

Alarm signal indicating that feeder DZP FD element of bay n picks up for
3 @Bayn.50DZ.Alm_Pkp
over 10s

4 @Bayn.Alm_Cls Closing binary input [@Bayn.BI_Cls] is energized for over 10s

3.7.6 Settings

 Dead Zone Fault Protection Setting

Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt Settings50DZ Settings

Table 3.7-3 Feeder dead zone fault protection settings

No. Name Range Step Remark

Current setting for feeder dead zone fault


1 Fdr.50DZ.I_Set 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A
protection, 0.1In is recommended.

Time delay for feeder dead zone fault


2 Fdr.50DZ.t_Op 0.00~4.90s 0.01s
protection, 20ms is recommended.

Logic setting of feeder dead zone fault


protection of bay n, it is configured when the
basic information configuration “Logic setting
of a protective element is configured
according to each bay” is set as “Enable”
3 Bayn.50DZ.En 0,1 1
(refer to Section 3.4)
1: Enabling feeder dead zone fault protection
of bay n
0: Disabling feeder dead zone fault
protection of bay n

Logic setting of feeder dead zone fault


protection, it is configured when the basic
information configuration “Logic setting of a
protective element is configured according to
4 Fdr. 50DZ.En 0,1 1 each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section
3.4)
1: Enabling feeder dead zone fault protection
0: Disabling feeder dead zone fault
protection

 Function Link

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-37


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links

Table 3.7-4 Function links of feeder dead zone fault protection

No. Symbol Remark

Function link of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection (it is


configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling
binary input and function link of a protective element is configured
1 Fdr.50DZ.Link
according to each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
1: Enabling feeder dead zone fault protection
0: Disabling feeder dead zone fault protection

Function link of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay


n (it is configured when the basic information configuration
“Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is
2 @Bayn.50DZ.Link configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to
Section 3.4))
1: Enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n
0: Disabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n

For feeder dead zone fault protection, the relation is “AND” among the enabling function link, the
corresponding enabling binary input and the corresponding logic setting.

3.8 BC/BS Switch-onto-fault (SOTF) Protection


NOTICE!

The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings
and sampled values related with each bay and busbar will change with the
corresponding label settings.

In Section 3.8, for a bus coupler bay, “@BCy” is used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding bus coupler, for a bus section bay, “@BSz” is used to refer to the label
setting of corresponding bus section.

3.8.1 Fault Detector Element

PCS-915 provides independent FD element for BC/BS SOTF protection, if any phase current of
BC/BS is larger than the current setting [50SOTF.I_Set], FD element for BC/BS SOTF protection
(@BCy.50SOTF.FD or @BSz.50SOTF.FD) picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is
then available and wait for the tripping signal from BC/BS SOTF protection. The fault detector
output signal will last for 500ms after the fault detector element drop off.

3.8.2 Function Description

If a busbar is first energized via a BC or BS after maintenance or newly installed, a feature of


BC/BS SOTF is incorporated in the PCS-915 to trip the BC/BS immediately when it is closed on to
a fault.

SOTF protection is enabled if the following conditions are met.

3-38 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

1. The BC/BS CB status is in open position

2. BC/BS three phase-currents are smaller than 0.04In.

3. Any of the two connected busbars is out of service.

If any of the following conditions is met, SOTF protection will be disabled after 300ms

1. The position status of BC/BS breaker changes from open to closed.

2. BC current changes from being smaller than 0.04In to being larger than 0.04In.

3. Both connected busbars are in service.

If FD element for BC/BS SOTF protection picks up in the duration when SOTF protection is
enabled, BC/BS SOTF protection will operate to trip BC/BS breaker without controlled by voltage
controlled element.

3.8.3 Function Block Diagram

50SOTF

Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn @BCy.50SOTF.Op_Trp


Ua_BBx, Ub_BBx, Uc_BBx @BCy.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp
@BCy.BI_52a
@BCy.BI_52b
@BCy.BI_A_52a
@BCy.BI_B_52a
@BCy.BI_C_52a
@BCy.BI_A_52b
@BCy.BI_B_52b
@BCy.BI_C_52b
50SOTF.BI_Blk
50SOTF.BI_En or @BCy.50SOTF.BI_En

For a BS, Just use “BSz” to instead of “BCy” in the above function block diagram.

3.8.4 Logic

The logic of BC/BS SOTF protection is shown as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-6 as an
example).

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-39


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

SIG Breaker of BC1 is open

SIG BB1 is in service


0 300ms
& &
SIG BB2 is in service &
&
SIG Ia_BC1>0.04In
& @BC1.50SOTF.Op_Trp
SIG Ib_BC1>0.04In ≥1

SIG Ic_BC1>0.04In

SIG @BC1.50SOTF is enabled

SET Ia_BC1>[50SOTF.I_Set]
& @BC1.50SOTF.FD
SET Ib_BC1>[50SOTF.I_Set] ≥1

SET Ic_BC1>[50SOTF.I_Set]

Figure 3.8-1 Logic of SOTF protection

Where:

@BC1.50SOTF.FD: FD element for BC/BS SOTF protection picks up

BBx is in service: Please refer to Figure 3.14-1.

@BC1.50SOTF is enabled: SOTF protection of BC1 is enabled (the corresponding enabling


binary input ([50SOTF.BI_En] or [@BC1.50SOTF.BI_En]) is energized, the corresponding
disabling binary input [50SOTF.BI_Blk] is de-energized and the corresponding enabling function
link ([50SOTF.Link] or [@BC1.50SOTF.Link]) and logic setting ([50SOTF.En] or
[@BC1.50SOTF.En]) are set as “1”).

3.8.5 I/O Signal

Table 3.8-1 Input signals of BC/BS SOTF protection

No. Signal Description

Binary input of enabling BC/BS SOTF protection (it is configured when


the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function
1 50SOTF.BI_En
link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set
as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))

Binary input of enabling SOTF of BCy (it is configured when the basic
information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a
2 @BCy.50SOTF.BI_En
protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as
“Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))

Binary input of enabling SOTF of BSz (it is configured when the basic
information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a
3 @BSz.50SOTF.BI_En
protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as
“Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))

3-40 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

4 50SOTF.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling BC/BS SOTF protection

Table 3.8-2 Output signals of BC/BS SOTF protection

No. Signal Description

1 @BCy.50SOTF.Op_Trp SOTF protection of BCy operates

2 @BSz.50SOTF.Op_Trp SOTF protection of BSz operates

Alarm signal indicating that FD element for SOTF protection of BCy


3 @BCy.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp
picks up for over 10s

Alarm signal indicating that FD element for SOTF protection of BSz


4 @BSz.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp
picks up for over 10s

3.8.6 Settings

 Switch-onto-fault Protection Setting

Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsSOTF Settings

Table 3.8-3 Switch-onto-fault protection settings

No. Name Range Step Remark

1 50SOTF.I_Set 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A Current setting for BC/BS SOTF protection

Logic setting of SOTF protection of bay n


(only for BC/BS bay), it is configured when
the basic information configuration “Logic
setting of a protective element is
configured according to each bay” is set as
2 Bayn.50SOTF.En 0,1 1
“Enable” (refer to Section 3.4)
1: Enabling SOTF protection of bay n (only
for BC/BS bay)
0: Disabling SOTF protection of bay n (only
for BC/BS bay)

Logic setting of BC/BS SOTF protection, it


is configured when the basic information
configuration “Logic setting of a protective
element is configured according to each
3 50SOTF.En 0,1 1
bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section
3.4)
1: Enabling BC/BS SOTF protection
0: Disabling BC/BS SOTF protection

 Function Link

Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-41


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Table 3.8-4 Function links of BC/BS SOTF protection

No. Symbol Remark

Function link of enabling BC/BS SOTF protection (it is configured


when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and
function link of a protective element is configured according to each
1 50SOTF.Link
bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
1: Enabling BC/BS SOTF protection
0: Disabling BC/BS SOTF protection

Function link of enabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS


bay) (it is configured when the basic information configuration
“Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is
2 @Bayn.50SOTF.Link configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section
3.4))
1: Enabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS bay)
0: Disabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS bay)

For BC/BS SOTF protection, the relation is “AND” among the enabling function link, the
corresponding enabling binary input and the corresponding logic setting.

3.9 Overcurrent (OC) Protection


NOTICE!

The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings
and sampled values related with each bay will change with the corresponding label
settings.

In Section 3.9, “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay.

3.9.1 Fault Detector Element

PCS-915 provides two independent FD elements for OC protection of each bay (includes BC/BS
and each feeder), which are phase overcurrent FD element and ground overcurrent FD element. If
any of the two elements picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then available and wait
for the tripping signal from OC protection element. The fault detector output signal will last for
500ms after the corresponding fault detector element drop off.

 Phase overcurrent FD element

When any phase current of bay n is larger than the threshold, phase overcurrent FD element
(@Bayn.50/51P.FD) picks up, the operating criterion is:

Max(Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn) > [Bayn.50/51P.I_Set]

 Ground overcurrent FD element

When residual current of bay n is larger than the threshold, ground overcurrent FD element
(@Bayn.50/51G.FD) picks up, the operating criterion is:

3-42 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

3I0_Bayn > [Bayn.50/51G.3I0_Set]

3.9.2 Function Description

Overcurrent protection (50/51) includes phase overcurrent element (50/51P) and ground
overcurrent element (50/51G), if “IDMT overcurrent characteristic” in protective function
configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4), the setting [Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve]/
[Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve] is released, each overcurrent element can be configured as
inverse-time overcurrent protection (IDMT) or definite-time overcurrent protection by the setting
[Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve]/ [Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve] (0: definite-time characteristic, 1: normal
inverse-time characteristic, 2: very inverse-time characteristic, 3: extremely inverse-time
characteristic, 4: long-time inverse-time characteristic, 5: user-defined inverse-time characteristic).

For overcurrent protection, the inverse-time characteristic complies with the following formula
(based on IEC60255-3 standard).

Kt
t(I )  TMS
I
( )  1
Ib

Where:

Ib is current setting. For ground overcurrent protection, it is the setting

[Bayn.50/51G.3I0_Set]. For phase overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51P.I_Set].

K t is time constant. For ground overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51G.K]. For

phase overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51P.K]. When inverse-time characteristic is


chosen as “user-defined inverse-time characteristic”, user has to input the setting according to
the application.

TMS is time multiplier. For ground overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51G.TMS].
For phase overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51P.TMS].

 is exponent. For ground overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51G.Alpha]. For phase
overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51P.Alpha]. when inverse-time characteristic is
chosen as “user-defined inverse-time characteristic”, user has to input the setting according to the
application.

I for ground overcurrent protection, it is actual value of calculated residual current of bay n. For
phase overcurrent protection, it is actual value of measured maximum phase current of bay n.

t (I ) is calculated operating time of inverse-time overcurrent protection.

For phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent protection, definite-time, four IEC
inverse-time characteristics and one user-defined inverse-time characteristic are available for
selection. It can be shown in the following table.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-43


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve
Kt 
(Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve)

0: definite-time characteristic - -

1: normal inverse-time characteristic 0.14 0.02

2: very inverse-time characteristic 13.5 1

3: extremely inverse-time characteristic 80 2

4: long-time inverse-time characteristic 120 1

Bayn.50/51P.K Bayn.50/51P.Alpha
5: user-defined inverse-time characteristic
(Bayn.50/51G.K) (Bayn.50/51G.Alpha)

3.9.3 Function Block Diagram

50/51

Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn @Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp


@Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp
50/51.BI_Blk
@Bayn.50/51P.Alm_Pkp
50/51.BI_En or (@Bayn.50/51P.BI_En
@Bayn.50/51G.Alm_Pkp
and @Bayn.50/51G.BI_En)

3.9.4 Logic

The logic of overcurrent protection is shown as bellow.

3-44 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

&
@Bayn.50/51P.FD
≥1

SET [Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve]=0
[Bayn.50/51P.t_Op] 0
&
SET Ia_Bayn>[Bayn.50/51P.I_Set]

[Bayn.50/51P.t_Op] 0
& ≥1

SET Ib_Bayn>[Bayn.50/51P.I_Set]

[Bayn.50/51P.t_Op] 0
&

SET Ic_Bayn>[Bayn.50/51P.I_Set]

≥1 @Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp
IDMT (Ia_Bayn)
SIG Bayn.50/51P is enabled &
&
[Bayn.50/51P.tmin] 0

IDMT (Ib_Bayn)
&
& ≥1
[Bayn.50/51P.tmin] 0

IDMT (Ic_Bayn)
&
&
[Bayn.50/51P.tmin] 0

& [Bayn.50/51G.t_Op] 0
SIG Bayn.50/51G is enabled

≥1 @Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp
SET 3I0_Bayn>[Bayn.50/51G.3I0_Set]
& IDMT (3I0_Bayn)

SET [Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve]=0 &


[Bayn.50/51G.tmin] 0

& @Bayn.50/51G.FD

Figure 3.9-1 Logic of overcurrent protection

Where:

Bayn.50/51P.FD: Bay n phase overcurrent FD element picks up

Bayn.50/51G.FD: Bay n ground overcurrent FD element picks up

Bayn.50/51P is enabled: phase overcurrent protection of bay n is enabled (the corresponding


enabling binary input ([50/51.BI_En] or [@Bayn.50/51P.BI_En]) is energized, the corresponding
disabling binary input [50/51.BI_Blk] is de-energized and the corresponding enabling function link
([50/51.Link] or [@Bayn.50/51P.Link]) and logic setting ([50/51.En] or [Bayn.50/51P.En]) are set as
“1”).

Bayn.50/51G is enabled: ground overcurrent protection of bay n is enabled (the corresponding


enabling binary input ([50/51.BI_En] or [@Bayn.50/51G.BI_En]) is energized, the corresponding
disabling binary input [50/51.BI_Blk] is de-energized and the corresponding enabling function link

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-45


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

([50/51.Link] or [@Bayn.50/51G.Link]) and logic setting ([50/51.En] or [Bayn.50/51G.En]) are set


as “1”).

3.9.5 I/O Signal

Table 3.9-1 Input signals of overcurrent protection

No. Signal Description

Binary input of enabling overcurrent protection (it is configured when the


basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of
1 50/51.BI_En
a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as
“Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))

Binary input of enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n (it is


configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary
2 @Bayn.50/51P.BI_En
input and function link of a protective element is configured according to
each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))

Binary input of enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n (it is


configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary
3 @Bayn.50/51G.BI_En
input and function link of a protective element is configured according to
each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))

4 50/51.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling overcurrent protection

Table 3.9-2 Output signals of overcurrent protection

No. Signal Description

1 @Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp phase overcurrent protection of bay n operates

2 @Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp ground overcurrent protection of bay n operates

Alarm signal indicating that phase overcurrent FD element of bay n


3 @Bayn.50/51P.Alm_Pkp
picks up for over 10s

Alarm signal indicating that ground overcurrent FD element of bay n


4 @Bayn.50/51G.Alm_Pkp
picks up for over 10s

3.9.6 Settings

 Overcurrent Protection Setting

Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsOC Settings

Table 3.9-3 Overcurrent protection settings

No. Name Range Step Remark

Current setting for phase overcurrent


1 Bayn.50/51P.I_Set 0.05In~20.00In 0.01A
protection of bay n

Current setting for ground overcurrent


2 Bayn.50/51G.3I0_Set 0.05In~20.00In 0.01A
protection of bay n

3 Bayn.50/51P.t_Op 0.00~10.00s 0.01s Definite time delay setting for phase

3-46 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

No. Name Range Step Remark

overcurrent protection of bay n

Definite time delay setting for ground


4 Bayn.50/51G.t_Op 0.00~10.00s 0.01s
overcurrent protection of bay n

Operating characteristic selection for phase


overcurrent protection of bay n. This setting
is displayed if “IDMT overcurrent
5 Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve 0~5 1
characteristic” in protective function
configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to
Section 3.4).

Minimum time delay for inverse-time phase


overcurrent protection of bay n. This setting
is displayed if “IDMT overcurrent
6 Bayn.50/51P.tmin 0.00~10.00s 0.01s
characteristic” in protective function
configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to
Section 3.4).

Time constant for inverse-time phase


overcurrent protection of bay n. This setting
is displayed if “IDMT overcurrent
7 Bayn.50/51P.K 0~10000 0.01
characteristic” in protective function
configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to
Section 3.4).

Time multiplier for inverse-time phase


overcurrent protection of bay n. This setting
is displayed if “IDMT overcurrent
8 Bayn.50/51P.TMS 0.01~200 0.01
characteristic” in protective function
configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to
Section 3.4).

Exponent for inverse-time phase overcurrent


protection of bay n. This setting is displayed
9 Bayn.50/51P.Alpha 0.01~200 0.01 if “IDMT overcurrent characteristic” in
protective function configuration is set as
“Enable” (refer to Section 3.4).

Operating characteristic selection for ground


overcurrent protection of bay n. This setting
is displayed if “IDMT overcurrent
10 Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve 0~5 1
characteristic” in protective function
configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to
Section 3.4).

Minimum time delay for inverse-time ground


11 Bayn.50/51G.tmin 0.00~10.00s 0.01s overcurrent protection of bay n. This setting
is displayed if “IDMT overcurrent

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-47


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

No. Name Range Step Remark

characteristic” in protective function


configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to
Section 3.4).

Time constant for inverse-time ground


overcurrent protection of bay n. This setting
is displayed if “IDMT overcurrent
12 Bayn.50/51G.K 0~10000 0.01
characteristic” in protective function
configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to
Section 3.4).

Time multiplier for inverse-time ground


overcurrent protection of bay n. This setting
is displayed if “IDMT overcurrent
13 Bayn.50/51G.TMS 0.01~200 0.01
characteristic” in protective function
configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to
Section 3.4).

Exponent for inverse-time ground


overcurrent protection of bay n. This setting
is displayed if “IDMT overcurrent
14 Bayn.50/51G.Alpha 0.01~200 0.01
characteristic” in protective function
configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to
Section 3.4).

1: Enabling overcurrent protection operates


to initiate BFP
15 50/51.En_Init50BF 0,1 1
0: Disabling overcurrent protection operates
to initiate BFP

Logic setting of phase overcurrent protection


and ground overcurrent protection, it is
configured when the basic information
configuration “Logic setting of a protective
element is configured according to each bay”
16 50/51.En 0,1 1
is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4)
1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection and
ground overcurrent protection
0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection
and ground overcurrent protection

Logic setting of phase overcurrent protection


of bay n, it is configured when the basic
information configuration “Logic setting of a
17 Bayn.50/51P.En 0,1 1 protective element is configured according to
each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section
3.4)
1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection of

3-48 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

No. Name Range Step Remark

bay n
0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection of
bay n

Logic setting of ground overcurrent


protection of bay n, it is configured when the
basic information configuration “Logic setting
of a protective element is configured
according to each bay” is set as “Enable”
18 Bayn.50/51G.En 0,1 1
(refer to Section 3.4)
1: Enabling ground overcurrent protection of
bay n
0: Disabling ground overcurrent protection of
bay n

In: Rated secondary current of reference CT

1. [Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve]

The parameters of each characteristic are listed in the following table.

Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve Kt 

0: definite-time - -

1: normal inverse-time characteristic 0.14 0.02

2: very inverse-time characteristic 13.5 1

3: extremely inverse-time characteristic 80 2

4: long-time inverse-time characteristic 120 1

5: user-defined inverse-time characteristic Bayn.50/51P.K Bayn.50/51P.Alpha

2. [Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve]

The parameters of each characteristic are listed in the following table.

Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve Kt 

0: definite-time - -

1: normal inverse-time characteristic 0.14 0.02

2: very inverse-time characteristic 13.5 1

3: extremely inverse-time characteristic 80 2

4: long-time inverse-time characteristic 120 1

5: user-defined inverse-time characteristic Bayn.50/51G.K Bayn.50/51G.Alpha

3. [Bayn.50/51P.tmin]/[Bayn.50/51G.tmin]

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-49


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

This is the minimum delay of inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection.


Recommended value: 0.1s.

4. [Bayn.50/51P.TMS]/[Bayn.50/51G.TMS]

This is the time multiplier setting ( TMS ) of inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection.
If inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection coordinates with a line, the setting should be
graded with the inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection of the line.
If inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection is used independently, it can be set according
to the actual requirement.

5. [Bayn.50/51P.K]/[Bayn.50/51G.K], [Bayn.50/51P.Alpha]/[Bayn.50/51G.Alpha]

[Bayn.50/51P.K]/[Bayn.50/51G.K] and [Bayn.50/51P.Alpha]/[Bayn.50/51G.Alpha] are respectively

the time constant ( K t ) and the exponent (  ) of inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection,

which are set according to the model of inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection. They
are valid only when the setting [Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve]/[Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve] is set as “5”
(i.e. user-defined inverse-time characteristic is selected).

 Function Link

Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links

Table 3.9-4 Function links of overcurrent protection

No. Symbol Remark

Function link of enabling phase overcurrent protection and ground


overcurrent protection (it is configured when the basic information
configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a
protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as
1 50/51.Link “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent
protection
0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent
protection

Function link of enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n (it


is configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling
binary input and function link of a protective element is configured
2 @Bayn.50/51P.Link
according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))
1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n
0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n

Function link of enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n (it


is configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling
3 @Bayn.50/51G.Link binary input and function link of a protective element is configured
according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))
1: Enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n

3-50 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

No. Symbol Remark

0: Disabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n

For overcurrent protection, the relation is “AND” among the enabling function link, the
corresponding enabling binary input and the corresponding logic setting.

3.10 Pole Disagreement (PD) Protection


NOTICE!

The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings
and sampled values related with each bay will change with the corresponding label
settings.

In Section 3.10, “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay.

3.10.1 Fault Detector Element

PCS-915 provides independent pole disagreement FD element for PD protection of each bay
(includes BC/BS and each feeder). If pole disagreement binary input of bay n
[@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD] is energized, FD element for PD protection of bay n (@Bayn.62PD.FD)
picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then available and wait for the tripping signal
from PD protection element. The fault detector output signal will last for 500ms after the fault
detector element drop off.

3.10.2 Function Description

For each bay, PD protection is necessary when pole disagreement of corresponding breaker is
detected due to three phases not in same status.

Pole disagreement protection is initiated by series-parallel connected auxiliary contacts of breaker


i.e. the binary input [@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD].

In addition to series-parallel connected auxiliary contacts of breaker, residual and negative


sequence current are used as auxiliary criteria.

3.10.3 Function Block Diagram

62PD

Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn @Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp


@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD @Bayn.62PD.Alm_Pkp
62PD.BI_En or @Bayn.62PD.BI_En

62PD.BI_Blk

3.10.4 Logic

The logic of pole disagreement protection is shown as follows.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-51


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

BI [@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD]

SET 3I0_Bayn>[Bayn.62PD.3I0_Set] &


[@Bayn.62PD.t_Op] 0
≥1 & @Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp
SET I2_Bayn>[Bayn.62PD.I2_Set]

SIG Bayn.62PD is enabled


& @Bayn.62PD.FD

52b_A 52a_A
[@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD]
52b_B 52a_B

52b_C 52a_C

Figure 3.10-1 Logic of pole disagreement protection

Where:

@Bayn.62PD.FD: FD element for PD protection of bay n picks up.

3I0_Bayn, I2_Bayn: residual and negative sequence current of bay n.

Bayn.62PD is enabled: PD protection of bay n is enabled (the corresponding enabling binary input
([62PD.BI_En] or [@Bayn.62PD.BI_En]) is energized, the corresponding disabling binary input
[62PD.BI_Blk] is de-energized and the corresponding enabling function link ([62PD.Link] or
[@Bayn.62PD.Link]) and logic setting ([62PD.En] or [Bayn.62PD.En]) are set as “1”).

3.10.5 I/O Signal

Table 3.10-1 Input signals of pole disagreement protection

No. Signal Description

1 @Bayn.62PD.BI_PD Binary input indicating breaker of bay n is in pole disagreement status

Binary input of enabling PD protection (it is configured when the basic


information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a
2 62PD.BI_En
protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as
“Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))

Binary input of enabling PD protection of bay n (it is configured when the


basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link
3 @Bayn.62PD.BI_En
of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as
“Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))

4 62PD.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling PD protection

3-52 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Table 3.10-2 Output signals of pole disagreement protection

No. Signal Description

1 @Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp PD protection of bay n operates

Alarm signal indicating that PD protection FD element of bay n picks up


2 @Bayn.62PD.Alm_Pkp for over 10s (i.e. pole disagreement binary input of bay n
[@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD] is energized for over 10s)

3.10.6 Settings

 Protection Settings

Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsPD Settings

Table 3.10-3 PD protection settings

No. Name Range Step Remark

1 Bayn.62PD.3I0_Set 0.05In~20.00In 0.01A Residual current setting for PD protection

Negative-sequence current setting for PD


2 Bayn.62PD.I2_Set 0.05In~20.00In 0.01A
protection

3 Bayn.62PD.t_Op 0.00~10.00s 0.01s Time delay of PD protection

Logic setting of PD protection of bay n, it is


configured when the basic information
configuration “Logic setting of a protective
4 Bayn.62PD.En 0, 1 1 element is configured according to each bay”
is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4)
1: Enabling PD protection of bay n
0: Disabling PD protection of bay n

Logic setting of PD protection, it is configured


when the basic information configuration
“Logic setting of a protective element is
5 62PD.En 0, 1 1 configured according to each bay” is set as
“Disable” (refer to Section 3.4)
1: Enabling PD protection
0: Disabling PD protection

1: Enabling PD protection operates to initiate


BFP
6 62PD.En_Init50BF 0,1 1
0: Disabling PD protection operates to initiate
BFP

In: Rated secondary current of reference CT

1. [Bayn.62PD.3I0_Set]

It should be larger than maximum residual current under maximum fault level condition.

2. [Bayn.62PD.I2_Set]

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-53


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

It should be greater than maximum unbalance negative sequence current under maximum fault
level condition.

3. [Bayn.62PD.t_Op]

It should be greater than maximum inconsistent time of three phase interrupters when breaker is in
the process of being closed.

 Function Link

Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links

Table 3.10-4 Function links of pole disagreement protection

No. Symbol Remark

Function link of enabling PD protection (it is configured when the


basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and
function link of a protective element is configured according to
1 62PD.Link
each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
1: Enabling PD protection
0: Disabling PD protection

Function link of enabling PD protection of bay n (it is configured


when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input
and function link of a protective element is configured according
2 @Bayn.62PD.Link
to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))
1: Enabling PD protection of bay n
0: Disabling PD protection of bay n

For pole disagreement protection, the relation is “AND” among the enabling function link, the
corresponding enabling binary input and the corresponding logic setting.

3.11 BC/BS Breaker Failure Protection (BFP)


NOTICE!

The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings
and sampled values related with each bay and busbar will change with the
corresponding label settings.

In Section 3.11, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding busbar.
For a bus coupler bay, “@BCy” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus
coupler. For a bus section bay, “@BSz” is used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding bus section.

3.11.1 Fault Detector Element

PCS-915 provides independent FD element for BC/BS BFP, if any of the following conditions is
fulfilled, FD element for BC/BS BFP (@BCy.50BF.FD or @BSz.50BF.FD) picks up, the positive
supply to the output relays is then available and wait for the tripping signal from BC/BS BFP. The

3-54 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

fault detector output signal will last for 500ms after the fault detector element drop off.

1. BBP operates to trip BC/BS

2. Breaker failure initiating (BFI) binary inputs [@BCy.BI_BFI]/[@BSz.BI_BFI] and common BFI
binary input [@BCy.BI_ChkBFI]/[@BSz.BI_ChkBFI] are energized at the same time

3. BC/BS overcurrent protection operates (controlled by the logic setting [50/51.En_Init50BF])

4. BC/BS pole disagreement protection operates (controlled by the logic setting


[62PD.En_Init50BF])

BFI binary input [@BCy.BI_BFI]/[@BSz.BI_BFI] can be connected to an external tripping contact.


[@BCy.BI_ChkBFI]/[@BSz.BI_ChkBFI] is a common BFI binary input, it will be energized if
[@BCy.BI_BFI]/[@BSz.BI_BFI] is energized.

3.11.2 Function Description

When tripping signal has been delivered to BC/BS breaker, while the breaker is failed to open
checked by the BC/BS current check element setting [BC.50BF.I_Set], BFP will operate to trip all
feeders connected to the two busbars (connected with the faulty BC/BS) after time delay of
[BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]. BC/BS breaker failure protection is controlled by voltage controlled element of
BBP (Please refer to Section 3.5.2.2) if busbar voltage is available and applied.

For the occasion that BS is at the edge of the protected zone, such as BS1 and BS2 in Figure
3.2-9, BS breaker failure initiating (BFI) logic is applied and it can output a contact to energize the
breaker failure initiating binary inputs [@BSz.BI_BFI] and [@BSz.BI_ChkBFI] of another PCS-915.

Takes BS1 in Figure 3.2-9 as an example, for PCS-915-A, if differential element of BB1 operates
and BS current of any phase is larger than 0.04In, the BS breaker failure initiating contact will
operate and it can energize the binary inputs [@BSz.BI_BFI] and [@BSz.BI_ChkBFI] of
PCS-915-B.

Ia_BS1>0.04In

Ib_BS1>0.04In ≥1

Ic_BS1>0.04In

& @BS1.BO_BFI
Diff_BB1

Figure 3.11-1 The logic scheme of BFI of BS

Where:

[@BSz.BO_BFI]: BS1 breaker failure initiating contact operates, it can be used to energize the
binary input [@BSz.BI_BFI] and [@BSz.BI_ChkBFI] of another PCS-915.

Ia_BS1: Phase A current of BS1.

Ib_BS1: Phase B current of BS1.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-55


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Ic_BS1: Phase C current of BS1.

Diff_BB1: Differential element of BB1 (not controlled by VEC_BBP) operates, please refer to
Figure 3.5-5.

The logic scheme of BFI of BS2 is similar to it.

3.11.3 Function Block Diagram

BC/BS 50BF

@BCy.BI_BFI @BCy.50BF.Op_TrpBB
@BCy.BI_ChkBFI 50BF.Op_Trp@BBx
Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn @BCy.Alm_BI_BFI
Ua_BBx, Ub_BBx, Uc_BBx @BCy.Alm_BI_ChkBFI
87B.Op_Trp@BCy
@BCy.50BF.Alm_Pkp
@BCy.50/51P.Op_Trp BO_BFI_@BSz
@BCy.50/51G.Op_Trp
50BF.Op
@BCy.62PD.Op_Trp

For a BS, Just use “BSz” to instead of “BCy” in the above function block diagram.

3.11.4 Logic

The logic of BC BFP is shown as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-6 as an example).

SIG Voltage_Rls_BBP 1

SET Ia_BC1>[BC.50BF.I_Set]

SET Ib_BC1>[BC.50BF.I_Set] ≥1

SET Ic_BC1>[BC.50BF.I_Set]

SIG 87B.Op_Trp@BC1

EN [62PD.En_Init50BF]
&
SIG @BC1.62PD.Op_Trp
@BC1.50BF.Op_TrpBB

EN [50/51.En_Init50BF] [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]
& 50BF.Op_Trp@BB1
&
SIG @BC1.50/51.Op_Trp
&
@BC1.50BF.Op_TrpBB
BI [@BC1.BI_BFI] ≥1
& [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]
& 50BF.Op_Trp@BB2
BI [@BC1.BI_ChkBFI]

SIG Voltage_Rls_BBP 2
@BC1.50BF.FD

Figure 3.11-2 Logic of BC/BS BFP

Where:

@BC1.50BF.FD: FD element for BC1 BFP picks up

Voltage_Rls_BBP 1: Busbar differential protection is not controlled by VCE_BBP or voltage

3-56 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

controlled element of BBP of BB1 operates, please refer to Section 3.5.2.2 for details.

Voltage_Rls_BBP 2: Busbar differential protection is not controlled by VCE_BBP or voltage


controlled element of BBP of BB2 operates, please refer to Section 3.5.2.2 for details.

@BC1.50/51.Op_Trp: Phase overcurrent protection or ground overcurrent protection of BC1


operates ([@BC1.50/51P.Op_Trp] or [@BC1.50/51G.Op_Trp]).

For the occasion that BS is at the edge of the protected zone, such as BS1 and BS2 in Figure
3.2-9, the logic of BS BFP is shown as follows (Takes BS1 in Figure 3.2-9 as an example).

SIG Voltage_Rls_BBP 1

SET Ia_BS1>[BC.50BF.I_Set]

SET Ib_BS1>[BC.50BF.I_Set] ≥1

SET Ic_BS1>[BC.50BF.I_Set]

SIG 87B.Op_Trp@BS1

EN [62PD.En_Init50BF]
&
SIG @BS1.62PD.Op_Trp
@BS1.50BF.Op_TrpBB

EN [50/51.En_Init50BF] [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]
& 50BF.Op_Trp@BB1
&
SIG @BS1.50/51.Op_Trp
&

BI [@BS1.BI_BFI] ≥1
&
@BS1.50BF.FD
BI [@BS1.BI_ChkBFI]

Figure 3.11-3 Logic of BS BFP (BS is at the edge of the protected zone)

Where:

@BS1.50BF.FD: FD element for BS1 BFP picks up

Voltage_Rls_BBP 1: Busbar differential protection is not controlled by VCE_BBP or voltage


controlled element of BBP of BB1 operates, please refer to Section 3.5.2.2 for details.

@BS1.50/51.Op_Trp: Phase overcurrent protection or ground overcurrent protection of BSz


operates ([@BS1.50/51P.Op_Trp] or [@BS1.50/51G.Op_Trp]).

3.11.5 I/O Signal

Table 3.11-1 Input signals of BC/BS breaker failure protection

No. Signal Description

1 87B.Op_Trp@BCy Busbar differential protection operates to trip BCy

2 87B.Op_Trp@BSz Busbar differential protection operates to trip BSz

3 @BCy.50/51P.Op_Trp Phase overcurrent protection of BCy operates

4 @BCy.50/51G.Op_Trp Ground overcurrent protection of BCy operates

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-57


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

5 @BSz.50/51P.Op_Trp Phase overcurrent protection of BSz operates

6 @BSz.50/51G.Op_Trp Ground overcurrent protection of BSz operates

7 @BCy.62PD.Op_Trp Pole disagreement protection of BCy operates

8 @BSz.62PD.Op_Trp Pole disagreement protection of BSz operates

9 @BCy.BI_BFI BFI binary input of BCy

10 @BCy.BI_ChkBFI Common BFI binary input of BCy

11 @BSz.BI_BFI BFI binary input of BSz

12 @BSz.BI_ChkBFI Common BFI binary input of BSz

Table 3.11-2 Output signals of BC/BS breaker failure protection

No. Signal Description

1 @BCy.50BF.Op_TrpBB BCy BFP operates to trip busbar zone

2 @BSz.50BF.Op_TrpBB BSz BFP operates to trip busbar zone

3 50BF.Op_Trp@BBx BFP operates to trip BBx

4 50BF.Op BC/BS BFP or feeder BFP operates

Binary input of initiating BCy BFP (@BCy.BI_BFI) is energized for over


5 @BCy.Alm_BI_BFI
10s.

Binary input of initiating BSz BFP (@BSz.BI_BFI) is energized for over


6 @BSz.Alm_BI_BFI
10s.

The common initiating contact of BFP of BCy (@BCy.BI_ChkBFI) is


7 @BCy.Alm_BI_ChkBFI
continually energized for over 10s

The common initiating contact of BFP of BSz (@BSz.BI_ChkBFI) is


8 @BSz.Alm_BI_ChkBFI
continually energized for over 10s

Alarm signal indicating that FD element for BCy BFP picks up for over
9 @BCy.50BF.Alm_Pkp
10s

Alarm signal indicating that FD element for BSz BFP picks up for over
10 @BSz.50BF.Alm_Pkp
10s

11 @BSz.BO_BFI BSz breaker failure initiating contact operates

3.11.6 Settings

 BC/BS Breaker Failure Protection Setting

Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsBC BFP Settings

Table 3.11-3 BC/BS breaker failure protection settings

No. Name Range Step Remark

1 BC.50BF.I_Set 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A Current setting for BC/BS BFP

2 BC.50BF.t_TrpBB 0.00~10.00s 0.01s Time delay of BC/BS BFP

In: Rated secondary current of reference CT

3-58 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

1. [BC.50BF.I_Set]

It should be set as minimum fault current flowing through BC breaker. The change of power
system topology can influence the fault current after BBP operating.

2. [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]

It should be larger than the maximal arc-extinguishing time of BC breaker.

3.12 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection (BFP)


NOTICE!

The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings
and sampled values related with each bay will change with the corresponding label
settings.

In Section 3.12, for a feeder bay, “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding feeder bay.

3.12.1 Fault Detector Element

Feeder breaker failure protection is provided for each feeder bay. PCS-915 provides independent
FD element for feeder BFP, if any of the following conditions is fulfilled, FD element for feeder bay
n BFP picks up (@Bayn.50BF.FD), the positive supply to the output relays is then available and
wait for the tripping signal from feeder BFP. The fault detector output signal will last for 500ms after
the fault detector element drop off.

1. BBP operates to trip feeder bay n (controlled by the logic setting [87B.En_Init50BF])

2. Breaker failure initiating (BFI) binary input (Phase-segregated or three-phase tripping contact)
and common BFI binary input [@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI] of feeder bay n are energized.

3. Overcurrent protection of feeder bay n operates (controlled by the logic setting


[50/51.En_Init50BF])

4. Pole disagreement protection of feeder bay n operates (controlled by the logic setting
[62PD.En_Init50BF])

3.12.2 Function Description

Breaker failure protection is available for each feeder bay. When a breaker is determined failure to
trip, the BFP will operate to re-trip the breaker after time delay of [50BF.t_ReTrp] (If “Breaker
failure protection re-tripping function” in protective function configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to
Section 3.4) and the logic setting [50BF.En_ReTrp] is set as “1”). If the fault is still existed, the
breaker failure protection will trip BC after time delay of [50BF.t_TrpBC] and all feeders after time
delay of [50BF.t_TrpBB]. BFP also provides the function to transfer trip the breaker of the remote
end of a line or intertrip the breakers on other sides of a main-transformer with the time delay of
[50BF.t_TrpBB].

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-59


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

3.12.2.1 BFI Binary Input

For each feeder bay, BFP can be initiated externally via binary inputs by phase-segregated
tripping contacts or three-phase tripping contacts of protective device for the corresponding feeder
bay.

1. Phase-segregated tripping contact

[@Bayn.BI_A_BFI]: The binary input for initiating BFP of phase A of feeder bay n

[@Bayn.BI_B_BFI]: The binary input for initiating BFP of phase B of feeder bay n

[@Bayn.BI_C_BFI]: The binary input for initiating BFP of phase C of feeder bay n

2. Three-phase tripping contact

[@Bayn.BI_BFI]: The binary input for initiating BFP of three phases of feeder bay n.

For a main-transformer bay, only three-phase breaker failure initiating (BFI) contact is provided.

3.12.2.2 Configuration of BFI Binary Input

If any BFI binary input (of BC/BS or any feeder bay) is configured for a binary input (BI) module,
binary inputs for other functions can not be configured for the BI module. BFI binary inputs of the
same bay must be configured for one BI module (i.e. [@Bayn.BI_A_BFI], [@Bayn.BI_B_BFI],
[@Bayn.BI_C_BFI] and [@Bayn.BI_BFI] can not be configured for two or more BI module).

[BI_COMMON] of BI module is an internal binary input, it will be energized if any other binary input
of the BI module is energized. [@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI] is the common BFI binary input. When users
configure BFI binary input via PCS-Explorer auxiliary software by themselves, all the common BFI
binary inputs of related bays must be configured to [BI_COMMON] of the BI module, so if any BFI
binary input of a BI module is energized, the common BFI binary inputs of related bays are
energized (refer to Section 9.5.2.1).

For example, if BFI binary inputs of bay 02~06 ([@Bayn.BI_A_BFI], [@Bayn.BI_B_BFI],


[@Bayn.BI_C_BFI] and [@Bayn.BI_BFI], n=02~06) are configured for one BI module, all the
common BFI binary inputs of related bays ([@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI] (n=02~06)) must be configured to
[BI_COMMON] of the BI module, then if any BFI binary input of the BI module is energized, the
common BFI binary inputs of bay 02~06 [@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI] (n=02~06) will be energized.

3.12.2.3 Current Criterion

1. Current criterion 1

Phase current is greater than the setting [Bayn.50BF.I_Set]

2. Current criterion 2

Residual current is greater than the setting [Bayn.50BF.3I0_Set]

3. Current criterion 3

Negative sequence current is greater than the setting i.e. [Bayn.50BF.I2_Set]

3-60 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

All these current criteria are controlled by the logic setting [50BF.En_Current_Ctrl], if this logic
setting is set as “0”, it can be regarded as that all these current criteria are met.

Current criterion 2 and current criterion 3 are also controlled by the logic setting of
[Bayn.50BF.En_3I0] and [Bayn.50BF.En_I2] respectively.

NOTICE!

When calculating all the current setting of each bay, the primary current should be
converted to the secondary value according to the reference CT ratio instead of the
actual CT ratio of each bay.

3.12.2.4 Voltage Control Element of Breaker Failure Protection (VCE_BFP)

Voltage control element is used as an auxiliary condition.

The criteria are:

UP≤[50BF.VCE.U_Set] Equation 3.12-1

3U0≥[50BF.VCE.3U0_Set] Equation 3.12-2

U2≥[50BF.VCE.U2_Set] Equation 3.12-3

Where:

UP: Phase voltage

3U0: Residual voltage

U2: Negative sequence voltage

[50BF.VCE.U_Set]: Phase voltage setting for blocking BFP

[50BF.VCE.3U0_Set]: Residual voltage setting for blocking BFP

[50BF.VCE.U2_Set]: Negative sequence voltage setting for blocking BFP

When the protective device is applied to an unearthed system, i.e. the system setting
[Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as “1”, the criteria of voltage control element will change.

UPP ≤[50BF.VCE.U_Set] Equation 3.12-4

U2 ≥[50BF.VCE.U2_Set] Equation 3.12-5

Where:

UPP: Phase-to-phase voltage

U2: Negative sequence voltage

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-61


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

[50BF.VCE.U_Set]: Phase-to-phase voltage setting for blocking BFP

[50BF.VCE.U2_Set]: Negative voltage setting for blocking BFP

VCE_BFP will be controlled by the logic setting [50BF.VCE.En], if it is set as “0”, VCE_BFP will be
disabled and feeder breaker failure protection will not controlled by VCE_BFP

If “B: Without voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions” during
MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3), VCE_BFP will quit and related settings will be hidden,
feeder breaker failure protection will not controlled by voltage element.

If the device setting [En_Volt_BB] is set as “0” (refer to Section 7.1), VCE_BFP is invalid no matter
the logic setting [50BF.VCE.En] is set as “1” or not, feeder breaker failure protection will not
controlled by voltage element.

Only if “A: With voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions” during
MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3), the device setting [En_Volt_BB] is set as “1” and the logic
setting [50BF.VCE.En] is set as “1”, VCE_BFP is enabled.

If the protective function configuration “Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for
breaker failure protection” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4), then if the logic setting
[Bayn.50BF.En_BI_RlsVCE] is set as “1” and the releasing voltage controlled element binary input
[50BF.BI_RlsVCE] is energized, the voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection for
bay n will operate.

3.12.3 Function Block Diagram

Feeder 50BF

Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn @Bayn.50BF.Op_ReTrp


Ua_BBx, Ub_BBx, Uc_BBx 50BF.Op_@TrpBCy
@Bayn.BI_89a_@BBx 50BF.Op_@TrpBSz
@Bayn.BI_89b_@BBx @Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBB
@Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp @Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBC
@Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp 50BF.Op_Trp@BBx
@Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp @Bayn.Op_TT
@Bayn.BI_BFI @Bayn.Alm_BI_BFI
@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI @Bayn.Alm_BI_ChkBFI
@Bayn.BI_A_BFI 50BF.Alm_BI_RlsVCE

@Bayn.BI_B_BFI 50BF.Alm_Pkp

@Bayn.BI_C_BFI 50BF.Alm_Off

50BF.BI_RlsVCE 50BF.Op

87B.Op_Trp@BBx_Biased
87B.Op_Trp@BBx_DPFC
50BF.BI_En

50BF.BI_Blk

3-62 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

3.12.4 Logic

The logic of feeder BFP is shown as follows.

EN [87B.En_Init50BF] &

SIG BBP operates to trip bay n

EN [62PD.En_Init50BF] &

SIG @Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp

EN [50/51.En_Init50BF] >=1
&

SIG @Bayn.50/51.Op_Trp

BI [@Bayn.BI_BFI] &

BI [@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI]
&
>=1 >=1

SET Ia_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.I_Set] &


BI [@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI] &

BI [@Bayn.BI_A_BFI]

SET Ib_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.I_Set] &


BI [@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI] &

BI [@Bayn.BI_B_BFI]

SET Ic_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.I_Set] &


BI [@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI] &

BI [@Bayn.BI_C_BFI]

EN [50BF.En_Current_Ctrl] & >=1

>=1
&
EN [Bayn.50BF.En_3I0] & >=1

SET 3I0_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.3I0_Set]
&
EN [Bayn.50BF.En_I2] &

SET I2_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.I2_Set]
& @Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBB
@Bayn.50BF.FD @Bayn.Op_TT
& [50BF.t_TrpBB] 0 50BF.Op_Trp@BBx
&
SIG 50BF is enabled [50BF.t_TrpBC] 0 50BF.Op_Trp@BC

@Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBC
SIG VCE_BFP x
&
SIG VCE_BFP is disabled ≥1 [50BF.t_ReTrp] 0 @Bayn.50BF.Op_ReTrp

BI [50BF.BI_RlsVCE]
&
&
EN Bayn.50BF.En_BI_RlsVCE

SIG Disconnector position of BBx

EN [50BF.En_ReTrp]

Figure 3.12-1 Logic of feeder BFP

Where:

@Bayn.50/51.Op_Trp: Phase overcurrent protection or ground overcurrent protection of bay n

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-63


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

operates ([@Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp] or [@Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp]).

50BF is enabled: busbar differential protection is enabled (the corresponding enabling binary input
[50BF.BI_En] is energized, the corresponding disabling binary input [50BF.BI_Blk] is de-energized
and the corresponding enabling function link [50BF.Link] and logic setting [50BF.En] are set as
“1”).

VCE_BFP x: Voltage controlled element for BFP of any connected BBx, please refer to Section
3.12.2.4.

VCE_BFP is disabled: “B: Without voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned
Functions” during MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3) or the device setting [En_Volt_BB] is
set as “0” or the logic setting [50BF.VCE.En] is set as “0”.
Disconnector position of BBx: which busbar the bay is connected to (according to disconnector
position of the bay).

@Bayn.50BF.FD: FD element for feeder bay n BFP picks up.

3I0_Bayn: The residual current of bay n.

I2_Bayn: The negative sequence current of bay n.

Ia_Bayn: The phase A current of bay n.

Ib_Bayn: The phase B current of bay n.

Ic_Bayn: The phase C current of bay n.

3.12.5 I/O Signal

Table 3.12-1 Input signals of feeder breaker failure protection

No. Signal Description

1 50BF.BI_En Binary input of enabling feeder BFP

2 50BF.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling feeder BFP

3 @Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp Phase overcurrent protection of bay n operates

4 @Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp Ground overcurrent protection of bay n operates

5 @Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp Pole disagreement protection of bay n operates

6 @Bayn.BI_BFI Three-phase BFI binary input of bay n

7 @Bayn.BI_A_BFI Phase-A BFI binary input of bay n

8 @Bayn.BI_B_BFI Phase-B BFI binary input of bay n

9 @Bayn.BI_C_BFI Phase-C BFI binary input of bay n

10 @Bayn.BI_ChkBFI Common BFI binary input of bay n

Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element of breaker


11 50BF.BI_RlsVCE
failure protection

3-64 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Table 3.12-2 Output signals of feeder breaker failure protection

No. Signal Description

1 @Bayn.50BF.Op_ReTrp BFP of bay n operates to re-trip the feeder breaker

2 50BF.Op_Trp@BCy BFP operates to trip BCy breaker

3 50BF.Op_Trp@BSz BFP operates to trip BSz breaker

4 50BF.Op_Trp@BBx BFP operates to trip BBx

5 @Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBB BFP of bay n operates to trip busbar zone

6 @Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBC BFP of bay n operates to trip BC/BS

7 50BF.Op BC/BS BFP or feeder BFP operates

DZP or BFP of bay n operates to initiate transfer trip to remote


8 @Bayn.Op_TT
circuit breaker

Binary input of initiating contact of BFP of bay n


9 @Bayn.Alm_BI_BFI (BI_A_BFI_@Bayn, BI_B_BFI_@Bayn, BI_C_BFI_@Bayn or
BI_BFI_@Bayn) is energized for over 10s.

The common initiating contact of BFP of bay n


10 @Bayn.Alm_BI_ChkBFI
(@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI) is continually energized for over 10s

Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element of breaker


11 50BF.Alm_BI_RlsVCE
failure protection is energized for over 10s.

Alarm signal indicating that FD element for BFP of any bay picks
12 50BF.Alm_Pkp
up for over 10s

Alarm signal indicating feeder BFP is disabled. If the logic setting


[50BF.En_Alm_Off] is set as “1”, once feeder BFP is disabled
13 50BF.Alm_Off (feeder BFP can be disabled by the corresponding enabling
binary input, function link or enabling logic setting), the alarm
signal indicating feeder BFP is disabled will be issued

3.12.6 Settings

 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection Setting

Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsFdr BFP Settings

Table 3.12-3 Feeder breaker failure protection settings

No. Name Range Step Remark

Time delay of feeder BFP operating


1 50BF.t_ReTrp 0.00~10.00s 0.01s
to re-trip breaker

Time delay of feeder BFP operating


2 50BF.t_TrpBC 0.00~10.00s 0.01s
to trip BC breaker

Time delay of feeder BFP operating


3 50BF.t_TrpBB 0.00~10.00s 0.01s
to trip busbar zone

4 50BF.VCE.U_Set 0~Un 0.01V Under voltage setting of VCE of

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-65


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

No. Name Range Step Remark

BFP

Residual voltage setting of VCE of


5 50BF.VCE.3U0_Set 0~Un 0.01V
BFP

Negative-sequence voltage setting


6 50BF.VCE.U2_Set 0~Un 0.01V
of VCE of BFP

Phase current setting of BFP of bay


7 Bayn.50BF.I_Set 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A
n

Residual current setting of BFP of


8 Bayn.50BF.3I0_Set 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A
bay n

Negative sequence current setting


9 Bayn.50BF.I2_Set 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A
of BFP of bay n

Residual current criterion of BFP of


10 Bayn.50BF.En_3I0 0, 1 1
bay n is enabled or not

Negative sequence current criterion


11 Bayn.50BF.En_I2 0, 1 1
of BFP of bay n is enabled or not

1: the binary input of releasing


voltage controlled element for
breaker failure protection is enabled
12 Bayn.50BF.En_BI_RlsVCE 0, 1 1 0: the binary input of releasing
voltage controlled element for
breaker failure protection is
disabled

Logic setting of breaker failure


protection
1: Enabling feeder breaker failure
13 50BF.En 0, 1 1
protection
0: Disabling feeder breaker failure
protection

1: Alarm signal will be issued if


feeder BFP is disabled
14 50BF.En_Alm_Off 0,1 1
0: Alarm signal will not be issued if
feeder BFP is disabled

Current criterion of BFP is enabled


15 50BF.En_Current_Ctrl 0, 1 1
or not

1: Enabling re-tripping function for


feeder breaker failure protection
16 50BF.En_ReTrp 0,1 1
0: Disabling re-tripping function for
feeder breaker failure protection

1: BFP is controlled by VCE of BFP


17 50BF.VCE.En 0, 1 1
0: BFP is not controlled by VCE of

3-66 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

No. Name Range Step Remark

BFP

In: Rated secondary current of reference CT

1. [50BF.t_ReTrp]

It should be larger than 100ms and smaller than the setting [50BF.t_TrpBC]. The recommended
value is 0.15s. The function of re-tripping target breaker can be disabled if it is set the same as
[50BF.t_TrpBC].

2. [50BF.t_TrpBC]

It should be larger than the sum of operating time of breaker and reset time of protective device
with certain margin. The recommended value is 250ms~350ms.

3. [50BF.t_TrpBB]

On the premise that BC breaker is tripped, the value of [50BF.t_TrpBB] should be greater than the
sum of operating time of BC breaker and reset time of protective device with certain margin. It
should be as short as possible on the premise of losing selectivity. The recommended value is
500ms~600ms.

4. [50BF.VCE.U_Set]

It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when a symmetrical fault occurs at the remote
end of the longest feeder but not operate in the lowest operation voltage. After the fault is cleared,
the protective device can reset reliably. If the system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as
“1”, the setting should be set as phase-to-phase voltage. Please refer to Section “System Settings
in Chapter 7

5. [50BF.VCE.3U0_Set]

It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when an unsymmetrical fault occurs at the
remote end of the longest line. It should be larger than maximum residual voltage in normal
operation mode. It is invalid if the system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as “1”.

6. [50BF.VCE.U2_Set]

It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when an unsymmetrical fault occurs at the
remote end of the longest line. It should be larger than maximum negative sequence voltage in
normal operation mode.

7. [Bayn.50BF.I_Set]

It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when there is a fault occurring at the remote end
of feeder or in LV side of transformer if this feeder is transformer bay. It should be greater than
maximum load under maximum fault level condition. In case of complying maximum load current
will not meet the sensitivity requirement, sensitivity requirement has the priority.

8. [Bayn.50BF.3I0_Set]

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-67


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when there is an earth fault occurring at the
remote end of line or LV side of transformer if this feeder is transformer bay. It should be greater
than the maximum residual current in normal operation mode.

9. [Bayn.50BF.I2_Set]

It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when there is a phase-to-phase fault occurring at
the remote end of line or LV side of transformer if this feeder is transformer bay. It should be
greater than the maximum negative sequence current in normal operation mode.

10. [Bayn.50BF.En_3I0]

In order to improve the sensitivity of current criterion for asymmetric fault, this setting should be set
as “1”. Especially for transformer or transmission line adopting phase-segregated tripping logic.

11. [Bayn.50BF.En_I2]

In order to improve the sensitivity of current criterion for asymmetric fault, this setting should be set
as “1”. Especially for transformer or transmission line adopting phase-segregated tripping logic.

 Function Link

Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links

Table 3.12-4 Function links of feeder breaker failure protection

No. Symbol Remark

1: Enabling feeder breaker failure protection


1 50BF.Link
0: Disabling feeder breaker failure protection

For feeder breaker failure protection, the relation is “AND” among the function link [50BF.Link], the
corresponding enabling binary input [50BF.BI_En] and the corresponding logic setting [50BF.En].

3.13 CT Circuit Supervision


3.13.1 Function Description

3.13.1.1 CT Circuit Failure

1. If the check zone differential current of one phase is larger than the setting [I_AlmH_CTS], CT
circuit failure alarm of corresponding phase [AlmH_CTS_X] (X=A, B or C) will be issued and
BBP of corresponding phase will be blocked (if the logic setting [87B.En_CTS_Blk] is set as
“1”) with a time delay of 5s. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as “1”, the
alarm can be reset automatically after the CT circuit returns to normal condition. If the logic
setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as “0”, the alarm can not be reset automatically
after the CT circuit returns to normal condition, it can be reset by energizing the resetting
binary input [BI_RstTarg] or pressing “ESC” first then “ENT” simultaneously (“ESC” and “ENT”
are two keypads on the front of the device) after the CT circuit returns to normal condition.

2. For the BC/BS that only one CT is available, if the check zone differential current of one phase
is smaller than the setting [I_AlmH_CTS] and both discriminating zone differential currents of

3-68 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

the phase of the two connected busbars are larger than [I_AlmH_CTS], BC/BS CT circuit
failure alarm signal of corresponding phase [@BCy.AlmH_CTS_X]/[@BSz.AlmH_CTS_X] will
be issued with a time delay of 5s and BBP will not be blocked, but the inter-connected
operation mode will be enabled automatically. Under this situation, if any internal fault occurs
on any of the two connected busbars, the device will not identify the faulty busbar. If the logic
setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as “1”, the alarm can be reset automatically after
the BC/BS CT circuit returns to normal condition. If the logic setting
[En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as “0”, the alarm can not be reset automatically after the
BC/BS CT circuit returns to normal condition, it can be reset only by energizing the resetting
binary input [BI_RstTarg] or pressing “ESC” first then “ENT” simultaneously (“ESC” and “ENT”
are two keypads on the front of the device) after the BC/BS CT circuit returns to normal
condition.

3. For the BC/BS that double CTs are available, if the check zone differential current of one
phase is smaller than the setting [I_AlmH_CTS] and discriminating zone differential current of
the phase of any connected busbar is larger than [I_AlmH_CTS], if the discriminating zone
differential current equals to the difference of current between the two CTs, BC/BS CT circuit
failure alarm signal of corresponding phase [@BCy.AlmH_CTS_X]/[@BSz.AlmH_CTS_X] will
be issued with a time delay of 5s and BBP of the busbar (of which the discriminating zone
differential current of the phase is larger than [I_AlmH_CTS]) of corresponding phase will be
blocked.

When “A: With voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions” during
MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3) and VT circuit failure is not detected, CT circuit
supervision will cease if VCE of any busbar operates. If “B: Without voltage concerned functions”
is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions” during MOT configuration, CT circuit supervision will
not be affected by voltage.

3.13.1.2 CT Circuit Abnormality

1. If the check zone differential current of one phase is larger than the setting i.e. [I_AlmL_CTS],
CT circuit abnormality alarm of corresponding phase [AlmL_CTS_X] (X=A, B or C) will be
issued with a time delay of 5s. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as “1”,
the alarm can be reset automatically after the CT circuit returns to normal condition. If the
logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as “0”, the alarm can not be reset
automatically after the CT circuit returns to normal condition, it can be reset only by energizing
the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] or pressing “ESC” first then “ENT” simultaneously
(“ESC” and “ENT” are two keypads on the front of the device) after the CT circuit returns to
normal condition.

2. For the BC/BS that only one CT is available, if the check zone differential current of one phase
is smaller than the setting [I_AlmL_CTS] and both discriminating zone currents of the phase
of the two connected busbars are larger than [I_AlmL_CTS], BC/BS CT circuit abnormality
alarm of corresponding phase [@BCy.AlmL_CTS_X]/[@BSz.AlmL_CTS_X] will be issued
with a time delay of 5s. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as “1”, BC/BS
CT circuit abnormality can be reset automatically after the BC/BS CT circuit returns to normal
condition. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as “0”, the alarm can not be

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-69


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

reset automatically after the BC/BS CT circuit returns to normal condition, it can be reset only
by energizing the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] or pressing “ESC” first then “ENT”
simultaneously (“ESC” and “ENT” are two keypads on the front of the device) after the BC/BS
CT circuit returns to normal condition.

3. For the BC/BS that double CTs are available, if the check zone differential current of one
phase is smaller than the setting [I_AlmL_CTS] and discriminating zone differential current of
the phase of any connected busbar is larger than [I_AlmL_CTS], if the discriminating zone
differential current equals to the difference of current between the two CTs, BC/BS CT circuit
abnormality alarm of corresponding phase [@BCy.AlmL_CTS_X]/[@BSz.AlmL_CTS_X] will
be issued with a time delay of 5s.

4. BBP will not be blocked when CT circuit is abnormal.

3.13.1.3 Discriminating Zone Differential Current High/Low Value Alarm (When Double CTs
are Available for BC/BS)

1. If discriminating zone differential current of BBx is larger than [I_AlmL_CTS], BBx differential
current low value alarm signal [@BBx.AlmL_Diff] will be issued with a time delay of 5s. If the
logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as “1”, the alarm can be reset automatically
after the discriminating zone differential current returns to normal condition. If the logic setting
[En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as “0”, the alarm can not be reset automatically after the
discriminating zone differential current returns to normal condition, it can be reset only by
energizing the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] or pressing “ESC” first then “ENT”
simultaneously (“ESC” and “ENT” are two keypads on the front of the device) after the
discriminating zone differential current returns to normal condition.

2. If discriminating zone differential current of BBx is larger than [I_AlmH_CTS], BBx differential
current high value alarm signal [@BBx.AlmH_Diff] will be issued with a time delay of 5s and
discriminating zone differential circuit of BBx will be blocked (if the logic setting
[87B.En_CTS_Blk] is set as “1”). If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as “1”,
the alarm can be reset automatically after the discriminating zone differential current returns
to normal condition. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as “0”, the alarm
can not be reset automatically after the discriminating zone differential current returns to
normal condition, it can be reset by energizing the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] or
pressing “ESC” first then “ENT” simultaneously (“ESC” and “ENT” are two keypads on the
front of the device) after the discriminating zone differential current returns to normal
condition.

NOTICE!

Logic execution priority: check zone CT circuit failure alarm logic > single-CT BC/BS CT
circuit failure alarm to enable inter-connected operation mode logic > discriminating
zone differential current high value alarm logic.

3-70 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

3.13.2 Function Block Diagram

CTS

AlmH_CTS_X
Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn
@BCy.AlmH_CTS_X
AlmL_CTS_X
@BCy.AlmL_CTS_X
@BBx.AlmH_Diff

@BBx.AlmL_Diff
@BSz.AlmH_CTS_X
@BSz.AlmL_CTS_X

X=A, B or C

3.13.3 Logic

5000ms 0
SET Ida_CZ>[I_AlmH_CTS] AlmH_CTS_A

5000ms 0
SET Idb_CZ>[I_AlmH_CTS] AlmH_CTS_B

5000ms 0
SET Idc_CZ>[I_AlmH_CTS] AlmH_CTS_C

Figure 3.13-1 Logic of CT circuit failure

Where:

Ida_CZ: Phase-A check zone differential current

Idb_CZ: Phase-B check zone differential current

Idc_CZ: Phase-C check zone differential current

I_AlmH_CTS: Current setting of CT circuit failure

AlmH_CTS_A: Phase-A CT circuit failure alarm signal, BBP of phase-A will be blocked by it if the
logic setting [87B.En_CTS_Blk] is set as “1”.

AlmH_CTS_B: Phase-B CT circuit failure alarm signal, BBP of phase-B will be blocked by it if the
logic setting [87B.En_CTS_Blk] is set as “1”.

AlmH_CTS_C: Phase-C CT circuit failure alarm signal, BBP of phase-C will be blocked by it if the
logic setting [87B.En_CTS_Blk] is set as “1”.

When double CTs are available for BC/BS, the following logic will be enabled.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-71


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

SET Ida_BBx>[I_AlmH_CTS]

5000ms 0
SET Idb_BBx>[I_AlmH_CTS] ≥1 @BBx.AlmH_Diff

SET Idc_BBx>[I_AlmH_CTS]

Figure 3.13-2 Logic of BBx differential current high value alarm

Where:

Ida_BBx: Phase-A discriminative differential current of BBx

Idb_BBx: Phase-B discriminative differential current of BBx

Idc_BBx: Phase-C discriminative differential current of BBx

@BBx.AlmH_Diff: BBx differential current high value alarm signal, individual zones of busbar
differential protection will be blocked by differential current high value alarm of respective zones.

The logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that only one CT is available) is shown as
follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-6 as an example).

SET Ida_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]

5000ms 0
SET Ida_BB1>[I_AlmH_CTS] & @BC1.AlmH_CTS_A
&

SET Ida_BB2>[I_AlmH_CTS]

SET Idb_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]

5000ms 0
SET Idb_BB1>[I_AlmH_CTS] & @BC1.AlmH_CTS_B
&

SET Idb_BB2>[I_AlmH_CTS]

SET Idc_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]

5000ms 0
SET Idc_BB1>[I_AlmH_CTS] & @BC1.AlmH_CTS_C
&

SET Idc_BB2>[I_AlmH_CTS]

Figure 3.13-3 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that only one CT is available)

Where:

Ida_BB1: Phase-A discriminative differential current of BB1

Idb_BB1: Phase-B discriminative differential current of BB1

Idc_BB1: Phase-C discriminative differential current of BB1

Ida_BB2: Phase-A discriminative differential current of BB2

3-72 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Idb_BB2: Phase-B discriminative differential current of BB2

Idc_BB2: Phase-C discriminative differential current of BB2

@BC1.AlmH_CTS_A: BC1 phase-A CT circuit failure.

@BC1.AlmH_CTS_B: BC1 phase-B CT circuit failure.

@BC1.AlmH_CTS_C: BC1 phase-C CT circuit failure.

The logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that double CTs are available) is shown as
follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-9 as an example).

SET Ida_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]

SET Ida_BB1>[I_AlmH_CTS]
&

SIG Ida_BB1=∣Ia_BC1_CT1-Ia_BC1_CT2∣ 5s 0
& @BC1.AlmH_CTS_A
≥1
SET Ida_BB2>[I_AlmH_CTS]
&

SIG Ida_BB2=∣Ia_BC1_CT1-Ia_BC1_CT2∣

SET Idb_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]

SET Idb_BB1>[I_AlmH_CTS]
&

SIG Idb_BB1=∣Ib_BC1_CT1-Ib_BC1_CT2∣ 5s 0
& @BC1.AlmH_CTS_B
≥1
SET Idb_BB2>[I_AlmH_CTS]
&

SIG Idb_BB2=∣Ib_BC1_CT1-Ib_BC1_CT2∣

SET Idc_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]

SET Idc_BB1>[I_AlmH_CTS]
&

SIG Idc_BB1=∣Ic_BC1_CT1-Ic_BC1_CT2∣ 5s 0
& @BC1.AlmH_CTS_C
≥1
SET Idc_BB2>[I_AlmH_CTS]
&

SIG Idc_BB2=∣Ic_BC1_CT1-Ic_BC1_CT2∣

Figure 3.13-4 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that double CTs are available)

Where:

Ia_BC1_CT1: Phase-A current of CT1 of BC1

Ib_BC1_CT1: Phase-B current of CT1 of BC1

Ic_BC1_CT1: Phase-C current of CT1 of BC1

Ia_BC1_CT2: Phase-A current of CT2 of BC1

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-73


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Ib_BC1_CT2: Phase-B current of CT2 of BC1

Ic_BC1_CT2: Phase-C current of CT2 of BC1

5000ms 0
SET Ida_CZ>[I_AlmL_CTS] AlmL_CTS_A

5000ms 0
SET Idb_CZ>[I_AlmL_CTS] AlmL_CTS_B

5000ms 0
SET Idc_CZ>[I_AlmL_CTS] AlmL_CTS_C

Figure 3.13-5 Logic of CT circuit abnormality

Where:

Ida_CZ: Phase-A check zone differential current

Idb_CZ: Phase-B check zone differential current

Idc_CZ: Phase-C check zone differential current

I_AlmL_CTS: Current setting of CT circuit abnormality

AlmL_CTS_A: Phase-A CT circuit abnormality

AlmL_CTS_B: Phase-B CT circuit abnormality

AlmL_CTS_C: Phase-C CT circuit abnormality

The logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that only one CT is available) is shown
as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-6 as an example).

3-74 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

SET Ida_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]

5000ms 0
SET Ida_BB1>[I_AlmL_CTS] & @BC1.AlmL_CTS_A
&

SET Ida_BB2>[I_AlmL_CTS]

SET Idb_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]

5000ms 0
SET Idb_BB1>[I_AlmL_CTS] & @BC1.AlmL_CTS_B
&

SET Idb_BB2>[I_AlmL_CTS]

SET Idc_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]

5000ms 0
SET Idc_BB1>[I_AlmL_CTS] & @BC1.AlmL_CTS_C
&

SET Idc_BB2>[I_AlmL_CTS]

Figure 3.13-6 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that only one CT is available)

Where:

Ida_BB1: Phase-A discriminative differential current of BB1

Idb_BB1: Phase-B discriminative differential current of BB1

Idc_BB1: Phase-C discriminative differential current of BB1

Ida_BB2: Phase-A discriminative differential current of BB2

Idb_BB2: Phase-B discriminative differential current of BB2

Idc_BB2: Phase-C discriminative differential current of BB2

@BC1.AlmL_CTS_A: BC1 phase-A CT circuit abnormality

@BC1.AlmL_CTS_B: BC1 phase-B CT circuit abnormality

@BC1.AlmL_CTS_C: BC1 phase-C CT circuit abnormality

The logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that double CTs are available) is shown
as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-9 as an example).

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-75


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

SET Ida_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]

SET Ida_BB1>[I_AlmL_CTS]
&

SIG Ida_BB1=∣Ia_BC1_CT1-Ia_BC1_CT2∣ 5s 0
& @BC1.AlmL_CTS_A
≥1
SET Ida_BB2>[I_AlmL_CTS]
&

SIG Ida_BB2=∣Ia_BC1_CT1-Ia_BC1_CT2∣

SET Idb_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]

SET Idb_BB1>[I_AlmL_CTS]
&

SIG Idb_BB1=∣Ib_BC1_CT1-Ib_BC1_CT2∣ 5s 0
& @BC1.AlmL_CTS_B
≥1
SET Idb_BB2>[I_AlmL_CTS]
&

SIG Idb_BB2=∣Ib_BC1_CT1-Ib_BC1_CT2∣

SET Idc_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]

SET Idc_BB1>[I_AlmL_CTS]
&

SIG Idc_BB1=∣Ic_BC1_CT1-Ic_BC1_CT2∣ 5s 0
& @BC1.AlmL_CTS_C
≥1
SET Idc_BB2>[I_AlmL_CTS]
&

SIG Idc_BB2=∣Ic_BC1_CT1-Ic_BC1_CT2∣

Figure 3.13-7 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that double CTs are available)

3.13.4 I/O Signal

Table 3.13-1 Output signal of CT circuit supervision

No. Signal Description

1 AlmH_CTS CT circuit failure

2 AlmH_CTS_A Phase-A CT circuit failure

3 AlmH_CTS_B Phase-B CT circuit failure

4 AlmH_CTS_C Phase-C CT circuit failure

5 @BCy.AlmH_CTS BCy CT circuit failure

6 @BCy.AlmH_CTS_A BCy phase-A CT circuit failure

7 @BCy.AlmH_CTS_B BCy phase-B CT circuit failure

8 @BCy.AlmH_CTS_C BCy phase-C CT circuit failure

9 @BSz.AlmH_CTS BSz CT circuit failure

10 @BSz.AlmH_CTS_A BSz phase-A CT circuit failure

11 @BSz.AlmH_CTS_B BSz phase-B CT circuit failure

12 @BSz.AlmH_CTS_C BSz phase-C CT circuit failure

3-76 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

13 AlmL_CTS CT circuit abnormality

14 AlmL_CTS_A Phase-A CT circuit abnormality

15 AlmL_CTS_B Phase-B CT circuit abnormality

16 AlmL_CTS_C Phase-C CT circuit abnormality

17 @BCy.AlmL_CTS BCy CT circuit abnormality

18 @BCy.AlmL_CTS_A BCy phase-A CT circuit abnormality

19 @BCy.AlmL_CTS_B BCy phase-B CT circuit abnormality

20 @BCy.AlmL_CTS_C BCy phase-C CT circuit abnormality

21 @BSz.AlmL_CTS BSz CT circuit abnormality

22 @BSz.AlmL_CTS_A BSz phase-A CT circuit abnormality

23 @BSz.AlmL_CTS_B BSz phase-B CT circuit abnormality

24 @BSz.AlmL_CTS_C BSz phase-C CT circuit abnormality

25 @BBx.AlmH_Diff BBx differential current high value alarm

26 @BBx.AlmL_Diff BBx differential current low value alarm

3.14 VT Circuit Supervision


3.14.1 Function Description

1. If negative sequence voltage (U2) of BBx is larger than 0.04Unn (Unn: secondary rated
phase-to-phase voltage of VT) and fault detector element does not pick up, an alarm
[@BBx.Alm_VTS] will be issued with a time delay of 1.25s.

2. If BBx is in service and the scalar sum of three phase-voltage (|UA|+|UB|+|UC|) of BBx is
smaller than Un (Un: secondary rated phase-to-ground voltage of VT) and fault detector
element does not pick up, an alarm [@BBx.Alm_VTS] will be issued with a time delay of
1.25s.

3. When the system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as “1”, if busbar negative


sequence voltage (U2) is larger than 0.04Unn, or any phase-to-phase voltage is smaller than
0.7Unn, an alarm [Alm_VTS_BB1] or [Alm_VTS_BB2] will be issued with a time delay of 1.25s.

If VT circuit failure is detected, DPFC voltage FD element will be disabled. When the three
phase-voltage returns to normal condition, the alarm [@BBx.Alm_VTS] will be reset automatically
with a time delay of 10s.

If the fault detector element picks up due to a disturbance in the system (DPFC current is
detected), the VT circuit supervision will be disabled for 3s.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-77


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

3.14.2 Function Block Diagram

VTS

Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn @BBx.Alm_VTS

Ua_BBx, Ub_BBx, Uc_BBx

3.14.3 Logic

SIG Ua>0.7Un
SIG Ub>0.7Un
≥1 BBx is in service
SIG Uc>0.7Un
SIG IΨ_Bayn>0.04In

│ Ua│ +│ Ub│ +│ Uc│ < &


SIG
Un
EN [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode]
≥1
& 1.25s 10s
& @BBx.Alm_VTS

SIG Uab<0.7Unn
SIG Ubc<0.7Unn ≥1
SIG Uca<0.7Unn

SIG U2>0.04Unn

SIG Any FD element picks up

Figure 3.14-1 Logic of VT circuit failure

Where:

Ua: Phase-A voltage of BBx

Ub: Phase-B voltage of BBx

Uc: Phase-C voltage of BBx

Uab, Ubc, Uca: Phase-to-phase voltage of BBx

U2: Negative-sequence voltage of BBx

Un: The rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage of VT

Unn: The rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage of VT

IΨ_Bayn: Any phase current of any feeder bay connected to BBx

In: The rated secondary current of reference CT

Any FD element picks up: Any fault detector element picks up

@BBx.Alm_VTS: BBx VT circuit failure

3-78 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

3.14.4 I/O Signal

Table 3.14-1 Output signal of VT circuit supervision

No. Signal Description

1 @BBx.Alm_VTS BBx VT circuit failure

3.15 Position of Disconnector and Circuit Breaker


NOTICE!

The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings
and sampled values related with each bay and busbar will change with the
corresponding label settings.

In Section 3.15, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding busbar
and “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay.

3.15.1 Function Description

In a substation with double-busbar layout, feeders may be switched from one busbar to the other
busbar during operation. Thus it is necessary to identify the real time topology of busbar correctly.

PCS-915 offers disconnector positions element and self-diagnosis function to assist in identifying
the real time busbar topology.

If BBn disconnector and BBm disconnector of the same feeder are closed at the same time (n≠m),
an alarm signal [Alm_IntLink] will be issued simultaneously. If the two disconnectors returns to
normal condition, the alarm will reset automatically.

If an abnormality of disconnector position of bay n is detected, the disconnector position alarm


[@Bayn.Alm_DS] will be issued simultaneously in any of the following cases.

1. Current is detected in a feeder but the feeder has no disconnector positions for dual busbars
(the two disconnectors that the feeder connect to the two busbar are open). In this case, the
protective device will use the latest disconnector position instead and its validity will be
checked based on the current distribution of the system.

2. The discriminating zone differential current is larger than 0.08In and the check zone
differential current is smaller than 0.06In (In: the rated secondary current of reference CT) due
to one feeder of which the disconnector position is wrong, disconnector position alarm will be
issued and the device can identify the correct disconnector position based on the current
distribution of system. The logic diagram is shown in Figure 3.15-3.

If any disconnector position alarm is issued, if the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_DS] is set as “1”
(refer to Section 3.5.6), once the abnormality of disconnector position disappears, the alarm will be
reset automatically. if the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_DS] is set as “0”, the alarm can not be
reset unless energizing the disconnector position confirm binary input [BI_ConfirmDS] or carry out
the disconnector position confirming command by navigating the path “Local Cmd”->“Confirm
Disconnector”.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-79


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Besides, in order to prevent the feeder from miss-operation caused by the lost of feeder
disconnector position, regardless which busbar zone does the fault occur in, the feeders of which
current is larger than 0.04*In (In: the rated secondary current of reference CT) but no disconnector
position can be detected will be tripped.

If dual-position BI for disconnector is disabled (refer to Section 3.3), only normally open auxiliary
contact of disconnector is used to identify the position status. If dual-position BI for circuit breaker
is disabled (refer to Section 3.3), only normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker is used to
identify the position status. If dual-position BI for disconnector (circuit breaker) is enabled (refer to
Section 3.3), both normally open auxiliary contact and normally closed auxiliary contact of
disconnector (circuit breaker) are used to identify the position status.

If only normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker is used to identify the position status,
once normally closed auxiliary contact connected binary input is energized, the corresponding
circuit breaker will be identified as open, otherwise it is closed.

If only normally open auxiliary contact of disconnector is used to identify the position status, once
normally open auxiliary contact connected binary input is energized, the corresponding
disconnector will be identified as closed, otherwise it is open.

If both normally open auxiliary contact and normally closed auxiliary contact of disconnector or
circuit breaker are used to identify the position status, the following tables show the principle.

Table 3.15-1 Position status of disconnector

Normally closed auxiliary


Normally open auxiliary contact position status
contact

0 1 Open

1 0 Closed

0 0 the last valid memorized position

1 1 Closed

Table 3.15-2 Position status of circuit breaker

Normally closed auxiliary


Normally open auxiliary contact position status
contact

0 1 Open

1 0 Closed

0 0 Closed

1 1 Closed

If normally closed auxiliary contact of bay n circuit breaker is energized but current is still be
detected in corresponding bay n, an alarm signal [@Bayn.Alm_52b] will be issued without blocking
the protective device.

If the enforced disconnector position link [@Bayn.Link_DS] is configured and it is set as “1”, the
disconnector position will be decided by [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB1] and [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB2], if

3-80 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

[@Bayn.Link_DS_BB1] is set as “1”, BB1 disconnector of bay n is taken as closed enforcedly, if


[@Bayn.Link_DS_BB2] is set as “1”, BB2 disconnector of bay n is taken as closed enforcedly.

When [@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”, if [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB1] and [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB2] are


set as “1” at the same time, an alarm signal [Alm_IntLink] will be issued.

If the enforced disconnector position link [@Bayn.Link_DS] is configured and it is set as “1”,
[@Bayn.Link_DS_BB1] and [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB2] are all set as “0”, but current is detected in
bay n, disconnector position alarm [@Bayn.Alm_DS] will be issued simultaneously.

If dual-position BI for circuit breaker is enabled (refer to Section 3.3), when circuit breaker of bay n
is in maintenance, the corresponding function link [@Bayn.Link_Maintenance] should be set as “1”
and the circuit breaker will be regarded as open, otherwise the alarm signal
[@Bayn.Alm_52a&52b] will be issued once circuit breaker of bay n is in maintenance. If
dual-position BI for circuit breaker is disabled, the function link [@Bayn.Link_Maintenance] is not
configured.

3.15.2 Logic

3.15.2.1 Inter-connection Mode Alarm Logic

BI @Bayn.BI_89a_@BB1
Bay n is connected to BB1
&
BI @Bayn.BI_89b_@BB1

&
& Alm_IntLink1
SIG Dual-position DS

BI @Bayn.BI_89a_@BB2
&
BI @Bayn.BI_89b_@BB2 Bay n is connected to BB2
&

Figure 3.15-1 Logic of inter-connection mode alarm

Where:

@Bayn.BI_89a_@BB1: Normally open auxiliary contact of BB1 disconnector of bay n

@Bayn.BI_89a_@BB2: Normally open auxiliary contact of BB2 disconnector of bay n

@Bayn.BI_89b_@BB1: Normally closed auxiliary contact of BB1 disconnector of bay n

@Bayn.BI_89b_@BB2: Normally closed auxiliary contact of BB2 disconnector of bay n

Dual-position DS: Dual-position for disconnector status, it can be configured during MOT
configuration via PCS-Explorer software (refer to Section 3.3).

Alm_IntLink1: BB1 disconnector and BB2 disconnector of the same feeder are closed at the same
time

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-81


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

3.15.2.2 Disconnector Position Alarm Logic

SIG Bayn DS position changes


&
EN En_AutoRecov_DS

SIG Bay n is connected to BB1 ≥1 Bayn.Alm_DS


&
SIG Bay n is connected to BB2

&
SIG IΨ_Bayn>0.04In

Figure 3.15-2 Logic of disconnector position alarm

Where:

Bayn DS position changes: Disconnector position of bay n changes (from open change to closed
or from closed change to open)
En_AutoRecov_DS: 1: Logic setting of busbar differential protection. When it is set as “1”, if any
disconnector position alarm is issued, once the abnormality of disconnector position disappears,
the alarm will be reset automatically. When it is set as “0”, if any disconnector position alarm is
issued, the alarm can not be reset unless energizing the disconnector position confirm binary input
[BI_ConfirmDS]
Bay n is connected to BB1, Bay n is connected to BB2: Please refer to the inter-connection mode
alarm logic

IΨ_Bayn: Any phase current of feeder bay n

@Bayn.Alm_DS: Disconnector position of bay n is abnormal.

3.15.2.3 Disconnector Position Automatic Correction Logic

Takes BB1 as an example

3-82 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

SIG Bay n is connected to BB1

SIG Ida_CZ<0.06In
SIG Idb_CZ<0.06In &

SIG Idc_CZ<0.06In

SIG Ida_BB1>0.08In
SIG Idb_BB1>0.08In &

SIG Idc_BB1>0.08In

SIG Ida_BB2<0.08In
≥1 Bay n is identified connected to BB1
SIG Idb_BB2<0.08In &
&
SIG Idc_BB2<0.08In

SIG Ia_Bayn=Ida_BB1
SIG Ib_Bayn=Idb_BB1 &

SIG Ic_Bayn=Idc_BB1

SIG Bay n is connected to BB1


≥1
SIG Bay n is connected to BB2

Figure 3.15-3 Logic of automatic correction of disconnector position

Where:

Ida_CZ: Phase-A check zone differential current

Idb_CZ: Phase-B check zone differential current

Idc_CZ: Phase-C check zone differential current

Ida_BB1 (Ida_BB2): Phase-A discriminating zone differential current of BB1 (BB2)

Idb_BB1 (Idb_BB2): Phase-B discriminating zone differential current of BB1 (BB2)

Idc_BB1 (Idc_BB2): Phase-C discriminating zone differential current of BB1 (BB2)

Ia_Bayn: Phase-A current of feeder bay n

Ib_Bayn: Phase-B current of feeder bay n

Ic_Bayn: Phase-C current of feeder bay n

Bay n is connected to BB1, Bay n is connected to BB2: Please refer to the inter-connection mode
alarm logic

3.15.2.4 Dual-Position Alarm Logic

Takes BB1 as an example

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-83


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

SIG Dual-position DS

BI @Bayn.BI_89a_@BB1
&
& @Bayn.Alm_89a&89b_@BB1

BI @Bayn.BI_89b_@BB1 ≥1

BI @Bayn.BI_89a_@BB1
&

BI @Bayn.BI_89b_@BB1

SIG Dual-position CB

BI @Bayn.BI_52a
&

BI @Bayn.BI_52b ≥1 & @Bayn.Alm_52a&52b

BI @Bayn.BI_52a
&

BI @Bayn.BI_52b

EN @Bayn.Link_Maintenance

Figure 3.15-4 Logic of dual-position alarm

Where:

Dual-position DS: Dual-position for disconnector status, it can be configured during MOT
configuration via PCS-Explorer software (refer to Section 3.3).

@Bayn.BI_89a_@BB1: Normally open auxiliary contact of BB1 disconnector of bay n

@Bayn.BI_89b_@BB1: Normally closed auxiliary contact of BB1 disconnector of bay n

Dual-position CB: Dual-position for circuit breaker status, it can be configured during MOT
configuration via PCS-Explorer software (refer to Section 3.3).

@Bayn.Alm_89a&89b_@BBx: Dual-position alarm for BB1 disconnector of bay n

@Bayn.BI_52a: Normally open auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n

@Bayn.BI_52b: Normally closed auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n


@Bayn.Link_Maintenance: Logic link to indicate circuit breaker of bay n is in maintenance

@Bayn.Alm_52a&52b: Dual-position alarm for circuit breaker of bay n

3.15.3 I/O Signal

Table 3.15-3 Input signals of position of disconnector and circuit breaker

No. Signal Description

1 @Bayn.BI_89a_@BBx Normally open auxiliary contact of BBx disconnector of bay n

2 @Bayn.BI_89b_@BBx Normally closed auxiliary contact of BBx disconnector of bay n

3-84 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Normally open auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n. The input
signal is only configured if dual-position BI for circuit breaker is enabled
3 @Bayn.BI_52a
(refer to Section 3.3) and “Phase-segregated breaker position” in basic
information configuration is set as “disable” (refer to Section 3.4).

Normally closed auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n. The input
4 @Bayn.BI_52b signal is only configured if “Phase-segregated breaker position” in basic
information configuration is set as “disable” (refer to Section 3.4).

Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n.


The input signal is only configured if dual-position BI for circuit breaker is
5 @Bayn.BI_A_52a
enabled (refer to Section 3.3) and “Phase-segregated breaker position”
in basic information configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4).

Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n.


The input signal is only configured if dual-position BI for circuit breaker is
6 @Bayn.BI_B_52a
enabled (refer to Section 3.3) and “Phase-segregated breaker position”
in basic information configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4).

Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay


n. The input signal is only configured if dual-position BI for circuit breaker
7 @Bayn.BI_C_52a is enabled (refer to Section 3.3) and “Phase-segregated breaker
position” in basic information configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to
Section 3.4).

Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n.


The input signal is only configured if “Phase-segregated breaker
8 @Bayn.BI_A_52b
position” in basic information configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to
Section 3.4).

Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n.


The input signal is only configured if “Phase-segregated breaker
9 @Bayn.BI_B_52b
position” in basic information configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to
Section 3.4).

Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay n.


The input signal is only configured if “Phase-segregated breaker
10 @Bayn.BI_C_52b
position” in basic information configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to
Section 3.4).

11 BI_ConfirmDS Disconnector position confirm binary input

Table 3.15-4 Output signals of position of disconnector and circuit breaker

No. Signal Description

1 @Bayn.Alm_DS Disconnector position of bay n is abnormal.

2 Alm_DS Disconnector position of any bay is abnormal.

BBn disconnector and BBm disconnector of the same feeder are


3 Alm_IntLink
closed at the same time

4 @Bayn.Alm_52b Normally closed auxiliary contact of bay n breaker is energized but

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-85


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

current can still be detected in bay n

Normally closed and normally open auxiliary contact of bay n breaker


are energized or de-energized simultaneously for over 5s (if both
5 @Bayn.Alm_52a&52b
normally open auxiliary contact and normally closed auxiliary contact
of circuit breaker are used to identify the position status)

Normally closed and normally open auxiliary contact of BBx


6 @Bayn.Alm_89a&89b_@BBx disconnector of bay n is energized or de-energized simultaneously for
over s 5s

3.15.4 Settings

 Function Link

Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links

Table 3.15-5 Function link of circuit breaker

No. Symbol Remark

1: Circuit breaker of bay n is in maintenance.


1 @Bayn.Link_Maintenance
0: Circuit breaker of bay n is not in maintenance.

1: Enforced disconnector position for bay n is enabled. The


disconnector position will be decided by [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB1]
and [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB2].
2 @Bayn.Link_DS
0: Enforced disconnector position for bay n is disabled. The
disconnector position will be decided by disconnector position
binary input.

1: BB1 disconnector of bay n is taken as closed enforcedly if


[@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”.
3 @Bayn.Link_DS_BB1
0: BB1 disconnector of bay n is taken as open enforcedly if
[@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”.

1: BB2 disconnector of bay n is taken as closed enforcedly if


[@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”.
4 @Bayn.Link_DS_BB2
0: BB2 disconnector of bay n is taken as open enforcedly if
[@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”.

3.16 BC/BS Breaker Substitution and Bypass Breaker Substitution


NOTICE!

The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings
and sampled values related with each bay and busbar will change with the
corresponding label settings.

In Section 3.16, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding busbar.

3-86 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

3.16.1 Function Description

3.16.1.1 BC/BS Breaker Substitution

If BC/BS breaker is used temporarily to substitute one of feeder breakers through transfer bus, the
binary input [BI_En_BC_Byp] should be energized. The binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp] should
be energized or de-energized according to the busbar arrangement. The polarity mark of feeder
CT is on the busbar side, if the polarity mark of the substituted BC/BS CT is on the busbar side,
the binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp] should be de-energized and BC/BS current will be
calculated in discriminating zone differential current. If the polarity mark of the substituting BC/BS
CT is on the feeder side, the binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp] should be energized and negative
value of BC/BS current will be calculated in discriminating zone differential current.

If BC/BS breaker is used temporarily to substitute one of feeder breakers, whether the positive
value or the negative value of the substituting BC/BS current is calculated in discriminating zone
differential current depends on the status of the binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp].

If substituting disconnector of BBx [BI_89a_@BBx_Byp] is closed, the BC/BS breaker is


substituting through BBx, and the BC/BS current will be calculated in discriminating zone
differential current of BBx.

When BC/BS breaker is used to substitute any of feeder breakers, the BC/BS bay will be treated
as a feeder bay, BC/BS SOTF protection will quit and the DZP and BFP logic of the BC/BS bay will
be changed to feeder DZP and BFP logic, overcurrent protection and pole disagreement
protection are still reserved, which can be used as the protection function of the substituted feeder.
In addition, some functions for BC/BS breaker is used as a tie breaker connecting two busbars are
also quit (such as: tripping BC/BS breaker when busbar internal fault happens).

NOTICE!

[BI_En_RevCT_Byp] should be energized PRIOR to [BI_En_BC_Byp].

1. Energizing the binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp]

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-87


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Transfer bus
disconnector

Transfer Busbar
Protected * * * *
zone
……

*
BB1

BC/BS

BB2

Figure 3.16-1 BC/BS breaker substituting through BB2

The polarity mark of BC/BS CT is on the feeder side, the binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp] should
be energized. Negative value of BC/BS current will be calculated in discriminative zone differential
current of BB2.

2. De-energizing the binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp]

Transfer bus
disconnector

Transfer Busbar
Protected
* * * *
zone
……

*
BB2

BC/BS

BB1

Figure 3.16-2 BC/BS breaker substituting through BB1

The polarity mark of BC/BS CT is on the busbar side, the binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp] should
not be energized. Positive value of BC/BS current will be calculated in discriminative zone
differential current of BB1.

3-88 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

3.16.1.2 Bypass Breaker Substitution

If dedicated bypass breaker is used to substitute one of feeder breakers through transfer bus, the
polarity mark of bypass breaker CT should be on the busbar side. The CT of the substituted feeder
can be located at the outside of the transfer bus disconnector (shown in Figure 3.16-3) or inside of
the transfer bus disconnector (shown in Figure 3.16-4). The protected zone of the device is
different due to the CT location is different (shown in the corresponding figure).

If the CT of the substituted feeder is located at the outside of the transfer bus disconnector, the
transfer busbar is in the protected zone. If bypass disconnector of BBx is closed, bypass breaker
current will be calculated in discriminating zone differential current of BBx (bypass breaker current
will not be calculated in check zone differential current). If bypass disconnector of BB1 and BB2
are closed at the same time, the alarm signal [Alm_IntLink1] will be issued. If transfer bus
disconnector of bay n is closed, BB1 disconnector or BB2 disconnector of bay n is closed, and
circuit breaker of bay n is closed, the alarm signal [Alm_IntLink2] or [Alm_IntLink3] will be issued. If
feeder breaker of bay n is open and transfer bus disconnector of bay n is closed, feeder breakers
of bay n is under substituted status, the current of bay n will only be calculated in check zone
differential current and discriminating zone differential current of transfer busbar, no matter BB1
disconnector or BB2 disconnector of the bay is closed or open, the current of bay n will not be
calculated in discriminating zone differential current of BB1 and BB2.

Protected zone

* * * *
Transfer bus
disconnector
Transfer Busbar

*
Bypass breaker ……

Bypass
disconnector
BB2
*
BC/BS

BB1

Figure 3.16-3 Bypass breaker substitution (the CT of the substituted feeder is located at the inside of the
transfer bus disconnector)

If the CT of the substituted feeder is located at the inside of the transfer bus disconnector, the
transfer busbar is not in the protected zone, the substituted feeder will be treated as same as other
feeder bays.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-89


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Transfer bus
disconnector
Transfer Busbar

* * * * *
Protected
zone Bypass breaker ……

Bypass
disconnector
BB2
*
BC/BS

BB1

Figure 3.16-4 Bypass breaker substitution (the CT of the substituted feeder is located at the outside of the
transfer bus disconnector)

3.16.2 I/O Signal

If feeder breaker of bay n is open and transfer bus disconnector of bay n is closed, feeder
breakers of bay n is under substituted status, then if the transfer bus disconnector is open,
substituted status alarm signal [@Bayn.Alm_Byp] will be issued. The alarm signal is reset if the
transfer bus disconnector is closed or feeder breaker of bay n is closed.

Table 3.16-1 Input signal of breaker substitution

No. Signal Description

1 @Bayn.BI_89a_Byp_@BBx Normally open auxiliary contact of transfer bus disconnector of bay n

Binary input indicating BC/BS breaker is used to substitute one of


2 BI_En_BC_Byp
feeder breakers

Reverse the polarity mark of BC/BS CT when BC/BS breaker is used


3 BI_En_RevCT_Byp
to substitute one of feeder breakers

Table 3.16-2 Output signal of breaker substitution

No. Signal Description

If feeder breaker of bay n is open and transfer bus disconnector of bay n


is closed, feeder breakers of bay n is under substituted status, then if the
1 @Bayn.Alm_Byp
transfer bus disconnector is open, substituted status alarm signal
[@Bayn.Alm_Byp] will be issued.

3.17 GOOSE and SV Function


NOTICE!

The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings

3-90 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

and sampled values related with each bay and busbar will change with the
corresponding label settings.

In Section 3.17, “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay.
“@SVLink_Bm_n” is used to refer to the label setting of the SV communication link n of
the GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.m. “@GLink_Bm_n” is used to refer
to the label setting of the GOOSE communication link n of the GOOSE and SV module
that located in slot No.m.

PCS-915 can accomplish the control of primary equipment, status exchange of each protection
device and acquisition of binary inputs via GOOSE network. GOOSE receiving links and GOOSE
sending links are provided for each bay which is used to control the GOOSE binary input and
output.

GOOSE and SV module (NR1136A) can be used for GOOSE & SV message transmission by
point-to-point connection or via LAN. It can receive the sampled values (SV) from merging unit
(MU), and it can also receive GOOSE signals from or send GOOSE signals to intelligent terminal
unit.

3.17.1 The Effect of Data Abnormality

In order to prevent the whole protection device from being blocked for abnormality of any data
channel, only some relevant protection elements is blocked selectively according to the different
abnormalities, the specific principle is as follows:

1) If the SV message is invalid, the invalid SV message will be displayed and it will not be
cleared.

2) If any voltage channel is abnormal, the protection will not be blocked and the corresponding
voltage controlled element will be released.

3) If current channel of feeder m is abnormal, busbar differential protection will be disabled, the
integrated protections (such as feeder breaker failure protection, overcurrent protection and
pole disagreement protection) of concerned bay will be disabled automatically whereas the
protections of other healthy bays remains available.

4) If current channel of BC/BS is abnormal, BC/BS protection will be blocked and


inter-connection operation mode will be enabled automatically.

3.17.2 Out of Service of a Bay

If bay n is in service, set the function link [@Bayn.Link_On] as “1”. if bay n is out of service, set the
function link [@Bayn.Link_On] as “0”, the current of the corresponding bay will be excluded for
differential protection calculation but the actual sampling data can still be displayed, all the
GOOSE sending and receiving of bay n will be interrupted and all the GOOSE and SV alarm
signals of bay n will be shielded. If bay n is out of service ([@Bayn.Link_On]=0) and current is still
detected (larger than 0.04In) in bay n, an alarm signal [@Bayn.Alm_Out] will be issued and the
current will be included for differential protection calculation.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-91


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

3.17.3 Maintenance Binary Input

 GOOSE signal

If the status of the maintenance binary input [BI_Maintenance] of the sending end does not equals
to that of the receiving end, the received GOOSE signal is invalid.

 SV sampling

When bay n is in service, if the status of the maintenance binary input [BI_Maintenance] of the
device does not equals to that of the MU of corresponding bay, the received sampling data is
invalid, alarm signal will be issued and current differential protection and other protections of the
bay will be blocked.

3.17.4 I/O Signal

Table 3.17-1 Output signal of GOOSE and SV function

No. Signal Description

Corresponding bay is out of service, but current is still detected


1 @SVLink_Bm_n.Alm_Off_SV
(larger than 0.04In)

Corresponding bay is in servicebut the corresponding MU is in


2 @SVLink_Bm_nAlm_Maintenance_SV
maintenance state

Network A of corresponding GOOSE link is disconnected, the


3 @GLink_Bm_n.GAlm_ADisc
protection will not be blocked

Network B of corresponding GOOSE link is disconnected, the


4 @GLink_Bm_n.GAlm_BDisc
protection will not be blocked

The alarm signal will be issued if any of the following conditions


is satisfied.
Configuration version of two ends (the GOOSE receiving end
and the GOOSE sending end) are inconsistent.
5 @GLink_Bm_n.GAlm_Cfg The number of data of received message is not equal to that
configured in the receiving control block.
Failed to analyze the data segment of received message. For
example, the data type of received message is mismatch with
that configured in the receiving control block.

Internal GOOSE configuration file of Bx (Bx means GOOSE and


6 Bx.GAlm_CfgFile_PL
SV module that located in slot No.x) is wrong

Network storm occurs on GOOSE network A of Bx (Bx means


7 Bx.GAlm_AStorm_PL
GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.x)

Network storm occurs on GOOSE network B of Bx (Bx means


8 Bx.GAlm_BStorm_PL
GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.x)

Internal SV configuration file of Bx (Bx means GOOSE and SV


9 Bx.SVAlm_CfgFile
module that located in slot No.x) is wrong

10 @SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_ADisc Network A of MU of corresponding bay is disconnected

3-92 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

11 @SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_BDisc Network B of MU of corresponding bay is disconnected

Sampled values of corresponding bay n error (time over,


12 @SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_Data
decoding error or interpolation time scale error)

13 @SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_SynLoss The MU of corresponding bay lose synchronism signal

14 @SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_InvalidSample the sampled data from MU of corresponding bay is invalid

15 @SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_Jitter_Ch Sampling frame jittering alarm signal

16 @SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_TimeLag_Ch Channel delay of corresponding bay changes or out of range

The overall SV alarm signal of Bx (Bx means GOOSE and SV


17 Bx.SVAlm_Overall_PL
module that located in slot No.x)

The overall GOOSE alarm signal of Bx (Bx means GOOSE and


18 Bx.GAlm_Overall_PL
SV module that located in slot No.x)

3.17.5 Settings

 Function Link

Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links

Table 3.17-2 Function link

No. Symbol Remark

1: Bay n is put into service.


1 @Bayn.Link_On 0: Bay n is out of service.
It is configured when digital sampling mode is adopted.

 GOOSE Sending Link

Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksGOOSE Send Links

Table 3.17-3 GOOSE sending link

No. Symbol Remark

1 @Bayn.GLink_Send_Trp GOOSE sending link of tripping of bay n

2 @Bayn.GLink_Send_TT GOOSE sending link of transfer tripping of bay n

 GOOSE Receiving Link

Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksGOOSE Recv Links

GOOSE receiving links will changed according to the specific project, so it is not listed here. Users
can see the GOOSE receiving links of each project via the PCS-Explorer software).

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-93


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

3-94 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
4 Supervision

4 Supervision

Table of Contents
4 Supervision ........................................................................................ 4-a
4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Protective Device Supervision ....................................................................... 4-1
4.2.1 Hardware Supervision ......................................................................................................... 4-1

4.2.2 Opto-coupler Supply Supervision ........................................................................................ 4-1

4.2.3 Binary Output Supervision ................................................................................................... 4-1

4.2.4 Setting Supervision .............................................................................................................. 4-1

4.2.5 Hardware Configuration Supervision................................................................................... 4-2

4.3 AC Circuit Supervision ................................................................................... 4-2


4.3.1 Voltage and Current Drift Supervision and Auto-adjustment............................................... 4-2

4.3.2 Sample Supervision ............................................................................................................. 4-2

4.4 Secondary Circuit Supervision ...................................................................... 4-2


4.4.1 Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS) .............................................................................. 4-2

4.4.2 Current Transformer Supervision (CTS).............................................................................. 4-2

4.4.3 Disconnector Position Supervision ...................................................................................... 4-2

4.5 Handle Alarm ................................................................................................... 4-3

List of Tables
Table 4.5-1 Self-supervision report ........................................................................................... 4-3

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 4-a


Date: 2015-03-07
4 Supervision

4-b PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-03-07
4 Supervision

4.1 Overview
PCS-915 is a microprocessor based busbar protection which can provide successive automatic
supervision to the protected object to ensure the power system can quickly restore from any fault
to normal state. When the device is in energizing process before the LED “HEALTHY” is lightened,
the equipment needs to be checked to ensure no errors. Therefore, the automatic supervision
function, which checks the health of the protection system when startup and during normal
operation, plays an important role.

A minor abnormality may block a certain number of protections functions while the other functions
can still work and alarm output contacts [BO_ALM] in PWR module will be given. However, if
severe hardware failure or abnormality are detected, all protection functions will be blocked and
the LED “HEALTHY” will be extinguished and blocking output contacts [BO_FAIL] in PWR module
will be given. The protective device then cannot work normally and maintenance is required to
eliminate the failure.

When an abnormality or a failure is detected by automatic supervision, besides alarm output


contacts or blocking output contacts are energized, it is also followed with an LCD message and
LED indication, at the same time event recording will record the failure alarm which can be viewed
in event recording report and be printed.

4.2 Protective Device Supervision

4.2.1 Hardware Supervision


The automatic supervision function can provide monitoring of all chips on DSP module to ensure
they are healthy. Corresponding alarm signal [Bx.Fail_DSP] will be issued with the device being
blocked if any damages or errors are detected.

4.2.2 Opto-coupler Supply Supervision


The automatic supervision can continuously monitor the positive power supply of opto-coupler, if a
failure or damage is detected, the alarm signal [Bx.Alm_OptoDC] will be issued (x is the slot No. of
corresponding binary input module).

4.2.3 Binary Output Supervision


The state of binary outputs of each BO module is continuously monitored. If any abnormality is
detected, the alarm signals [Bx.Fail_Output] will be issued with device being blocked (x is the slot
No. of corresponding BO module).

4.2.4 Setting Supervision


The relay has 10 setting groups, while only one is active at the same time. The settings of active
setting group are checked, if any is out of setting scopes, a corresponding alarm signal
[Fail_Setting_OvRange] will be issued with the protective device be blocked.

If the EEPROM on DSP module is damaged, it will lead to any summation error of all setting
groups, the alarms [B02.Fail_Settings] (protection DSP module) or [B03.Fail_Settings] (fault

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 4-1


Date: 2015-03-07
4 Supervision

detector DSP module) will be issued with the protective device blocked.

4.2.5 Hardware Configuration Supervision


Module configuration is checked automatically during device initialization, if the plug-in module
configuration is not consistent with the design drawing of a specific project, the alarm signal
[Fail_BoardConfig] is issued with the device being blocked.

4.3 AC Circuit Supervision

4.3.1 Voltage and Current Drift Supervision and Auto-adjustment


The voltage and current drift are influenced by the variation of temperature or other environment
factors. PCS-915 can continually and automatically trace the drift value and adjust it to normal
value.

4.3.2 Sample Supervision


The device can provide monitoring of AC current and voltage samplings for protection DSP
module and fault detector DSP module. If the detected values of bay n are wrong or inconsistent,
an alarm [@Bayn.Fail_Sample] will be issued and the relay will be blocked.

4.4 Secondary Circuit Supervision

4.4.1 Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS)


The VTS logic in the relay is used to detect the VT secondary circuit to ensure that voltage
measured is the actual value of power system. When VT failure is detected, device can
automatically adjust the configuration of protective elements of which the stability would be
affected and might lead to mal-operation. Please refer to Section 3.14 for detail.

4.4.2 Current Transformer Supervision (CTS)


The CTS logic can detect the CT secondary circuit to ensure the measured current is the actual
value of power system. The main purpose of CTS is to ensure the integrity of the CT circuits
maintaining the performance of protective equipment. Please refer to Section 3.13 for details.

4.4.3 Disconnector Position Supervision


Disconnector position is monitored by the automatic supervision function to ensure the correct
operation of protective device. Please refer to Section “Position of disconnector and circuit
breaker” in Chapter 3 for details.

4-2 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-03-07
4 Supervision

4.5 Handle Alarm

PCS-915 can provide self-supervision of hardware circuit and device operation status. When any unnormal condition is detected, the fault information
or report can be displayed and a corresponding alarm will be issued.

NOTICE!

If alarm signal is issued with equipment being blocked, please try to make a fault diagnosis by referring the issued alarm messages BUT
NOT simply reboot or re-power the relay. If user cannot find the failure reason on site, please inform the manufacturer or the agent for
maintenance.

Table 4.5-1 Self-supervision report

Indicator LED Repairmen


No. Alarm Message Meaning Description
HEALTHY MISC ALM CT/VT ALM DS ALM suggestion

The signal is issued


with other specific
alarm signals, and
1 Fail_Device OFF YELLOW OFF OFF The device fails. please refer to the
handling suggestion
other specific alarm
signals.

The signal is issued


with other specific
alarm signals, and
2 Alm_Device GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF The device is abnormal. please refer to the
handling suggestion
other specific alarm
signals.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Protection 4-3


4 Supervision

Indicator LED Repairmen


No. Alarm Message Meaning Description
HEALTHY MISC ALM CT/VT ALM DS ALM suggestion

Users may pay no


attention to the alarm
signal in the project
commissioning stage,
but it is needed to
download the latest
package file (including
correct version
checksum file)
provided by R&D
The error is found during checking the engineer to make the
3 Alm_Version GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF version of software downloaded to the alarm signal disappear.
device. Then users get the
correct software
version. It is not
allowed that the alarm
signal is issued on the
device already has
been put into service.
the devices having
being put into service
so that the alarm signal
disappears.

The memory of MON plug-in module is Please replace MON


4 Alm_Insuf_Memory GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
insufficient. plug-in module.

4-4 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


4 Supervision

Indicator LED Repairmen


No. Alarm Message Meaning Description
HEALTHY MISC ALM CT/VT ALM DS ALM suggestion

Please check the


settings mentioned in
the prompt message
on the LCD, and go to
After configure file is updated, settings the menu “Settings”
5 Fail_SettingItem_Chgd OFF YELLOW OFF OFF of the file and settings saved on the and select “Confirm
device are not matched. Settings” item to
confirm settings. Then,
the device will restore
to normal operation
stage.

Please reset setting


values according to the
range described in the
instruction manual,
then re-power or
reboot the equipment
6 Fail_Setting_OvRange OFF YELLOW OFF OFF Setting value is out of setting scope.
and the alarm
message will
disappear and the
equipment will restore
to normal operation
state.

Management procedure will upload and Put the protective


7 Alm_Settings_MON GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
check the parameters and settings of device out of service at

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Protection 4-5


4 Supervision

Indicator LED Repairmen


No. Alarm Message Meaning Description
HEALTHY MISC ALM CT/VT ALM DS ALM suggestion

each protection plug-in module once. Inform the


regularly, if the parameters and settings factory or agency to
are inconsistent, the alarm signal will be maintain it.
issued.

8 Process_Exit OFF YELLOW OFF OFF System process of MON module exits.

MON module is under abnormal


9 Alm_MON GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
condition.

Mismatch between the configuration of


10 Fail_BoardConfig OFF YELLOW OFF OFF plug-in boards and the designing
drawing of a specific project.

Binary output or input module located in


11 Bx.Fail_Board OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
slot No.x works abnormally.

Sampled value of bay n is different


12 @Bayn.Fail_Sample OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
between two DSP modules.

Sampled value of CT1 of bay n is


13 @Bayn.Fail_Sample_CT1 OFF YELLOW OFF OFF different between two DSP modules (for
double-CT BC/BS).

Sampled value of CT2 of bay n is


14 @Bayn.Fail_Sample_CT2 OFF YELLOW OFF OFF different between two DSP modules (for
double-CT BC/BS).

Sampling value of voltage of BBx is


15 @BBx.Fail_VoltSample OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
different between two DSP modules.

Sampled value of protection DSP


16 Fail_Sample OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
module or fault detector DSP module

4-6 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


4 Supervision

Indicator LED Repairmen


No. Alarm Message Meaning Description
HEALTHY MISC ALM CT/VT ALM DS ALM suggestion

errors.

Driving transistors of binary output


17 Bx.Fail_Output OFF YELLOW OFF OFF module located in slot No.x are
damaged.

The EEPROM in the DSP module


18 B02.Fail_Settings OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
located in slot No.2 is damaged.

The EEPROM in the DSP module


19 B03.Fail_Settings OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
located in slot No.3 is damaged.

DSP chip of the DSP module located in


20 Bx.Fail_DSP OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
slot No.x is under abnormal condition.

No special treatment is
needed, and only wait
21 Alm_CommTest GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF The relay is in test mode.
for the completion of
testing.

Step1: check whether


the selected clock
synchronization mode
matches the clock
synchronization
Time synchronization abnormality
22 Alm_TimeSyn GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF source;
alarm.
Step 2: check whether
the wiring connection
between the
equipment and the
clock synchronization

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Protection 4-7


4 Supervision

Indicator LED Repairmen


No. Alarm Message Meaning Description
HEALTHY MISC ALM CT/VT ALM DS ALM suggestion

source is correct;
Step 3: check whether
the setting for selecting
clock synchronization
(i.e. [Opt_TimeSyn]) is
set correctly. If there is
no clock
synchronization,
please set the setting
[Opt_TimeSyn] as “No
TimeSyn”.

Please refer to other


23 Fail_Pkp OFF YELLOW OFF OFF Device is blocked for over 10s. alarm signal to confirm
the blocking reason.

Alarm signal indicating that the


equipment is in maintenance state (the Check the binary input
24 Alm_Maintenance GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
binary input [BI_Maintenance] is [BI_Maintenance].
energized.

Power supply of the opto-couplers for Check the power circuit


25 Bx.Alm_OptoDC GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF binary input module located in slot No.x of the DC module and
is abnormal. I/O module.

External binary input of blocking BBP


Check the binary input
26 87B.Alm_BI_ExtBlk GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF [87B.BI_ExtBlk] is energized for over
of blocking BBP.
1s.

27 87B.Alm_Pkp_Biased GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF Alarm signal indicating that differential Check CT secondary

4-8 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


4 Supervision

Indicator LED Repairmen


No. Alarm Message Meaning Description
HEALTHY MISC ALM CT/VT ALM DS ALM suggestion

current FD element picks up for over circuit includes CT


10s. polarity.

CT circuit failure, refer to Section


28 AlmH_CTS GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF
3.13.1.1

29 AlmH_CTS_A GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF Phase-A CT circuit failure

30 AlmH_CTS_B GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF Phase-B CT circuit failure

31 AlmH_CTS_C GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF Phase-C CT circuit failure

CT circuit abnormality, refer to Section


32 AlmL_CTS GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
3.13.1.2.

33 AlmL_CTS_A GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF Phase-A CT circuit abnormality

34 AlmL_CTS_B GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF Phase-B CT circuit abnormality

35 AlmL_CTS_C GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF Phase-C CT circuit abnormality Check CT secondary
BCy CT circuit failure, refer to Section circuit.
36 @BCy.AlmH_CTS GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF
3.13.1.1.

37 @BCy.AlmH_CTS_A GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF BCy phase-A CT circuit failure

38 @BCy.AlmH_CTS_B GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF BCy phase-B CT circuit failure

39 @BCy.AlmH_CTS_C GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF BCy phase-C CT circuit failure

BCy CT circuit abnormality, refer to


40 @BCy.AlmL_CTS GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
Section 3.13.1.2.

41 @BCy.AlmL_CTS_A GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF BCy phase-A CT circuit abnormality

42 @BCy.AlmL_CTS_B GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF BCy phase-B CT circuit abnormality

43 @BCy.AlmL_CTS_C GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF BCy phase-C CT circuit abnormality

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Protection 4-9


4 Supervision

Indicator LED Repairmen


No. Alarm Message Meaning Description
HEALTHY MISC ALM CT/VT ALM DS ALM suggestion

BSz CT circuit failure, refer to Section


44 @BSz.AlmH_CTS GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF
3.13.1.1.

45 @BSz.AlmH_CTS_A GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF BSz phase-A CT circuit failure

46 @BSz.AlmH_CTS_B GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF BSz phase-B CT circuit failure

47 @BSz.AlmH_CTS_C GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF BSz phase-C CT circuit failure

BSz CT circuit abnormality, refer to


48 @BSz.AlmL_CTS GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
Section 3.13.1.2.

49 @BSz.AlmL_CTS_A GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF BSz phase-A CT circuit abnormality

50 @BSz.AlmL_CTS_B GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF BSz phase-B CT circuit abnormality

51 @BSz.AlmL_CTS_C GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF BSz phase-C CT circuit abnormality

Differential current high value alarm


52 @BBx.AlmH_Diff GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF signal of BBx, please refer to Section
3.13.1.3.

Differential current low value alarm


53 @BBx.AlmL_Diff GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF signal of BBx, please refer to Section
3.13.1.3.

BBx VT circuit failure, refer to Section


54 @BBx.Alm_VTS GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF
3.14.1. Check VT secondary
VCE (of BBP or BFP) of BBx picks up circuit.
55 @BBx.Alm_VCE GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
for over 3s.

Alarm signal indicating BBP is disabled.


Check whether BBP is
56 87B.Alm_Off GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF If the logic setting [87B.En_Alm_Off] is
disabled.
set as “1”, once BBP is disabled (BBP

4-10 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


4 Supervision

Indicator LED Repairmen


No. Alarm Message Meaning Description
HEALTHY MISC ALM CT/VT ALM DS ALM suggestion

can be disabled by the corresponding


enabling binary input, function link or
enabling logic setting), the alarm signal
indicating BBP is disabled will be
issued.

Check whether binary


Closing binary input [@Bayn.BI_Cls] is
57 @Bayn.Alm_Cls GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF input of closing of bay
energized for over 10s.
n is always energized

Check whether the


Alarm signal indicating that feeder DZP measured current
58 @Bayn.50DZ.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
FD of bay n picks up for over 10s. equals to the actual
current.

Alarm signal indicating that FD element Check whether the


59 @BCy.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF for SOTF protection of BCy picks up for setting [50SOTF.I_Set]
over 10s. is reasonable and
check whether the
Alarm signal indicating that FD element
measured current
60 @BSz.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF for SOTF protection of BSz picks up for
equals to the actual
over 10s.
current.

Alarm signal indicating that phase Check whether the


61 @Bayn.50/51P.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF overcurrent FD element of bay n picks corresponding current
up for over 10s. setting is reasonable
Alarm signal indicating that ground and check whether the
62 @Bayn.50/51G.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF overcurrent FD element of bay n picks measured current
up for over 10s. equals to the actual

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Protection 4-11


4 Supervision

Indicator LED Repairmen


No. Alarm Message Meaning Description
HEALTHY MISC ALM CT/VT ALM DS ALM suggestion

current.

Alarm signal indicating that PD


protection FD element of bay n picks up Check the
for over 10s (i.e. pole disagreement corresponding pole
63 @Bayn.62PD.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
binary input of bay n disagreement binary
[@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD] is energized for input.
over 10s).

Binary input of initiating BCy BFP is


64 @BCy.Alm_BI_BFI GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
energized for over 10s. Check the contact of
The common initiating contact of BFP of initiating BC BFP
65 @BCy.Alm_BI_ChkBFI GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF BCy is continually energized for over externally.
10s.

Binary input of initiating BSz BFP is


66 @BSz.Alm_BI_BFI GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
energized for over 10s. Check the contact of
The common initiating contact of BFP of initiating BS BFP
67 @BSz.Alm_BI_ChkBFI GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF BSz is continually energized for over externally.
10s.

Check the contact of


initiating BC BFP
externally and check
Alarm signal indicating that FD element
68 @BCy.50BF.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF whether the protective
for BCy BFP picks up for over 10s.
element (which can
initiate BC BFP) drops
off.

4-12 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


4 Supervision

Indicator LED Repairmen


No. Alarm Message Meaning Description
HEALTHY MISC ALM CT/VT ALM DS ALM suggestion

Check the contact of


initiating BS BFP
externally and check
Alarm signal indicating that FD element
69 @BSz.50BF.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF whether the protective
for BSz BFP picks up for over 10s.
element (which can
initiate BS BFP) drops
off.

Binary input of initiating contact of BFP


70 @Bayn.Alm_BI_BFI GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
of bay n is energized for over 10s. Check the contact of
The common initiating contact of BFP of initiating feeder BFP
71 @Bayn.Alm_BI_ChkBFI GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF bay n is continually energized for over externally.
10s.

Check the contact of


Binary input of releasing voltage releasing voltage
72 50BF.Alm_BI_RlsVCE GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF controlled element of breaker failure controlled element of
protection is energized for over 10s. breaker failure
protection.

Check the contact of


initiating feeder BFP
Alarm signal indicating that FD element externally and check
73 50BF.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
for BFP of bay n picks up for over 10s whether the protective
element (which can
initiate BFP) drops off.

Alarm signal indicating feeder BFP is Check whether BFP is


74 50BF.Alm_Off GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
disabled. If the logic setting disabled.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Protection 4-13


4 Supervision

Indicator LED Repairmen


No. Alarm Message Meaning Description
HEALTHY MISC ALM CT/VT ALM DS ALM suggestion

[50BF.En_Alm_Off] is set as “1”, once


feeder BFP is disabled (feeder BFP can
be disabled by the corresponding
enabling binary input, function link or
enabling logic setting), the alarm signal
indicating feeder BFP is disabled will be
issued.

Disconnector position of bay n is


75 @Bayn.Alm_DS GREEN OFF OFF YELLOW
abnormal.
Check auxiliary contact
BBn disconnector and BBm
of disconnector.
76 Alm_IntLink GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF disconnector of the same feeder are
closed at the same time.

Normally closed auxiliary contact of bay


77 @Bayn.Alm_52b GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF n breaker is energized but current can
still be detected in bay n. Check auxiliary contact
Normally closed and normally open of circuit breaker of bay
auxiliary contact of bay n breaker are n.
78 @Bayn.Alm_52a&52b GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
energized or de-energized
simultaneously for over 5s.

Normally closed and normally open


Check auxiliary contact
auxiliary contact of BBx disconnector of
79 @Bayn.Alm_89a&89b_@BBx GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF of disconnector of bay
bay n is energized or de-energized
n
simultaneously for over 5s.

If feeder breaker of bay n is open and Check the transfer bus


80 @Bayn.Alm_Byp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
transfer bus disconnector of bay n is disconnector.

4-14 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


4 Supervision

Indicator LED Repairmen


No. Alarm Message Meaning Description
HEALTHY MISC ALM CT/VT ALM DS ALM suggestion

closed, feeder breakers of bay n is


under substituted status, then if the
transfer bus disconnector is open,
substituted status alarm signal
[@Bayn.Alm_Byp] will be issued.

Following alarm signals are configured only for digital substation


“@SVLink_Bm_n” is used to refer to the label setting of the SV communication link n of the GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.m. “@GLink_Bm_n” is used to refer
to the label setting of the GOOSE communication link n of the GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.m.

Corresponding bay is in service but the


81 @SVLink_Bm_n.Alm_Maintenance_SV GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF corresponding MU is in maintenance
state

Network A of MU of corresponding bay


82 @SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_ADisc GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
is disconnected

Network B of MU of corresponding bay


83 @SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_BDisc GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
is disconnected
Check the
Sampled values of corresponding bay n corresponding MU,
84 @SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_Data GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF error (time over, decoding error or check the optical fiber
interpolation time scale error) connected to it.
The MU of corresponding bay lose
85 @SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_SynLoss GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
synchronism signal

the sampled data from MU of


86 @SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_InvalidSample GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
corresponding bay is invalid

87 @SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_Jitter_Ch GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF Sampling frame jittering alarm signal

88 @SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_TimeLag_Ch GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF Channel delay of corresponding bay

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Protection 4-15


4 Supervision

Indicator LED Repairmen


No. Alarm Message Meaning Description
HEALTHY MISC ALM CT/VT ALM DS ALM suggestion

changes or out of range

Internal SV configuration file of Bx (Bx Inform commissioning


89 Bx.SVAlm_CfgFile GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF means GOOSE and SV module that personnel to check the
located in slot No.x) is wrong. SV configuration file.

Network A of corresponding GOOSE


90 @GLink_Bm_n.GAlm_ADisc GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF link is disconnected, the protection will Check the intelligent
not be blocked terminal unit, check the
Network B of corresponding GOOSE optical fiber connected
91 @GLink_Bm_n.GAlm_BDisc GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF link is disconnected, the protection will to them.
not be blocked

The alarm signal will be issued if any of


the following conditions is satisfied.
Configuration version of two ends (the
GOOSE receiving end and the GOOSE
sending end) are inconsistent.
The number of data of received
Inform commissioning
92 @GLink_Bm_n.GAlm_Cfg GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF message is not equal to that configured
personnel to check the
in the receiving control block.
GOOSE configuration
Failed to analyze the data segment of
file.
received message. For example, the
data type of received message is
mismatch with that configured in the
receiving control block.

Internal GOOSE configuration file of Bx


93 Bx.GAlm_CfgFile_PL GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
(Bx means GOOSE and SV module that

4-16 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


4 Supervision

Indicator LED Repairmen


No. Alarm Message Meaning Description
HEALTHY MISC ALM CT/VT ALM DS ALM suggestion

located in slot No.x) is wrong.

Network storm occurs on GOOSE


network A of Bx (Bx means GOOSE
94 Bx.GAlm_AStorm_PL GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
and SV module that located in slot
Check the
No.x).
corresponding GOOSE
Network storm occurs on GOOSE
network.
network B of Bx (Bx means GOOSE
95 Bx.GAlm_BStorm_PL GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
and SV module that located in slot
No.x).

The overall SV alarm signal of Bx (Bx


96 Bx.SVAlm_Overall_PL GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF means GOOSE and SV module that
located in slot No.x) Refer to other GOOSE
The overall GOOSE alarm signal of Bx or SV alarm signal
97 Bx.GAlm_Overall_PL GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF (Bx means GOOSE and SV module that
located in slot No.x)

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Protection 4-17


4 Supervision

4-18 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


5 Measurement and Recording

5 Measurement and Recording

Table of Contents
5 Measurement and Recording........................................................... 5-a
5.1 General Description ........................................................................................ 5-1
5.2 Measurement ................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.1 Analogue Input Quantities of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 ....................................... 5-1

5.2.2 Phase Angle of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 ............................................................. 5-2

5.2.3 Debug Values of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 .......................................................... 5-2

5.3 Event & fault Records ..................................................................................... 5-3


5.3.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 5-3

5.3.2 Event Recording .................................................................................................................. 5-3

5.3.3 Disturbance and Fault Recording ........................................................................................ 5-3

5.3.4 Present Recording ............................................................................................................... 5-5

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 5-a


Date: 2013-12-13
5 Measurement and Recording

5-b PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2013-12-13
5 Measurement and Recording

5.1 General Description

PCS-915 busbar protection can provide auxiliary functions such as on-line data metering, binary
input status, event and disturbance recording, to meet the demands of the modern power grid
requirements.

5.2 Measurement

PCS-915 can provide continuous measurements of analogue input quantities. The measurement
data shown below is displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or by the software interface on
the local or remote PC. The analog quantities will be displayed as RMS values of the secondary
side of CT.

Equipment samples 24 points per cycle. The RMS value is calculated in each interval and the LCD
display will be updated in every 0.5 second.

Users can view the measured data on LCD by navigating the menu “Measurements”, or by
PCS-Explorer software or substation automatic system (SAS) software. By navigating the path
“Settings”->“Device Setup” ->“Comm Settings”, primary or secondary sampled values can be
selected to display by configuring the setting [Opt_Display_Status].

PCS-915 has two DSP modules that are protection DSP module (DSP module 1) and fault
detector DSP module (DSP module 2), the sampling values of both modules can be displayed on
LCD through different access menu.

NOTICE!

If the communication setting [Opt_Display_Status] is not configured, the sampled


values are displayed as secondary value by default. If the setting is set as “0”, the
sampled values are displayed as primary value; if this setting is set as “1”, the sampled
values are displayed as secondary value.

NOTICE!

The bay label of displayed sampled values will change according to the label settings of
each bay and busbar. In section 5.2, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding busbar and “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding bay.

5.2.1 Analogue Input Quantities of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2

Item Rotation Description

Id_CZ A,B,C Three-phase check zone differential currents

@BBx.Id A,B,C Three-phase discriminating zone differential currents of BBx

@BBx.UP A,B,C Three phase voltages of BBx

@Bayn.IP A,B,C Three phase currents of bay n

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 5-1


Date: 2013-12-13
5 Measurement and Recording

@Bayn.IP_CT1 A,B,C Three phase currents of CT1 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)

@Bayn.IP_CT2 A,B,C Three phase currents of CT2 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)

Access path:

MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements1Measured Values

MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements2Measured Values

5.2.2 Phase Angle of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2


When voltage is sampled by the device and phase A voltage of BB1 is larger than a certain value,
the phase A voltage of BB1 will be taken as a reference; if the phase A voltage of BB1 is smaller
than the certain value and the phase A voltage of BB2 is larger than the certain value, the phase A
voltage of BB2 will be taken as a reference; and so forth.

When voltage is not sampled by the device, if the currents of some feeder are larger than a
certain value, the phase A current of the feeder (takes the feeder whose number is minimal) will
be taken as a reference.

Item Rotation Description

If the phase A voltage of BBx is taken as a reference, the displayed


value of“AngRef” is “x”, If phase A voltage of all busbars are all
smaller than a certain value, the displayed value of “AngRef” is “0”.
AngRef If the phase A current of feeder m is taken as a reference, the
displayed value of “AngRef” is “m” (m=01, 02, 03, ……), if all the
currents are smaller than a certain value, the displayed value of
“AngRef” is “0”.

@Bayn.Ang(IP) A,B,C The phase angle of current of bay n

@Bayn.Ang(IP_CT1) A,B,C The phase angle of current of CT1 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)

@Bayn.Ang(IP_CT2) A,B,C The phase angle of current of CT2 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)

@BBx.Ang(UP) A,B,C The phase angle of voltage of BBx

Access path:

MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements1Phase Angle

MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements2Phase Angle

5.2.3 Debug Values of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2


The debug values are usually provided for commission person for reference.

Item Rotation Description

@Bayn.I2 Negative sequence current of bay n

@Bayn.I2_CT1 Negative sequence current of CT1 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)

@Bayn.I2_CT2 Negative sequence current of CT2 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)

@Bayn.3I0 Residual current of bay n

5-2 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2013-12-13
5 Measurement and Recording

@Bayn.3I0_CT1 Residual current of CT1 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)

@Bayn.3I0_CT2 Residual current of CT2 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)

@BBx.U2x Negative sequence voltage of BBx

@BBx.3U0 Residual voltage of BBx

Access path:

MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements1Cal Values

MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements2Cal Values

5.3 Event & fault Records

5.3.1 Introduction
PCS-915 is capable of providing fault and disturbance recording, event recording and present
recording for the protected objects. All the recorded information except for waveform can be
viewed on local LCD or by printing. Waveform must be printed or be extracted using PCS-Explorer
software and a waveform software.

5.3.2 Event Recording


The device can store up to 1024 abnormality alarm reports and 1024 binary input status changing
reports respectively. All the records are stored in non-volatile memory, and when the available
space is fully occupied, the oldest report is automatically overwritten by the latest one.

 Abnormality alarm reports

Abnormality detected during relay self-supervision, secondary circuit abnormality or protection


alarm element will be logged as individual events.

 Binary input status changing reports

When binary input status changes, the changed information will be displayed on LCD and logged
as binary input change report at the same time.

5.3.3 Disturbance and Fault Recording


5.3.3.1 Application

Users can use the disturbance recorder to achieve a better understanding of the behavior of the
power network and related primary and secondary device during and after a disturbance.
Analyzing on the recorded data can help to resolve practical problem.

5.3.3.2 Design

Disturbance recorder is consisted of tripping report and fault waveform and it is triggered by fault
detector. The device can store 32 pieces of trip reports and waveforms in non-volatile memory.

When protection operates, the operating information will be displayed on LCD and logged as trip
record at same time, which can be viewed in trip report. Here fault recording includes two kinds of

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 5-3


Date: 2013-12-13
5 Measurement and Recording

cases:

1) Only the fault detector element operates.

2) The fault detector element operates along with the operation of protective elements.

1. Trip record capacity and information

The device can store 32 pieces of trip reports in non-volatile memory. If a new fault occurs when
the spaces are fully occupied, the oldest will be overwritten by the latest one.

A complete trip record includes the following items:

1) Sequence number

Each operation will be recorded with a sequence number in the report and displayed on LCD
screen.

2) Date and time of fault occurrence

The time resolution is 1 ms using the relay internal clock. Initiating date and time is when a fault
detector picks up. The relative time is the time when protection element operates to send tripping
signal after fault detector picks up.

3) Faulty phase

The faulty phase detected by the operating element is shown in the record report.

4) Operating time

It is the relative time when protection element operates to send tripping signal relative to fault
detector element operating, the operating time of output relay is not included.

5) Protection element

The protection element that issues the tripping command will be shown. If no protection element
operates to trip but only fault detector element operates, the fault report will record the title of fault
detector element.

6) Tripping element

The tripped elements (feeder or bus coupler) are also shown.

2. Fault waveform record capacity and information

MON module of the relay can store 32 pieces of fault waveform in non-volatile memory. Phase
current of each bay, check zone differential current, discriminative zone differential current and
buabar voltages (if voltage is used) will be recorded in waveform. If a new fault occurs when 32
fault waveform recorders have been stored, the oldest will be overwritten by the latest one.

Each fault record consists of all analog and digital quantities related to protection, such as original
current and voltage, differential current, alarm elements, and binary inputs and etc.

Each time recording includes 2-cycle pre-fault waveform, and up to 250 cycles can be recorded.

5-4 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2013-12-13
5 Measurement and Recording

5.3.4 Present Recording


Present recording is used to record the waveform of present operating device which can be
triggered manually on LCD of device or remotely through PCS-Explorer software. Recording
content of present recording is same to that of disturbance recording. Each time recording
includes 2-cycle waveform before triggering, and up to 250 cycles can be recorded.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 5-5


Date: 2013-12-13
5 Measurement and Recording

5-6 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2013-12-13
6 Hardware

6 Hardware

Table of Contents
6 Hardware ............................................................................................ 6-a
6.1 General Description ........................................................................................ 6-1
6.2 Typical Wiring .................................................................................................. 6-5
6.2.1 Typical Wiring of 8U PCS-915 (For reference only) ............................................................ 6-5

6.2.2 Typical Wiring of 8U+4U PCS-915 (For reference only) ..................................................... 6-7

6.2.3 CT Requirement .................................................................................................................. 6-9

6.3 Plug-in Module Terminal Definition ............................................................. 6-10


6.3.1 PWR Module (Slot P1: NR1301) ....................................................................................... 6-10

6.3.2 MON Module (Slot No.01: NR1101 or NR1102) ................................................................ 6-12

6.3.3 DSP Module 1 (Protection Calculation, NR1115C or NR1151D) ...................................... 6-14

6.3.4 DSP Module 2 (Fault Detector Calculation, NR1115C or NR1151D) ................................ 6-14

6.3.5 CAN Module (NR1201B) ................................................................................................... 6-15

6.3.6 NET-DSP Module (GOOSE and SV, Optional) ................................................................. 6-16

6.3.7 Binary Input (BI) Module .................................................................................................... 6-16

6.3.8 Binary Output (BO) Module ............................................................................................... 6-21

6.3.9 Analog Input (AI) Module (NR1401) .................................................................................. 6-23

List of Figures
Figure 6.1-1 Front view of 8U PCS-915 ..................................................................................... 6-2

Figure 6.1-2 Typical rear view of 8U PCS-915 .......................................................................... 6-3

Figure 6.1-3 Typical rear view of 8U+4U PCS-915.................................................................... 6-4

Figure 6.2-1 Typical wiring of 8U PCS-915................................................................................ 6-6

Figure 6.2-2 Typical wiring of 8U+4U PCS-915 ......................................................................... 6-8

Figure 6.3-1 View of DC power supply module NR1301 ........................................................ 6-11

Figure 6.3-2 Output contacts of PWR plug-in module........................................................... 6-11

Figure 6.3-3 Rear view of MON modules ................................................................................ 6-13

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 6-a


Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

Figure 6.3-4 Wiring of communication interface.................................................................... 6-14

Figure 6.2-5 Rear view of DSP modules.................................................................................. 6-15

Figure 6.2-6 Rear view of CAN bus extended modules......................................................... 6-15

Figure 6.3-7 View of NET-DSP module .................................................................................... 6-16

Figure 6.3-8 Pin definition of binary input module NR1501A ............................................... 6-17

Figure 6.3-9 Pin definition of binary input module NR1506AS ............................................. 6-20

Figure 6.3-10 Pin definition of BO module NR1521A (Pin definition of NR1521B and 1521C
are similar to it) .................................................................................................................. 6-21

Figure 6.3-11 Pin definition of BO module NR1523A ............................................................. 6-22

Figure 6.3-12 Pin definition of BO module NR1549A ............................................................ 6-23

Figure 6.3-13 Typical pin definition of the first 12-channel current AI module .................. 6-24

Figure 6.3-14 Typical pin definition of 3-channel current and 9-channel voltage AI module
.............................................................................................................................................. 6-24

Figure 6.3-15 Schematic diagram of CT circuit automatically closed ..................................... 6-25

Figure 6.3-16 Current connection of AI module ..................................................................... 6-25

Figure 6.3-17 Voltage connection of AI module ..................................................................... 6-26

List of Tables
Table 6.1-1 PCS-915 module configuration .............................................................................. 6-1

Table 6.3-1 Pin definition of binary input module NR1501A ................................................. 6-17

Table 6.3-2 Pin definition of binary input module NR1503A ................................................. 6-18

Table 6.3-3 Pin definition of binary input module NR1506AS............................................... 6-20

6-b PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

6.1 General Description

PCS-915 adopts 32-bit micro-processor CPU for logic calculations and function management. The
protection calculations are processed by high-speed digital signal processor DSP. System
parameters are sampled at 24 points in every cycle. The sampling data are parallel processed in
each sampling interval to ensure ultrahigh reliability and safety of protection device.

PCS-915 captures current and voltage signal and converts to small signals. These small signals
will be filtered and converted to digital signals by AD converter before being sent to protection
calculation module (DSP module 1) and fault detector calculation module (DSP module 2). When
MON module completes all the protection calculations, the results will be stored in 32-bit CPU on
MON module. DSP module 1 carries out protection logic calculation, tripping output, and MON
module can provide sequence of event (SOE) record, waveform recording, printing,
communication between protection and substation automatic system (SAS) and communication
between HMI and CPU. The operating procedures of fault detector calculation module are similar
to that of protection calculation module, and the only difference is, when fault detector calculation
module decides a fault detector picks up, only the positive power supply of output relay is switched
on.

Table 6.1-1 PCS-915 module configuration

No. ID Module Description

1 NR1101/NR1102 Management module (MON module)

2 NR1115/NR1151 Protection calculation module (DSP module 1)

3 NR1115/NR1151 Fault detector calculation module (DSP module 2)

4 NR1401 Analog input module ( AI module)

5 NR1501/NR1503/NR1506 Binary input module (BI module)

6 NR1521/NR1523/NR1549 Binary output module (BO module)

7 NR1301 Power supply module (PWR module)

8 NR1136 GOOSE and SV from merging unit by IEC61850-9-2 (NET-DSP module)

9 NR1201 CAN bus extended module (CAN module)

10 Human machine interface module (HMI module)

 MON module provides management function, completed event record, setting management,
and etc.

 DSP modules can provide filtering, sampling, protection calculation and fault detector
calculation.

 AI module converts AC current and voltage to low voltage signals by current transformers
and voltage transformers respectively.

 BI module provides binary inputs that are inputted via 110V/125V/220V/250V opto-coupler
(configurable).

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 6-1


Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

 BO module provides all kinds of binary output contacts, including signal output contacts and
tripping output contacts.

 PWR module converts DC 250/220/125/110V to different DC voltage levels on request for


various modules of the device

 NET-DSP module (optional) receives and sends GOOSE messages, sampled values (SV)
from merging unit by IEC61850-9-2 protocol.

 CAN module (optional) realizes the CAN bus connection between 8U chassis and 4U
extended chassis for 8U+4U PCS-915 device.

 HMI module is comprised of LCD, keypad, LED indicator and multiplex RJ45 ports for user as
human-machine interface

Following figure shows typical front view of 8U size PCS-915.

1
HEALTHY
11 PCS-915
2 12
MISC ALM BUSBAR RELAY
3 13

4 14
P
GR

5 15

6 16 ENT
C
ES

7 17

8 18

9 19

10 20

Figure 6.1-1 Front view of 8U PCS-915

Following figures show typical rear view of 8U size PCS-915.

6-2 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

Slot No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1

NR1102M NR1115 NR1115 NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1521A NR1301
1 1
5V BJ

2 2
BJJ BSJ

ON

OFF

1 BO_COM1

2 BO_FAIL

3 BO_ALM

4 BO_COM2

5 BO_FAIL
6 BO_ALM

7 OPTO+

8 OPTO-

9
10 PWR+

11 PWR-
12 GND

NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1523A

DANGER DANGER DANGER DANGER DANGER

Slot No. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

Figure 6.1-2 Typical rear view of 8U PCS-915

For a specific project, if more than 16 bays are supported, additional 4U extended chassis is
equipped, the typical rear view of 8U+4U size PCS-915 is shown as follows.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 6-3


Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

Slot No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1

NR1102M NR1115 NR1115 NR1201B NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1301
1 1
TERM_H 5V BJ

TERM_T
2 2
PPS
BJJ BSJ
RESV

ON

OFF

1 BO_COM1

2 BO_FAIL

3 BO_ALM

4 BO_COM2

5 BO_FAIL
6 BO_ALM

7 OPTO+

8 OPTO-

CAN/PPS 9
10 PWR+

11 PWR-
12 GND

NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1521A NR1521A NR1523A

DANGER DANGER DANGER DANGER DANGER DANGER DANGER

Slot No. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

Slot No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P2

NR1505
NR1506AS NR1505
NR1506AS NR1505
NR1506AS NR1505
NR1506AS NR1505
NR1506AS NR1505
NR1506AS NR1505
NR1506AS NR1505
NR1506AS NR1505
NR1506AS NR1505
NR1506AS NR1505
NR1506AS NR1505
NR1506AS NR1505
NR1506AS NR1505
NR1506AS NR1201B NR1301
NR1301A
TERM_H 5V BJ

TERM_T

PPS
BJJ BSJ
RESV

ON

OFF

1 BO_COM1

2 BO_FAIL

3 BO_ALM

4 BO_COM2

5 BO_FAIL

6 BO_ALM

7 OPTO+

8 OPTO-

CAN/PPS 9
10 PWR+

11 PWR-

12 GND

Figure 6.1-3 Typical rear view of 8U+4U PCS-915

6-4 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

6.2 Typical Wiring


6.2.1 Typical Wiring of 8U PCS-915 (For reference only)

NR1102M NR1115C NR1115C NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1521A NR1301
MON module

DSP module

DSP module

PWR module
BO module
BI module

BI module

BI module

BI module

BI module

BI module

BI module

BI module

BI module

BI module

BI module
Slot No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1

NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1523A

BO module

BO module

BO module

BO module

BO module
BO module

BO module
AI module

AI module

AI module

AI module

AI module

Slot No.
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

The following typical wiring is given based on above hardware configuration

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 6-5


Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

Power supply supervision 0401


1601
1602 Ia_Bay01
BI_01 + 0402
1603
1604 Ib_Bay01


1605
Ic_Bay01 BI_20 + 0421
1606

Current input

*BI plug-in modules


……
- 0422

……
2219
Power supply supervision
2220 Ia_Bay16 1401

2221
BI_01 + 1402
2222 Ib_Bay16

2223


2224 Ic_Bay16

BI_20 + 1421

- 1422
2407
2408 Ua_BB1
1501

Controlled by fault detector


2409 BO_01 1502
2410 Ub_BB1

element
1503
2411 BO_02 1504
Voltage input

2412 Uc_BB1


1521
……

BO_11 1522

2419
Ua_BB3 2601
2420 Controlled by fault detector
BO_01 2602
2421
Ub_BB3
element

2422 2603
BO_02 2604
2423


Uc_BB3 2621
2424
BO_11 … 2622

PWR+ P110
External DC power Power 3101
Controlled by fault detector

supply P111 Supply BO_01


PWR- 3102
P107
element

OPTO+ 3103
Power supply for
BO_02 3104
opto-coupler (24V) P108
OPTO-

3121
BO_11 3122
P102 BO_FAIL
P103 BO_ALM
3201
Controlled by fault
detector element

P101 COM BO_01 3202


P105 BO_FAIL

3211
P106 BO_ALM BO_06 3212
P104 COM
cable with single point earthing
To the screen of other coaxial

Not controlled by fault

3213
detector element

BO_07
SYN+ 0101 3214
Clock SYN

SYN- 0102 3215


BO_08
SGND 0103 3216
0104
3217
Controlled by fault detector
element, magnetic latched

BO_09
PRINTER

RTS 0105 3218


PRINT

TXD 0106 3219


SGND 0107 BO_10 3220
3221
BO_11 3222

Multiplex
0012
RJ45 (Front)
0225
Grounding
Bus

Figure 6.2-1 Typical wiring of 8U PCS-915

6-6 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

6.2.2 Typical Wiring of 8U+4U PCS-915 (For reference only)

NR1102M
MON module NR1115C NR1115C NR1201B NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1301

CAN module
DSP module

DSP module

PWR module
BO module

BO module

BO module

BO module

BO module

BO module

BO module
BI module

BI module

BI module

BI module
Slot No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1

NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1521A NR1521A NR1523A

BO module

BO module

BO module
AI module

AI module

AI module

AI module

AI module

AI module

AI module
Slot No.
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1201B NR1301

CAN module

PWR module
BI module

BI module

BI module

BI module

BI module

BI module

BI module

BI module

BI module

BI module

BI module

BI module

BI module

Slot No. BI module


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P2

The following typical wiring is given based on above hardware configuration

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 6-7


Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

1601 0901

Controlled by fault
detector element
Ia_Bay01 BO_01 0902
1602 8U chassis


1603 0921

1604 Ib_Bay01 BO_11 0922

1605


1606 Ic_Bay01
1501

Controlled by fault
detector element
……
BO_01 1502

Current input
2801


1521
2802 Ia_Bay25
BO_11 1522
2803
2804 Ib_Bay25

Controlled by fault
detector element
3001
2805 BO_01 3002
2806 Ic_Bay25


3021

2807 BO_11 3022

2808 Ua_BB1
3101

Controlled by fault
detector element
2809
BO_01 3102
2810 Ub_BB1


3121
2811
BO_11
Voltage input
Uc_BB1 3122
2812
……

2819 3201

Controlled by fault
detector element
Ua_BB3 BO_01
2820 3202


2821 3211
Ub_BB3 BO_06
2822 3212
2823

Not controlled by fault


Uc_BB3 3213

detector element
2824 BO_07
3214
3215
0501 Power supply supervision
BO_08
3216

0502 + BI_01
3217
Controlled by fault detector
element, magnetic latched

BO_09 3218

3219
0521 + BI_20 BO_10 3220
*BI plug-in modules

0522 3221
- BO_11
……

3222
Power supply supervision
0801 BO_FAIL P102

BO_ALM P103
0802 + BI_01 P101
COM
BO_FAIL P105

BO_ALM P106
0821 + BI_20 P104
COM
P110 PWR+
0822 - Power External DC power
cable with single point earthing
To the screen of other coaxial

Supply P111 supply


PWR-
SYN+ 0101 P107
Clock SYN

OPTO+
SYN- 0102 Power supply for
P108 opto-coupler (24V)
SGND 0103 OPTO-
CAN/PPS

0104 Multiplex
RJ45 (Front)
PRINTER

RTS 0105
PRINT

0012
TXD 0106
CAN bus
0225
SGND 0107 extended wire
Grounding Bus

0401 Power supply supervision


CAN/PPS

4U extended chassis
0402 + BI_01

BO_FAIL P202

0421 + BI_20 BO_ALM P203


*BI plug-in modules

COM P201
0422 - P205
……

BO_FAIL
BO_ALM P206
Power supply supervision
1401 P204
COM
P210 PWR+
1402 + BI_01
Power External DC power
Supply P211 supply
PWR-

P207 OPTO+
BI_20 Power supply for
1421 +
P208 opto-coupler (24V)
OPTO-
1422 - 0012
0225
Grounding Bus

Figure 6.2-2 Typical wiring of 8U+4U PCS-915

6-8 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

6.2.3 CT Requirement
-Rated primary current Ipn:

According to the rated current or maximum load current of primary apparatus.

-Rated continuous thermal current Icth:

According to the maximum load current.

-Rated short-time thermal current Ith and rated dynamic current Idyn:

According to the maximum fault current.

-Rated secondary current Isn

-Accuracy limit factor Kalf:

Ipn Rated primary current (amps)


Icth Rated continuous thermal current (amps)
Ith Rated short-time thermal current (amps)
Idyn Rated dynamic current (amps)
Isn Rated secondary current (amps)
Kalf Accuracy limit factor (Kalf=Ipal/Ipn)
IPal Rated accuracy limit primary current (amps)

Performance verification

Esl > Esl′

Rated secondary limiting e.m.f (volts)


Esl
Esl = kalf×Isn×(Rct+Rbn)
Kalf Accuracy limit factor (Kalf=Ipal/Ipn)
IPal Rated accuracy limit primary current (amps)
Ipn Rated primary current (amps)
Isn Rated secondary current (amps)
Rct Current transformer secondary winding resistance (ohms)
Rated resistance burden (ohms)
Rbn 2
Rbn=Sbn/Isn
Sbn Rated burden (VAs)

Required secondary limiting e.m.f (volts)


Esl′
Esl′ = k×Ipcf ×Isn×(Rct+Rb)/Ipn
k stability factor = 2
Protective checking factor current (amps)
Ipcf
Same as the maximum prospective fault current
Isn Rated secondary current (amps)
Rct Current transformer secondary winding resistance (ohms)
Real resistance burden (ohms)
Rb
Rb=Rr+2×RL+Rc

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 6-9


Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

Rc Contact resistance, 0.05-0.1 ohm (ohms)


RL Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms)
Rr Impedance of relay phase current input (ohms)
Ipn Rated primary current (amps)

For example:

1. Kalf=30, Isn=5A, Rct=1ohm, Sbn=60VA

Esl = kalf×Isn×(Rct+Rbn) = kalf×Isn×(Rct+ Sbn/ Isn2)

= 30×5×(1+60/25)=510V

2. Ipcf=40000A, RL=0.5ohm, Rr=0.1ohm, Rc=0.1ohm, Ipn=2000A

Esl′ = 2×Ipcf×Isn×(Rct+Rb)/Ipn

= 2×Ipcf ×Isn×(Rct+(Rr+2×RL+Rc))/Ipn

= 2×40000×5×(1+(0.1+2×0.5+0.1))/2000=440V

Thus, Esl > Esl′

6.3 Plug-in Module Terminal Definition

PCS-915 consists of power supply module, MON module, DSP module, analog input module,
binary input module and binary output module. The definition and application of each module and
its terminals are introduced as follows.

6.3.1 PWR Module (Slot P1: NR1301)


The power supply module is a DC/DC or AC/DC converter with electrical insulation between input
and output. The power supply module has an input voltage range as described in the chapter of
“Technical Data”. The standard output voltages are +5V and +24V DC. The tolerances of the
output voltages are continuously monitored.

The +5V DC output provides power supply for all the electrical elements that need +5V DC power
supply in this device. The +24V DC output provides power supply for the static relays of this
device.

The use of an external miniature circuit breaker is recommended. The miniature circuit breaker
must be in the on position when the device is in operation and in the off position when the device is
in cold reserve.

A 12-pin connector is fixed on the front of the power supply module. The pin definition of the
connector is described as below.

6-10 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

NR1301

5V OK ALM

BO_ALM BO_FAIL

ON

OFF

1 BO_COM1
2 BO_FAIL
3 BO_ALM
4 BO_COM2
5 BO_FAIL
6 BO_ALM
7 OPTO+
8 OPTO-
9
10 PWR+
11 PWR-
12 GND

Figure 6.3-1 View of DC power supply module NR1301

For some occasions, the power switch in the dotted box of above figure is not existed.

01
BO_FAIL
02
BO_ALM
03

04
BO_FAIL
05
BO_ALM
06

Figure 6.3-2 Output contacts of PWR plug-in module

Pin No. Symbol Description

01 BO_COM1 Common terminal 1.

02 BO_Fail_1 Equipment failure output 1 (01-02, NC)

03 BO_Alm_Abnor_1 Equipment abnormality alarm output 1 (01-03, NO)

04 BO_COM2 Common terminal 2.

05 BO_Fail_2 Equipment failure output 2 (04-05, NC)

06 BO_Alm_Abnor_2 Equipment abnormality alarm output 2 (04-06, NO)

07 OPTO+ Pins 07 and 08 are 24V power supply output for the binary input
module. Pin 07 is 24V+ and Pin 08 is 24V-, the rated output
08 OPTO-
current of this power supply is 200mA.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 6-11


Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

Pin No. Symbol Description

09 Not used

10 PWR+ Positive input of power supply for the device

11 PWR- Negative input of power supply for the device

12 GND Grounded connection of this device

NOTICE!

The rated voltage of DC power supply module is self-adaptive to 88~300Vdc. Power


supply in other DC voltage levels or AC voltage power supply need to be specially
ordered. It is important to CHECK if the rated voltage of power supply module is the
same as the voltage of external control power supply before the device is put into
service.

NOTICE!

The DC power supply module provides pin 0112 and earth connector for grounding of
device. The pin 0112 shall be connected to earth connector and the earth copper bar of
panel via dedicated grounding wire.

NOTICE!

Effective grounding is the most important measure for device to prevent EMI, so
effective grounding MUST be ensured before the device is put into operation.

6.3.2 MON Module (Slot No.01: NR1101 or NR1102)


The MON module consists of high-performance built-in processor, FLASH, SRAM, SDRAM,
Ethernet controller and other peripherals. Its can provide management of the complete device,
human machine interface, communication and waveform recording etc.

The MON module uses the internal bus to receive the data from other modules of the device. It
communicates with the LCD module by RS-485 bus. This module is provided with 100BaseT
Ethernet interfaces, RS-485 communication interfaces, PPS/IRIG-B differential time
synchronization interface and RS-232 printing interface.

The terminals of MON modules and its wiring method are shown in the following figure.

6-12 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

NR1102M NR1102N NR1101F

ETHERNET
TX
ETHERNET
RX

TX

RX

ETHERNET

Figure 6.3-3 Rear view of MON modules

Module ID Memory Interface Pin No. Usage Physical Layer


4 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA
01 SYN+
02 SYN- To clock
RS-485
03 SGND synchronization
NR1102M 256M DDR Twisted pair wire
04
05 RTS
RS-232 06 TXD To printer
07 SGND
2 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA Twisted pair wire
2 FO Ethernet To SCADA Optical fibre ST
01 SYN+
02 SYN- To clock
RS-485
NR1102N 256M DDR 03 SGND synchronization
04 Twisted pair wire
05 RTS
RS-232 06 TXD To printer
07 SGND
3 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA
01 A To SCADA
NR1101F 256M DDR 02 B Twisted pair wire
RS-485
03 SGND
04

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 6-13


Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

Module ID Memory Interface Pin No. Usage Physical Layer


05 A
06 B
RS-485 To SCADA
07 SGND
08
09 SYN+
10 SYN- To clock
RS-485
11 SGND synchronization
12
13 RTS
RS-232 14 TXD To printer
15 SGND
16

The correct method of connection is shown in Figure 6.3-4. Generally, the shielded cables with two
pairs of twisted pairs inside shall be applied. One pair of the twisted pairs is used to connect the “+”
and “–” terminals of difference signal; the other is used to connect the signal ground of the
interface, i.e. connect the signal groundings of all the devices to a bus through the twisted pair.
The module reserves a free terminal for all the communication ports; the free terminal does not
need to be connected.

Twisted pair wire


A 01

B 02
COM
cable with single point earthing
To the screen of other coaxial

SGND 03

04

Twisted pair wire


SYN+ 01
CLOCK SYN

SYN- 02

SGND 03

04

Twisted pair wire


RTS 05
PRINT

TXD 06

SGND 07

Figure 6.3-4 Wiring of communication interface

6.3.3 DSP Module 1 (Protection Calculation, NR1115C or NR1151D)


The DSP Module 1 consists of high-performance digital signal processor and other peripherals.
The functions of this module include analog data acquisition, calculation of protection logic and
tripping output etc.

6.3.4 DSP Module 2 (Fault Detector Calculation, NR1115C or NR1151D)


The DSP Module 2 consists of high-performance digital signal processor and other peripherals.
The functions of this module include analog data acquisition, calculation of fault detector elements

6-14 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

and providing positive power supply to output relay.

DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 have the same hardware configuration. The following figure
shows rear views and terminal definitions for different type of DSP modules; the corresponding
module shall be adopted in accordance with concrete situation.

NR1115C NR1151D

1 1 2 3

4 5 6
2

Figure 6.2-5 Rear view of DSP modules

6.3.5 CAN Module (NR1201B)


The CAN bus extended module NR1201B is only equipped for 8U+4U PCS-915 device, 8U
chassis and 4U extended are equipped with one NR1201B module respectively, the CAN bus of
8U chassis and 4U extended chassis are connected together via a CAN extended wire, then the
8U device can get and control the signal of IO module of the 4U extended device.

NR1201B

TERM-H

TERM-T

PPS

RESV

CAN/PPS

Figure 6.2-6 Rear view of CAN bus extended modules

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 6-15


Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

6.3.6 NET-DSP Module (GOOSE and SV, Optional)

NR1136A NR1136C

RX

Figure 6.3-7 View of NET-DSP module

This module consists of high-performance DSP (digital signal processor), up to eight 100Mbit/s
optical-fibre interfaces (LC type) and selectable IRIG-B interface (ST type). It supports GOOSE
and SV by IEC 61850-9-2 protocols and can be used for GOOSE & SV message transmission by
point-to-point connection or via LAN It can receive and send GOOSE messages to intelligent
control device, and receive SV from MU (merging unit). Each interface can be dedicated for
GOOSE or SV message, it can also be shared by GOOSE & SV message.

This module supports IEEE1588 network time protocol, E2E and P2P defined in IEEE1588
protocol can be selected. This module supports Ethernet IEEE802.3 time adjustment message
format, UDP time adjustment message format and GMRP.

6.3.7 Binary Input (BI) Module


NR1501A, NR1503A and NR1506AS modules are three types of standard BI modules. All the
binary inputs can be configured by PCS-Explorer software according to user requirement, please
refer to Chapter 9 about the concrete operation method.

 NR1501A

A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of NR1501A and 14 configurable high voltage binary inputs
(per two binary inputs share one common negative power input of opto-coupler) are equipped with
it. The inputted voltage can be selected to be 110V, 220V, 125V and 250V.

6-16 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

BI_01 01

NR1501A BI_02 02

COM1- 03

BI_03 04
01
02 BI_04 05
03
COM2- 06
04
05 BI_05 07
06
BI_06 08
07
08 COM3- 09
09
BI_07 10
10
11 BI_08 11
12
13 COM4- 12

14 BI_09 13
15
16 BI_10 14
17
COM5- 15
18
19 BI_11 16
20
BI_12 17
21
22 COM6- 18

BI_13 19

BI_14 20

COM7- 21

22

Figure 6.3-8 Pin definition of binary input module NR1501A

Table 6.3-1 Pin definition of binary input module NR1501A

Pin No. Symbol Description


01 BI_01 Configurable binary input 1.
02 BI_02 Configurable binary input 2.
03 COM1- Common terminal 1 of negative pole of power supply of the module
04 BI_03 Configurable binary input 3.
05 BI_04 Configurable binary input 4.
06 COM2- Common terminal 2 of negative pole of power supply of the module
07 BI_05 Configurable binary input 5.
08 BI_06 Configurable binary input 6.
09 COM3- Common terminal 3 of negative pole of power supply of the module
10 BI_07 Configurable binary input 7.
11 BI_08 Configurable binary input 8.
12 COM4- Common terminal 4 of negative pole of power supply of the module
13 BI_09 Configurable binary input 9.
14 BI_10 Configurable binary input 10.
15 COM5- Common terminal 5 of negative pole of power supply of the module
16 BI_11 Configurable binary input 11.
17 BI_12 Configurable binary input 12.
18 COM6- Common terminal 6 of negative pole of power supply of the module

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 6-17


Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

Pin No. Symbol Description


19 BI_13 Configurable binary input 13.
20 BI_14 Configurable binary input 14.
21 COM7- Common terminal 7 of negative pole of power supply of the module
22 Blank Blank

 NR1503A

A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of NR1503A and 11 configurable high voltage binary inputs
are equipped with it, each binary input has independent negative power input of opto-coupler. The
inputted voltage can be selected to be 110V, 220V, 125V and 250V.

BI_01 01

NR1503A Opto01- 02

BI_02 03

Opto02- 04

BI_03 05

Opto03- 06

BI_04 07

Opto04- 08

BI_05 09

Opto05- 10

BI_06 11

Opto06- 12

BI_07 13

Opto07- 14

BI_08 15

Opto08- 16

BI_09 17

Opto09- 18

BI_10 19

Opto10- 20

BI_11 21

Opto11- 22

Figure 6.3-4 Pin definition of binary input module NR1503A

Table 6.3-2 Pin definition of binary input module NR1503A

Pin No. Symbol Description


01 BI_01 Configurable binary input 1
02 Opto01- Negative pole of power supply of configurable binary input 1
03 BI_02 Configurable binary input 2
04 Opto02- Negative pole of power supply of configurable binary input 2
05 BI_03 Configurable binary input 3
06 Opto03- Negative pole of power supply of configurable binary input 3
07 BI_04 Configurable binary input 4
08 Opto04- Negative pole of power supply of configurable binary input 4

6-18 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

Pin No. Symbol Description


09 BI_05 Configurable binary input 5
10 Opto05- Negative pole of power supply of configurable binary input 5
11 BI_06 Configurable binary input 6
12 Opto06- Negative pole of power supply of configurable binary input 6
13 BI_07 Configurable binary input 7
14 Opto07- Negative pole of power supply of configurable binary input 7
15 BI_08 Configurable binary input 8
16 Opto08- Negative pole of power supply of configurable binary input 8
17 BI_09 Configurable binary input 9
18 Opto09- Negative pole of power supply of configurable binary input 9
19 BI_10 Configurable binary input 10
20 Opto10- Negative pole of power supply of configurable binary input 10
21 BI_11 Configurable binary input 11
22 Opto11- Negative pole of power supply of configurable binary input 11

 NR1506AS

A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of NR1506AS and 20 configurable high voltage binary
inputs are equipped with it. The inputted voltage can be selected to be 110V, 220V, 125V and
250V and the module has opto-coupler power monitor circuit.

An internal binary input [BI_COMMON] is equipped for NR1506AS type BI module, please refer to
Section 3.12.2.2 for details.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 6-19


Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

Opto+ 01

BI_01 02
NR1506AS
BI_02 03

BI_03 04
01
BI_04 05
02
03 BI_05 06
04
BI_06 07
05
06 BI_07 08
07
08 BI_08 09
09
BI_09 10
10
11 BI_10 11
12
BI_11 12
13
14 BI_12 13
15
BI_13 14
16
17 BI_14 15
18
19 BI_15 16

20 BI_16 17
21
22 BI_17 18

BI_18 19

BI_19 20

BI_20 21

COM- 22

BI_COMMON

Figure 6.3-9 Pin definition of binary input module NR1506AS

Table 6.3-3 Pin definition of binary input module NR1506AS

Pin No. Symbol Description


01 Opto+ Positive pole of power supply of the module
02 BI_01 Configurable binary input 1.
03 BI_02 Configurable binary input 2.
04 BI_03 Configurable binary input 3.
05 BI_04 Configurable binary input 4.
06 BI_05 Configurable binary input 5.
07 BI_06 Configurable binary input 6.
08 BI_07 Configurable binary input 7.
09 BI_08 Configurable binary input 8.
10 BI_09 Configurable binary input 9.
11 BI_10 Configurable binary input 10.
12 BI_11 Configurable binary input 11.
13 BI_12 Configurable binary input 12.
14 BI_13 Configurable binary input 13.
15 BI_14 Configurable binary input 14.

6-20 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

Pin No. Symbol Description


16 BI_15 Configurable binary input 15.
17 BI_16 Configurable binary input 16.
18 BI_17 Configurable binary input 17.
19 BI_18 Configurable binary input 18.
20 BI_19 Configurable binary input 19.
21 BI_20 Configurable binary input 20.
22 COM- Common terminal of negative pole of power supply of the module

6.3.8 Binary Output (BO) Module


NR1521A, NR1521B, NR1521C, NR1523A and NR1549A are five types of standard BO modules.
All the binary outputs can be configured by PCS-Explorer software according to user requirement,
please refer to chapter 9 about the concrete operation method.

It is recommended that the BO contacts controlled by fault detector is used for tripping or operating
signals BO, and the BO contacts not controlled by fault detector is used for alarm signal and other
signal BO.

 NR1521A, NR1521B and NR1521C

NR1521A can provide 11 normally open (NO) BO contacts, and each output contact will be
controlled by the fault detector.

NR1521B can provide 11 normally open (NO) BO contacts, the first 9 BO contacts will be
controlled by fault detector and the last two BO contacts will not.

NR1521C can provide 11 normally open (NO) BO contacts, and each output contact is not
controlled by the fault detector.

A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of NR1521A, NR1521B and NR1521C. The pin definition of
the connectors is described as below.

01
BO_01
NR1521A 02
03
BO_ 02
04
05
BO_ 03
06
07
BO_ 04
08
09
BO_ 05
10
11
BO_ 06
12
13
BO_ 07
14
15
BO_ 08
16
17
BO_ 09
18
19
BO_ 10
20
21
BO_ 11
22

Figure 6.3-10 Pin definition of BO module NR1521A (Pin definition of NR1521B and 1521C are similar to it)

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 6-21


Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

 NR1523A

NR1523A can provide 11 signal output contacts and all the contacts are normally open (NO)
contacts. Only the last three contacts ([BO_09], [BO_10] and [BO_11]) are magnetic latched NO
contacts defined as protection tripping signal generally. Except for [BO_07] and [BO_08], all the
other contacts will be controlled by positive power supply of fault detector.

A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of this module. The pin definition of the connector is
described as below.

01
BO_01
NR1523A 02
03
BO_ 02
04
05
BO_ 03
06
07
BO_ 04
08
09
BO_ 05
10
11
BO_ 06
12
13
BO_ 07
14
15
BO_ 08
16
17
BO_ 09
18
19
BO_ 10
20
21
BO_ 11
22

Figure 6.3-11 Pin definition of BO module NR1523A

 NR1549A

NR1549A can provide 11 output contacts and all the contacts are magnetic latched normally open
(NO) contacts and will be controlled by positive power supply of fault detector.

A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of this module. The pin definition of the connector is
described as below.

6-22 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

01
BO_01
NR1549A 02
03
BO_ 02
04
05
BO_ 03
06
07
BO_ 04
08
09
BO_ 05
10
11
BO_ 06
12
13
BO_ 07
14
15
BO_ 08
16
17
BO_ 09
18
19
BO_ 10
20
21
BO_ 11
22

Figure 6.3-12 Pin definition of BO module NR1549A

6.3.9 Analog Input (AI) Module (NR1401)


AI module is applicable for power plant or substation with conventional VT and CT, the module is
not required if the device is used with ECT/EVT.

The NR1401 module can provide 12-channel analog signal inputs. A 24-pin connector is fixed on
the front of this module. The pin definition of the connector is described as below (Take the typical
definition of the first analog input module as an example).

Two kinds of AI modules (12-channel current AI module, 3-channel current and 9-channel voltage
AI module) can be used for PCS-915. If voltage is connected, one 3-channel current and
9-channel voltage AI module should be configured. For current channel, rating 5 A or 1 A can be
selected. Please declare which kind of AI module is needed before ordering. Maximum linear
range of the current converter is 40In.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 6-23


Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

Ia_Bay01 01 Ian_Bay01 02
NR1401

Ib_Bay01 03 Ibn_Bay01 04

Ic_Bay01 05 Icn_Bay01 06

Ia_Bay02 07 Ian_Bay02 08

Ib_Bay02 09 Ibn_Bay02 10

Ic_Bay02 11 Icn_Bay02 12

Ia_Bay03 13 Ian_Bay03 14

Ib_Bay03 15 Ibn_Bay03 16

Ic_Bay03 17 Icn_Bay03 18

Ia_Bay04 19 Ian_Bay04 20

Ib_Bay04 21 Ibn_Bay04 22

Ic_Bay04 23 Icn_Bay04 24

Figure 6.3-13 Typical pin definition of the first 12-channel current AI module

Ia_Bayxx 01 Ian_Bayxx 02
NR1401
Ib_Bayxx 03 Ibn_Bayxx 04

Ic_Bayxx 05 Icn_Bayxx 06

Ua_BB1 07 Uan_BB1 08

Ub_BB1 09 Ubn_BB1 10

Uc_BB1 11 Ucn_BB1 12

Ua_BB2 13 Uan_BB2 14

Ub_BB2 15 Ubn_BB2 16

Uc_BB2 17 Ucn_BB2 18

Ua_BB3 19 Uan_BB3 20

Ub_BB3 21 Ubn_BB2 22

Uc_BB3 23 Ucn_BB3 24

Figure 6.3-14 Typical pin definition of 3-channel current and 9-channel voltage AI module

For AI module, if the plug is not put in the socket, external CT circuit is closed itself. Just shown as
below.

6-24 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

Plug
Socket

In

Out

plug is not put in the socket

In

Out

Put the plug in the socket

Figure 6.3-15 Schematic diagram of CT circuit automatically closed

P2 S2

P1 S1

02 01

04 03

06 05

Figure 6.3-16 Current connection of AI module

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 6-25


Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

13 14

15 16

17 18

Figure 6.3-17 Voltage connection of AI module

6-26 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-07-13
7 Settings

7 Settings

Table of Contents
7 Settings .............................................................................................. 7-a
7.1 Device Settings ............................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Communication Settings ................................................................................ 7-3
7.3 Label Settings................................................................................................ 7-10
7.4 Function Links................................................................................................ 7-11
7.5 System Settings ............................................................................................ 7-14
7.6 GOOSE Receiving Links............................................................................... 7-16
7.7 GOOSE Sending Links ................................................................................. 7-16

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 7-a


Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings

Settings are classified to two kinds, protection settings and common settings. Each protection
element has its independent setting menu which are given detailed description in chapter
“Operation Theory”. In this chapter only common settings are introduced. Common settings
consist of device settings, communication settings, label settings, system settings, function links
and etc.

PCS-915 has ten protection setting groups to coordinate with the different modes of power system
operation. One of these setting groups is assigned to be active. However, common settings are
shared by all protection setting groups.

If all the protection settings are set and displayed as secondary value (the communication setting
[Opt_Display_Settings] is set as “1” or the setting is not configured), all the current settings are
converted from primary current according to reference CT ratio instead of the actual CT ratio of
each bay.

7.1 Device Settings

 Setting list

No. Item Description Setting Range


0:24V, 1:48V
Voltage level of binary input for the module that
1 Bx.Un_BinaryInput 2:110V, 3:220V, 4: 30V,
located in slot No.x
5: 125V
Select encoding format of header (HDR) file
2 HDR_EncodedMode GB18030, UTF-8
COMTRADE recording file. Default value is “UTF-8”.
0: Current Language
3 Opt_Caption_103 The language of group caption of IEC103 protocol 1: Fixed Chinese
2: Fixed English
Using moveable disk to realize the backup and
0: Disable
4 En_MDisk recovery of program and configuration.
1:Enable
Default value is 0, and the function is reserved.
0: Disable
5 En_Volt_BB Voltage concerned function is enabled or disabled
1:Enable
Following device settings are configured only for digital substation
The SV interpolation back-off time of the GOOSE
6 Bx.t_Dly_Interp_SV 1500μs~15000μs
and SV module that located in slot No.x
0: SV LAN mode
7 Opt_RecvMode_SV SV point-to-point receiving mode is enabled ot not. 1: SV point-to-point
receiving mode
8 N_Ch_Max_SV The maximum number of SV channel 24~40
0: the sample value can be displayed even a bay is
out of service (the function link [@Bayn.Link_On] is
9 En_ClearSV set as “0”). 0, 1
1: the sample value will be cleared if a bay is out of
service (the function link [@Bayn.Link_On] is set as

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 7-1


Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings

“0”).

 Setting description

1. [Bx.Un_BinaryInput]

The setting is used to set the voltage level of corresponding binary input module. For
high-voltage BI modules, 110V, 125V or 220V can be set according to the actual requirement.
For low-voltage BI modules, 24V, 30V or 48V can be set according to the actual requirement.

0: 24V

1: 48V

2: 110V

3: 220V

4: 30V

5: 125V

2. [HDR_EncodedMode]

Default value of [HDR_EncodedMode] is 1 (i.e. UTF-8 code) and please set it to 0 (i.e. GB18030)
according to the special requirement.

3. [Opt_Caption_103]

0: the group caption of IEC103 protocol is in current language

1: the group caption of IEC103 protocol is in Chinese

2: the group caption of IEC103 protocol is in English

It is recommended to be set as “1” if the device communicate with SCADA in Chinese.

4. [En_MDisk]

1: Use moveable disk to realize the backup and recovery function.

0: Moveable disk will be disabled.

A moveable mdisk is implemented on the MON plug-in module to backup and restore programs,
settings and configurations.

If MON plug-in module is broken, remove the mdisk and put it into a new MON plug-in module, use
the menu on HMI to restore the backup programs and configurations. If DSP plug-in module is
broken, after a new DSP plug-in module is installed, use the menu on HMI to restore the backup
programs and configurations. If the moveable mdisk is broken, after a new mdisk is installed on
the MON plug-in module, use the menu on HMI to back up the current programs and
configurations into the new mdisk.

The default setting is 0.

5. [En_Volt_BB]

7-2 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings

It should be set as “0” if busbar voltage is not connected to PCS-915, then all the voltage
concerned function are disabled. It should be set as “1” if busbar voltage is connected to
PCS-915, then all the voltage concerned function can be enabled (each voltage concerned
function maybe controlled by corresponding logic setting).

 Access path:

MainMenuSettingsProduct SetupDevice Settings

7.2 Communication Settings

 Setting list

No. Setting Item Range Description

The IED name defined in 61850


1 IEDNAME
protocol

2 IP_LAN1 IP address of Ethernet port A

3 Mask_LAN1 Subnet mask of Ethernet port A

4 En_LAN1 0,1 Put Ethernet port A into service

5 IP_LAN2 IP address of Ethernet port B

6 Mask_LAN2 Subnet mask of Ethernet port B

7 En_LAN2 0,1 Put Ethernet port B into service

8 IP_LAN3 IP address of Ethernet port C

9 Mask_LAN3 Subnet mask of Ethernet port C

10 En_LAN3 0,1 Put Ethernet port C into service

11 IP_LAN4 IP address of Ethernet port D

12 Mask_LAN4 Subnet mask of Ethernet port D

13 En_LAN4 0,1 Put Ethernet port D into service

000.000.000.000~
14 Gateway Gateway of router
255.255.255.255

Enable/disable sending message in


15 En_Broadcast 0: disable, 1: enable broadcast mode via network.
(IEC103).

Time scale format of IEC


16 Fmt_Net_103 0, 1 60870-5-103 protocol (for Ethernet
port).

Communication address between the


17 Addr_RS485A 0~255 protective device with the SCADA or
RTU via RS-485 serial port 1.

4800,9600,19200, Baud rate of rear RS-485 serial port


18 Baud_RS485A
38400,57600,115200 bps 1.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 7-3


Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings

No. Setting Item Range Description

Communication protocol of rear


19 Protocol_RS485A 0~2
RS-485 serial port 1.

Spontaneous events are sent in the


format of FUN and INF based on IEC
20 Inf_RS485A_103 0, 1
60870-5-103 protocol (for RS-485
serial port 1).

Time scale format of IEC


21 Fmt_RS485A_103 0, 1 60870-5-103 protocol (for RS-485
serial port 1).

Communication address between the


22 Addr_RS485B 0~255 protective device with the SCADA or
RTU via RS-485 serial port 2.

4800,9600,19200, Baud rate of rear RS-485 serial port


23 Baud_RS485B
38400,57600,115200 bps 2.

Communication protocol of rear


24 Protocol_RS485B 0~2
RS-485 serial port 2.

Spontaneous events are sent in the


format of FUN and INF based on IEC
25 Inf_RS485B_103 0, 1
60870-5-103 protocol (for RS-485
serial port 2).

Time scale format of IEC


26 Fmt_RS485B_103 0, 1 60870-5-103 protocol (for RS-485
serial port 2).

Threshold value of sending


measurement values to SCADA
27 Threshold_Measmt_Net 0~100% through IEC103 or IEC61850
protocol.
Default value: “1%”.

The time period when the equipment


sends measurement data to SCADA
28 Period_Measmt_Net 0~65535s
through IEC103 protocol.
Default value:”60”.

Select the format of measurement


29 Format_Measmt 0, 1 data sent to SCADA through IEC103
protocol.

4800,9600,
30 Baud_Printer Baud rate of printer port
19200,38400, 51600, 115200 bps

0: disable Enable/disable automatic printing


31 En_AutoPrint
1: enable function

32 Opt_TimeSyn Conventional Select the mode of time

7-4 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings

No. Setting Item Range Description

SAS synchronization of equipment.


Advanced
NoTimeSyn

The address of the external SNTP


000.000.000.000~
33 IP_Server_SNTP clock synchronization server sending
255.255.255.255
SNTP message to the equipment.

The local time zone also refered to as


34 OffsetHour_UTC -12~12hrs
the hour offset hour from UTC .

The offset minute of local time from


35 OffsetMinute_UTC 0~60min
UTC.

Primary value/ Measurement values are displayed in


36 Opt_Display_Status
Secondary value primary value or secondary value

Select display primary value or


Primary value/
37 Opt_Display_Settings secondary value for protection
Secondary value
settings

The address of the SNTP clock


38 IP_StandbyServer_SNTP 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
synchronization standby server.

Logic setting to enable/disable SNTP


39 En_Server_SNTP 0, 1
server mode

Following communication settings are configured only for digital substation

0: PPS
Select the time synchronization
1: IRIGB
40 Opt_TimeSyn_PL source of process layer (the default
2: 1588PPS
value is “1”).
3: SLAVEPPS

GOOSE double-net mode is enabled


or not
41 En_NetB_GOOSE 0, 1
0: single-net mode
1: double-net mode

GOOSE single/double-net mode is


enabled or not
42 En_DualNet_GOOSE 0, 1
0: double-net mode
1: single/double-net mode

SV double-net mode is enabled or


not
43 En_NetB_SV 0, 1
0: single-net mode
1: double-net mode

Enable Bx (GOOSE and SV module


44 Bx.En_PPS_Output 0, 1 that located in slot No.x) to output
pulse per second

Following communication settings are configured only when DNP3.0 protocol is adopted

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 7-5


Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings

No. Setting Item Range Description

The logic setting to enable/disable


45 En_TCPx_DNP 0 or 1 network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3,
4)

It is the slave address of network


46 Addr_Slave_TCPx_DNP 0~65519
No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)

It is the master address of network


47 Addr_Master_TCPx_DNP 0~65519
No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)

It is the IP address of network No.x


48 IP_Master_TCPx_DNP 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)

It is the communication map of


49 Opt_Map_TCPx_DNP 0~4 network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3,
4)

It is the “OBJ1” default variation of


50 Obj01DefltVar_TCPx_DNP 0~1 network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3,
4)

It is the “OBJ2” default variation of


51 Obj02DefltVar_TCPx_DNP 0~2 network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3,
4)

It is the “OBJ30” default variation of


52 Obj30DefltVar_TCPx_DNP 0~4 network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3,
4)

It is the “OBJ32” default variation of


53 Obj32DefltVar_TCPx_DNP 0~2 network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3,
4)

It is the “OBJ40” default variation of


54 Obj40DefltVar_TCPx_DNP 0~2 network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3,
4)

It is the timeout of application layer of


55 t_AppLayer_TCPx_DNP 0~5 (s) network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3,
4)

It is the heartbeat time interval of


56 t_KeepAlive_TCPx_DNP 0~7200 (s) network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3,
4)

The logic setting is used to enable or


disable the unsolicited message
57 En_UR_TCPx_DNP 0 or 1
function of network No.x DNP client.
(x=1, 2, 3, 4)

It is the online retransmission number


58 Num_URRetry_TCPx_DNP 2~10 of the unsolicited message of
network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3,

7-6 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings

No. Setting Item Range Description

4)

It is the offline timeout of the


59 t_UROfflRetry_TCPx_DNP 1~5000 (s) unsolicited message of network No.x
DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)

It is the class level of the “Binary


60 Class_BI_TCPx_DNP 0~3 Input” of network No.x DNP client.
(x=1, 2, 3, 4)

It is the class level of the “Analog


61 Class_AI_TCPx_DNP 0~3 Input” of network No.x DNP client.
(x=1, 2, 3, 4)

It is the selection timeout of network


62 t_Select_TCPx_DNP 0~240 (s)
No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)

It is the time interval of the time


63 t_TimeSynIntvl_TCPx_DNP 0~3600 (s) synchronization function of network
No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)

 Setting description

1. [En_LANx] (x= 2, 3, 4)

These setting are used to enable/disable IP addresses of Ethernet 2, 3 and 4 respectively. IP


address of Ethernet 1 is enabled fixedly.

“1”: enable the IP address of Ethernet port and the corresponding IP address setting is needed to
be set.

“0”: disable the IP address of Ethernet port and the corresponding IP address setting is not needed
to be set.

2. [En_Broadcast]

This setting is only used for IEC 103 protocol. If NR network IEC103 protocol is used, the setting
must be set as “1”.

0: the device does not send UDP messages through network;

1: the device sends UDP messages through network.

3. [Fmt_Net_103]

If the setting is set as”0”, GDD data type of spontaneous events based on IEC 60870-5-103
protocol is 18 (automatic supervision report, binary input change report), 19 (tripping report), i.e.
4-byte time scale format.

If the setting is set as”1”, GDD data type of spontaneous events based on IEC 60870-5-103
protocol is 203 (automatic supervision report, binary input change report), 204 (tripping report), i.e.
7-byte time scale format.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 7-7


Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings

4. [Protocol_RS485x] (x=A, B)

The setting is used to select the communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port x.

0: IEC 60870-5-103 protocol

1: Modbus protocol

2: DNP protocol

5. [Inf_RS485A_103], [Inf_RS485B_103]

When spontaneous events are sent via generic services based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, this
setting should be setting as “0”. When spontaneous events are sent in the format of FUN and INF
based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, this setting should be set as “1”.

6. [Fmt_RS485A_103], [Fmt_RS485B_103]

The setting is invalid if the setting [Inf_RS485A_103]/[Inf_RS485B_103] is set as”1”.

If the setting is set as”0” and [Inf_RS485A_103]/[Inf_RS485B_103] is set as “0”, GDD data type of
spontaneous events based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is 18 (automatic supervision report,
binary input change report), 19 (tripping report), i.e. 4-byte time scale format.

If the setting is set as”1” and [Inf_RS485A_103]/[Inf_RS485B_103] is set as “0”, GDD data type of
spontaneous events based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is 203 (automatic supervision report,
binary input change report), 204 (tripping report), i.e. 7-byte time scale format.

7. [Format_Measmt]

The setting is used to select the format of measurement data sent to SCADA through IEC103
protocol.

0: GDD data type through IEC103 protocol is 12;

1: GDD data type through IEC103 protocol is 7, i.e. 754 short real number of IEEE standard.

8. [En_AutoPrint]

If automatic print is required for disturbance report after protection operating, the setting should be
set as “1”.

9. [Opt_TimeSyn]

There are four selections for clock synchronization of device, each selection includes different time
clock synchronization signals shown in following table.

Item Description
PPS(RS-485): Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level.
IRIG-B(RS-485): IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level.
Conventional
PPM(DIN): Pulse per minute (PPM) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn].
PPS(DIN): Pulse per second (PPS) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn].
SNTP(PTP): Unicast (point to point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network.
SAS
SNTP(BC): Broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network.

7-8 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings

Item Description
Message (IEC103): Clock messages through IEC103 protocol.
IEEE1588: Clock message via IEEE1588.
Advanced IRIG-B(Fiber): IRIG-B via optical-fibre interface.
PPS(Fiber) PPS: Pulse per second (PPS) via optical-fibre interface.
When no time synchronization signal is connected to the equipment, please select
NoTimeSyn
this option and the alarm message [Alm_TimeSyn] will not be issued anymore.

“Conventional” mode and “SAS” mode are always be supported by device, but “Advanced” mode
is only supported when NET-DSP module is equipped. The alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn] may be
issued to remind user loss of time synchronization signals.

1) When “SAS” is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization signal, the device
will not send the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn]. When “Conventional” mode is selected, if there
is no conventional clock synchronization signal, “SAS” mode will be enabled automatically
with the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn] being issued simultaneously.

2) When “Advanced” mode is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization signal


connected to NET-DSP module,“SAS” mode is enabled automatically with the alarm signal
[Alm_TimeSyn] being issued simultaneously.

3) When “NoTimeSyn” mode is selected, the device will not send alarm signals without

NOTICE!

The clock message via IEC103 protocol is INVALID when the device receives the
IRIG-B signal through RC-485 port.

10. [IP_Server_SNTP]

It is the address of the SNTP time synchronization server which sends SNTP timing messages to
the relay or BCU.

11. [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP]

Both [IP_Server_SNTP] and [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] are inefffective unless SNTP clock


synchronization is valid.

When both [IP_Server_SNTP] and [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] are set as “000.000.000.000”, the


deivce receives broadcast SNTP synchronization message.

When either [IP_Server_SNTP] or [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] is set as “000.000.000.000”, the


deivce adopt the setting whose value is not equal to “000.000.000.000” as SNTP server address
and the deivce receives unicast SNTP synchronization message.

When neither [IP_Server_SNTP] nor [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] are set as “000.000.000.000”, the


deivce adopt the setting [IP_Server_SNTP] as SNTP server address to receive unicast SNTP
synchronization message. If the device does not receive the server responses after 30s, the
deivce adopt the setting [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] as SNTP server address to receive unicast
SNTP synchronization message. The device will switch between [IP_Server_SNTP] and
[IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] repeatedly if the device always can not receive the server responses

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 7-9


Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings

waiting 30s.

12. [Opt_Display_Status]

If this setting is not configured, the sampled values are displayed as secondary value by default.
If this setting is set as “0”, the sampled values are displayed as primary value, if this setting is set
as “1”, the sampled values are displayed as secondary value.

The primary voltage is converted into secondary voltage according to rated secondary voltage of
VT (i.e. the system setting [U2n_PP]), if digital sampling mode is adopted, the virtual rated
secondary voltage of VT is 100V by default. The primary current is converted into secondary
current according to rated secondary current of reference CT (i.e. the system setting [I2n_Ref), if
digital sampling mode is adopted, the primary current is converted into secondary current
according to the virtual rated secondary current of reference CT.

13. [Opt_Display_Settings]

If this setting is not configured, the protection settings are set and displayed as secondary value
by default. If this setting is set as “0”, the protection settings are set and displayed as primary
value, if this setting is set as “1”, the protection settings are set and displayed as secondary
value.

The primary voltage is converted into secondary voltage according to rated secondary voltage of
VT (i.e. the system setting [U2n_PP]), if digital sampling mode is adopted, the virtual rated
secondary voltage of VT is 100V by default. The primary current is converted into secondary
current according to rated secondary current of reference CT (i.e. the system setting [I2n_Ref]),
if digital sampling mode is adopted, the primary current is converted into secondary current
according to the virtual rated secondary current of reference CT.

14. [En_DualNet_GOOSE]

The setting is valid only when GOOSE is enabled. If single/double-net mode is enabled (i.e. the
setting is set as “1”), for the single-net connected signal, the related alarm signal of network B
will be shielded.

 Access Path:

MainMenuSettingsDevice SetupComm Settings

7.3 Label Settings

 Setting list

No. Symbol Description

1 Name_Busx Label setting of busbar No.x

2 Name_Bayn Label setting of bay n

Following label settings are configured only for digital substation

3 Bm.Name_n_GCommLink Label setting of GOOSE communication link n of the GOOSE and

7-10 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings

SV module that located in slot No.m

Label setting of SV communication link n of the GOOSE and SV


4 Bm.Name_n_SVCommLink
module that located in slot No.m

These settings are used to definite the label of each bay and busbar. They can be set by 6
characters at most. The label of each bay and busbar will influence the displayed contents of all
reports, settings and metering that related with each bay and busbar.

 Access Path:

MainMenuSettingsDevice SetupLabel Settings

7.4 Function Links

Function link is a special logic setting which is used to enable protection function. These function
links can be configured through local HMI or remote PC (controlled by the function link
[Link_RmtCtrlLink]).

Each function link is one of the conditions that decide whether the relevant protection function is in
service. If the virtual binary input [Link_RmtCtrlLink] is set as “1”, through SAS or RTU, the
function link can be set as “1” or “0”; and it means that the relevant protection function can be in
service or out of service through remote command.

These function links provide a convenient way for the operator to put the function in service or out
of service remotely away from an unattended substation.

 Setting list

No. Symbol Remark

Enable remote setting modification. Set it as “0” if only local setting


modification is needed. Set it as “1” if local and remote setting
1 Link_RmtChgSetting
modification are both needed.
If it is not configured for a project, its default value is “1”.

Enable remote active setting group modification. Set it as “0” if only


local active setting group modification is needed. Set it as “1” if local
2 Link_RmtChgGrp
and remote active setting group modification are both needed.
If it is not configured for a project, its default value is “1”.

Enable remote function links modification. Set it as “0” if only local


function links modification is needed. Set it as “1” if local and remote
3 Link_RmtCtrlLink
function links modification are both needed.
If it is not configured for a project, its default value is “1”.

Enable all protective functions. All the protective functions can be


enabled only when it is set as “1”. If it is set as “0”, all the protective
4 Link_Prot
functions is disabled.
If it is not configured for a project, its default value is “1”.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 7-11


Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings

No. Symbol Remark

1: Enabling busbar differential protection


5 87B.Link
0: Disabling busbar differential protection

1: Enabling feeder breaker failure protection


6 50BF.Link
0: Disabling feeder breaker failure protection

1: Circuit breaker of bay n is in maintenance,


7 @Bayn.Link_Maintenance
0: Circuit breaker of bay n is not in maintenance

Function link of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection (it is


configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary
input and function link of a protective element is configured according
8 Fdr.50DZ.Link
to each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
1: Enabling feeder dead zone fault protection
0: Disabling feeder dead zone fault protection

Function link of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n (it
is configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling
binary input and function link of a protective element is configured
9 @Bayn.50DZ.Link
according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))
1: Enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n
0: Disabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n

Function link of enabling BC/BS SOTF protection (it is configured


when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and
function link of a protective element is configured according to each
10 50SOTF.Link
bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
1: Enabling BC/BS SOTF protection
0: Disabling BC/BS SOTF protection

Function link of enabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS


bay) (it is configured when the basic information configuration
“Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is
11 @Bayn.50SOTF.Link configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section
3.4))
1: Enabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS bay)
0: Disabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS bay)

Function link of enabling phase overcurrent protection and ground


overcurrent protection (it is configured when the basic information
configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a protective
element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer
12 50/51.Link to Section 3.4))
1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent
protection
0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent
protection

13 @Bayn.50/51P.Link Function link of enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n (it is

7-12 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings

No. Symbol Remark

configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary


input and function link of a protective element is configured according
to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))
1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n
0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n

Function link of enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n (it is


configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary
input and function link of a protective element is configured according
14 @Bayn.50/51G.Link
to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))
1: Enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n
0: Disabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n

Function link of enabling PD protection (it is configured when the basic


information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a
protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as
15 62PD.Link
“Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
1: Enabling PD protection
0: Disabling PD protection

Function link of enabling PD protection of bay n (it is configured when


the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function
link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set
16 @Bayn.62PD.Link
as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))
1: Enabling PD protection of bay n
0: Disabling PD protection of bay n

1: Two busbars are under inter-connected operation mode


17 Link_IntLinkx
0: Two busbars are not under inter-connected operation mode

Following function links are configured only for digital substation

1: Bay n is put into service.


18 @Bayn.Link_On 0: Bay n is out of service.
It is configured when digital sampling mode is adopted.

1: Enforced disconnector position for bay n is enabled. The


disconnector position will be decided by [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB1] and
[@Bayn.Link_DS_BB2];
19 @Bayn.Link_DS
0: Enforced disconnector position for bay n is disabled. The
disconnector position will be decided by disconnector position binary
input.

1: BB1 disconnector of bay n is taken as closed enforcedly if


[@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”;
20 @Bayn.Link_DS_BB1
0: BB1 disconnector of bay n is taken as open enforcedly if
[@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”.

1: BB2 disconnector of bay n is taken as closed enforcedly if


21 @Bayn.Link_DS_BB2
[@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”;

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 7-13


Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings

No. Symbol Remark

0: BB2 disconnector of bay n is taken as open enforcedly if


[@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”.

 Access Path:

MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links

7.5 System Settings

 Setting list

No. Item Setting Range Default Setting

1 Active_Grp 1~10 1

2 PrimaryEquip_Name Max 20 characters

3 fn 50Hz, 60Hz 50Hz

4 U1n_PP 1~1200kV 220kV

5 U2n_PP 1.00~200V 100V

6 Bayn.I1n 0~9999A 1200A

7 Bayn.I1n_CT1 0~9999A 1200A

8 Bayn.I1n_CT2 0~9999A 1200A

9 I1n_Ref 1~9999A 1200A

10 I2n_Ref 1A or 5A 1A

11 Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode 0, 1 0

12 Cfg_DS_BBx 00000000~01FFFFFE

 Setting description

1. [Active_Grp]

The number of active setting group, ten setting groups can be configured for busbar differential
protection and breaker failure protection, and only one is active at a time.

2. [PrimaryEquip_Name]

Name of the protected primary equipment, such as busbar, transformer, etc.

3. [U1n_PP]

Rated primary phase-to-phase voltage of VT.

4. [U2n_PP]

Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage of VT.

5. [Bayn.I1n]

Rated primary current of the CT of bay n. It should be set as “0” if the corresponding bay is not

7-14 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings

used.

When digital sampling mode is adopted, the setting range will be “-9999A~9999A”, if the polarity
mark of CT of bay n is wrong, it can be corrected by setting [Bayn.I1n] as a negative value.

6. [Bayn.I1n_CT1], [Bayn.I1n_CT2]

If there are two CTs available for bay n (such as a bus coupler with double CTs available),
[Bayn.I1n_CT1] and [Bayn.I1n_CT2] are the rated primary current of the two CTs of bay n. They
should be set as “0” if the corresponding bay is not used.

When digital sampling mode is adopted, the setting range will be “-9999A~9999A”, if the polarity
mark of CT1 or CT2 of bay n is wrong, it can be corrected by setting [Bayn.I1n_CT1] or
[Bayn.I1n_CT2] as a negative value.

7. [I1n_Ref]

Rated primary current of reference CT.

This setting is used in case that the rated CT primary currents of each feeder connected to busbar
are different. Among these CTs, the CT with the most applied ratio is taken as the reference CT.

If the maximum CT ratio is two times larger than the minimum CT ratio, in order to ensure accuracy,
the rated primary current of reference CT shall be half of the maximal rated primary current.

For example, assume only 3 feeders are connected to the busbar. The CT ratios are 600:5 (feeder
02), 600:5 (feeder 03) and 1200:5 (feeder 04). Then, this setting should be set as “600”.

8. [I2n_Ref]

The rated secondary current of reference CT. This setting is used in case that the rated secondary
current of each feeder connected to busbar are different. Among these CTs, the CT with the most
applied ratio is taken as the reference CT.

If digital sampling is adopted, it is the virtual rated secondary current of reference CT. It can be set
according to user’s habit. If the sampled values are displayed as secondary value, the primary
current are converted into secondary current according to it. If all the protection settings are set as
secondary value, users should set all the current settings according to it.

9. [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode]

When PCS-915IC is applied to an unearthed system, it should be set as “1”. It will affect the
settings of voltage controlled element, please refer to Section 3.12.6 and Section 3.5.6, the
criterion of VT circuit supervision will also change, please refer to Section 3.14.

10. [Cfg_DS_BBx]

Disconnector position configuration setting of BBx. In the case of single busbar with bus section
arrangement, the setting is used to indicate which busbar zone the feeder is connected to. The
setting is consisted of 32 binary digits but 8 hexadecimal digits can be viewed through device LCD
screen. The definition of the system setting is as follows.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 7-15


Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bay 16

Bay 14

Bay 13

Bay 12

Bay 10

Bay 09

Bay 08

Bay 07

Bay 06

Bay 05

Bay 04

Bay 03

Bay 02

Bay 01
Bay 11
Bay 5

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Bay 17
Bay 25

Bay 24

Bay 23

Bay 22

Bay 21

Bay 20

Bay 19

Bay 18
0

0
The feeder bay is connected to BBx if corresponding binary digit of [Cfg_DS_BBx] is set as “1”.

Generally, Bay 01 is connected with BC, so bit 0 of [Cfg_DS_BBx] is not used. For double-CT BC,
bay 01 and bay 02 will be occupied, so bit 0 and bit 1 of [Cfg_DS_BBx] are not used.

 Access path:

MainMenuSettingsSystem Settings

7.6 GOOSE Receiving Links

GOOSE receiving links will changed according to the specific project, so it is not listed here. Users
can see the GOOSE receiving links of each project via the PCS-Explorer software).

 Access Path:

MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksGOOSE Recv Links

7.7 GOOSE Sending Links

NOTICE!

In this section, “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of bay n.

 Setting list

No. Symbol Remark

1 @Bayn.GLink_Send_Trp GOOSE sending link of tripping of bay n (n=1~23)

2 @Bayn.GLink_Send_TT GOOSE sending link of transfer tripping of bay n (n=2~23)

 Access Path:

MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksGOOSE Send Links

7-16 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-03-07
8 Human Machine Interface

8 Human Machine Interface

Table of Contents
8 Human Machine Interface ................................................................ 8-a
8.1 Human Machine Interface Overview .............................................................. 8-1
8.1.1 Functionality ......................................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1.2 Keypad and Keys ................................................................................................................. 8-2

8.1.3 LED Indications .................................................................................................................... 8-2

8.1.4 Front Communication Port ................................................................................................... 8-3

8.1.5 Ethernet Port Setup ............................................................................................................. 8-4

8.2 Understand the HMI Menu Tree ...................................................................... 8-5


8.2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 8-5

8.2.2 Measurements ..................................................................................................................... 8-8

8.2.3 Status ................................................................................................................................... 8-8

8.2.4 Records .............................................................................................................................. 8-10

8.2.5 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 8-10

8.2.6 Print .....................................................................................................................................8-11

8.2.7 Local Cmd .......................................................................................................................... 8-13

8.2.8 Information ......................................................................................................................... 8-14

8.2.9 Test..................................................................................................................................... 8-14

8.2.10 Clock ................................................................................................................................ 8-16

8.2.11 Language ......................................................................................................................... 8-16

8.3 Understand LCD Display .............................................................................. 8-16


8.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 8-16

8.3.2 Display during Normal Operation ...................................................................................... 8-16

8.3.3 Display When Tripping ....................................................................................................... 8-17

8.3.4 Display under Abnormal condition ..................................................................................... 8-21

8.3.5 Display When Binary Input Status Changes ..................................................................... 8-22

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 8-a


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

8.3.6 Display Device Logs .......................................................................................................... 8-25

8.4 Keypad Operation ......................................................................................... 8-26


8.4.1 View Device Sampled Values ............................................................................................ 8-26

8.4.2 View Status of binary signals ............................................................................................. 8-26

8.4.3 View Device Records......................................................................................................... 8-27

8.4.4 View Device Setting ........................................................................................................... 8-27

8.4.5 Modify Device Setting ........................................................................................................ 8-28

8.4.6 Copy Protection Setting ..................................................................................................... 8-30

8.4.7 Print Device Records ......................................................................................................... 8-31

8.4.8 Switch Setting Group ......................................................................................................... 8-32

8.4.9 Delete Records .................................................................................................................. 8-33

8.4.10 Modify Device Clock ........................................................................................................ 8-34

8.4.11 View Module Information ................................................................................................. 8-35

8.4.12 Check Software Version .................................................................................................. 8-35

8.4.13 Communication Test ........................................................................................................ 8-36

8.4.14 Select Language .............................................................................................................. 8-36

List of Figures
Figure 8.1-1 Typical front panel of 8U chassis ......................................................................... 8-1

Figure 8.1-2 Keypad mounted on the front panel .................................................................... 8-2

Figure 8.1-3 Corresponding cable of the RJ45 port in the front panel .................................. 8-4

Figure 8.1-4 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102M ................................................... 8-5

Figure 8.2-1 Menu tree of PCS-915 ............................................................................................ 8-7

Figure 8.3-1 LCD display of single line diagram .................................................................... 8-17

Figure 8.3-2 LCD display 1 of trip report ................................................................................ 8-18

Figure 8.3-3 LCD display 2 of trip report and alarm report ................................................... 8-19

Figure 8.3-4 LCD display of alarm report ................................................................................ 8-21

Figure 8.3-5 Display of binary input change report ............................................................... 8-22

Figure 8.3-6 Display of control report ..................................................................................... 8-25

Figure 8.4-1 Display of inputting password............................................................................ 8-29

8-b PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

Figure 8.4-2 Display 1 of modifying settings.......................................................................... 8-30

Figure 8.4-3 Display 2 of modifying settings.......................................................................... 8-30

Figure 8.4-4 Display of copy settings...................................................................................... 8-31

Figure 8.4-5 Display of switching setting group .................................................................... 8-33

Figure 8.4-6 Display of deleting report.................................................................................... 8-34

Figure 8.4-7 Display of modifying clock ................................................................................. 8-35

Figure 8.4-8 Display of selecting language ............................................................................ 8-37

List of Tables
Table 8.1-1 Definition of the 8-core cable ................................................................................. 8-4

Table 8.3-1 Operation elements list ......................................................................................... 8-19

Table 8.3-2 Binary input list ...................................................................................................... 8-22

Table 8.3-3 User operating event list ....................................................................................... 8-25

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 8-c


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

8.1 Human Machine Interface Overview

The human-machine interface is implemented by human-machine interface (HMI) module


which includes the following components:

 A 320×240 backlight LCD visible in dim lighting conditions for monitoring status, fault
diagnostics and setting, etc.

 LED indicators on the front panel for denoting the status of this protection operation.

 A 9-key keypad on the front panel of the device for full access to the device.

1 11
5
HEALTHY
2 12
PCS-915
MISC ALM
3 13 BUSBAR RELAY
4 14
P

5 15
GR

6 16
ENT
7 17
C
ES

8 18

9 19

10 20
1 3 4

Figure 8.1-1 Typical front panel of 8U chassis

Indication No. Description

1 A 320×240 dots liquid crystal display

2 20 LED indicators

3 A 9-key keypad

4 A multiplex RJ45 port for local communication with a PC

5 Logo, device type and name

8.1.1 Functionality
 The HMI module helps to view activated LED or a report display on the LCD after an

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 8-1


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

incident occurred.

 Operator is free to browse the data.

 Navigate through the menu commands to locate the interested data.

8.1.2 Keypad and Keys


The keypad and keys on the front panel of the device provide convenience to the operator to view
data or change the device’s setting.

The keypad contains nine keys with different function. Following figure shows the keypad and
keys.
P

+
GR

ENT
ESC

Figure 8.1-2 Keypad mounted on the front panel

No. Symbol Description

1 , , and , arrow buttons Move between selectable branches of the menu tree.

2 “+”, “-“ Change parameters or setting values.

3 ENT Provide Enter/Execute function.

4 GRP Setting Group selection.

5 ESC Exit the present level in the menu tree.

NOTICE!

Any setting change shall be confirmed by pressing “+”, “”, “”, “-“, “ENT” in
sequence.

Any report deletion shall be executed by pressing “+”, “-“, “+”, “-“, “ENT” in sequence.

8.1.3 LED Indications


20 LED indicators are available for PCS-915, the 20 LED indicators are, from top to bottom,
operation (HEALTHY), self-supervision (MISC ALM), others are configurable, please refer to
Chapter 9 “Configurable Function” for details.

A brief explanation about some common LED indicators has been listed as bellow.

LED Display Description

When the device is out of service or any hardware error is detected


HEALTHY Off
during self-check.

8-2 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

LED Display Description

Green Lit when the device is in service and ready for operation.

Off When device in normal operating condition.


MISC ALM
Yellow Lit when other abnormality occurs.

Off When the device is in normal operating condition.


CT/VT ALM
Yellow Lit when VT circuit failure or CT circuit failure occurs.

Off When the device is in normal operating condition.


DS ALM
Yellow Lit when disconnector position is abnormal

Off When the device is in normal operating condition.


BBP TRIP
Red Lit when busbar differential protection operates to trip.

Off When the device is in normal operating condition.


BFP TRIP
Red Lit when breaker failure protection operates to trip.

Off When the device is in normal operating condition.


MISC TRIP Lit when misc operation signal (Op_MISC) is issued. Please refer to
Red
Section 8.3.3.

 The “HEALTHY” LED can only be turned on by energizing the device again to restart the
relay.

 “xx ALM” LED is turned on when corresponding abnormalities mentioned above occurs
and turned off if the abnormalities are removed except for CT circuit failure alarm. CT
circuit failure alarm can be reset when the failure is removed and the device is rebooted
or energize the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] or press “ESC” first then “ENT”
simultaneously

 The “xx TRIP” LED is turned on and latched once any protection element operates. The
“xx TRIP” LED can be turned off by energizing the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg].

8.1.4 Front Communication Port


There is a multiplex RJ45 port on the front panel. This port can be used as an RS-232 serial port
as well as a twisted-pair ethernet port. As shown in the following figure, a customized cable is
applied for debugging via this multiplex RJ45 port.

P2

P1

P3

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 8-3


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

Figure 8.1-3 Corresponding cable of the RJ45 port in the front panel

In the above figure and the following table:

P1: To connect the multiplex RJ45 port. An 8-core cable is applied here.

P2: To connect the twisted-pair ethernet port of the computer.

P3: To connect the RS-232 serial port of the computer.

The definition of the 8-core cable in the above figure is introduced in the following table.

Table 8.1-1 Definition of the 8-core cable

Terminal Device side Computer side


Core color Function
No. (Left) (Right)
1 Orange & white TX+ of the ethernet port P1-1 P2-1
2 Orange TX- of the ethernet port P1-2 P2-2
3 Green & white RX+ of the ethernet port P1-3 P2-3
4 Blue TXD of the RS-232 serial port P1-4 P3-2
5 Brown & white RXD of the RS-232 serial port P1-5 P3-3
6 Green RX- for the ethernet port P1-6 P2-6
7 Blue & white P1-7
The ground connection of the RS-232 port. P3-5
8 Brown P1-8

8.1.5 Ethernet Port Setup


MON plug-in module is equipped with two or four 100Base-TX Ethernet interface, takes NR1102M
as an example, as shown in Figure 8.1-4. Its rear view and the definition of terminals.

The Ethernet port can be used to communication with PC via auxiliary software (PCS-Explorer)
after connecting the protection device with PC, so as to fulfill on-line function (please refer to the
instruction manual of PCS-Explorer). At first, the connection between the protection device and PC
must be established. Through setting the IP address and subnet mask of corresponding Ethernet
interface in the menu “Settings→Device Setup→Comm Settings”, it should be ensured that the
protection device and PC are in the same network segment. For example, setting the IP address
and subnet mask of network A. (using network A to connect with PC)

PC: IP address is set as “198.87.96.102”, subnet mask is set as “255.255.255.0”

The IP address and subnet mask of protection device should be [IP_LAN1]= 198.87.96.XXX,
[Mask_LAN1]=255.255.255.0, [En_LAN1]=1. (XXX can be any value from 0 to 255 except 102)

If the logic setting [En_LAN1] is non-available, it means that network A is always enabled. If using
other Ethernet port, for example, Ethernet B, the logic setting [En_LAN2] must be set as “1”.

8-4 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

NR1102M

ETHERNET

Network A

Network B

ETHERNET

Network C

Network D

SYN+
SYN-
SGND

RTS
TXD
SGND

Figure 8.1-4 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102M

8.2 Understand the HMI Menu Tree

8.2.1 Overview
Pressing “▲” at any running interface can return to the main menu. Select different submenu by
“▲” and “▼”. Enter the selected submenu by pressing “ENT” or “►”. Press “◄” and return to the
previous menu. Press “ESC” and exit the main menu directly. For fast return to the command
menu, one command menu will be recorded in the quick menu after its first execution. Up to five
latest menu commands can be recorded in the quick menu. by “first in first out” principle. It is
arranged from top to bottom and in accordance with the execution order of command menus.
Press “▲” to enter the main menu, the interface is shown in the following diagram:

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 8-5


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

Quick Menu

Language

Main Menu

If the protective device is powered for the first time, there is no recorded shortcut menu. Press “▲”
to enter the main menu with the interface as shown in the following diagram:

Language

Clock

Test

Information

Local Cmd

Print

Settings

Records

Status
Measurements

8-6 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

Main Menu

Measurements Settings Local Cmd

Measurements1 System Settings Reset Target


Prot Settings Trig Oscillograph
Measured Values
Download
Phase Angle BBP Settings
Clear Counter
Cal Values 50DZ Settings
Confirm Disconnector
BC BFP Settings
Measurements2 Fdr BFP Settings
Measured Values SOTF Settings
Information
Phase Angle OC Settings
Cal Values PD Settings Version Info
Copy Settings Board Info

Logic Links
Status
Test
Function Links
Inputs GOOSE Send Links Device Test
Prot Inputs GOOSE Recv Links
Disturb Events
Bay Inputs Device Setup
All Test
Function Inputs Device Settings Select Test
Comm Settings
FD Inputs Superv Events
Label Settings
All Test
Bay Inputs
Print Select Test
Function Inputs
Device Info IO Events
GOOSE Inputs
Settings All Test
Contact Inputs
System Settings Select Test
Superv State Prot Settings GOOSE Testing
Prot Superv BBP Settings
Internal Signal
Prot Bay Superv 50DZ Settings
BC BFP Settings Zone Cal BI
Prot Misc Superv
Fdr BFP Settings
Disturb Items
FD Superv SOTF Settings
GOOSE Comm Counter
OC Settings
FD Bay Superv SV Comm Counter
PD Settings
FD Misc Superv
All Settings
GOOSE Superv
Logic Links Clock
SV Superv
MiscBrd Superv Function Links
GOOSE Send Links Language
Logic Links State GOOSE Recv Links
Function Links All Settings
GOOSE Send Links Device Setup
GOOSE Recv Links
Device Settings
Comm Settings
Label Settings
Records All Settings

Disturb Records All Settings


Superv Events Latest Chgd Settings
IO Events
Disturb Records
Device Logs
Superv Events
Clear Records
IO Events
Device Status
Waveforms

Diff Wave
Bay Wave 1
Bay Wave 2
Bay Wave 3
Bay Wave 4
Bay Wave 5
Bay Wave 6

IEC103 Info
Cancel Print

Figure 8.2-1 Menu tree of PCS-915

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 8-7


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

Under the main interface, press “▲” to enter the main menu, and select submenu by pressing “▲”,
“▼” and “ENT”. The command menu adopts a tree shaped content structure. The above diagram
provides the integral structure and all the submenus under menu tree of the protection device.

This is the maximized menu of PCS-915, for a specific project, if some function is not available,
the corresponding submenu will hidden.

8.2.2 Measurements
This menu is used to display real time AC voltage and AC current sampled values of the protective
device. These data can help users to acquaint the operation condition of the protective device.
This menu comprises following submenus. Please refer to Section 5.2 about the details of
sampled values.

No. Item Description

1 Measurements1 Display sampled values on protection DSP module.

2 Measurements2 Display sampled values on fault detector DSP module.

8.2.2.1 Measurements1

The submenu “Measurements1” has following submenus.

No. Item Description

1 Measured Values Display measured analog values on protection DSP module.

2 Phase Angle Display phase angles on protection DSP module.

3 Cal Values Display measured values for debugging on protection DSP module.

8.2.2.2 Measurements2

The submenu “Measurements2” has following lower submenus.

No. Item Description

1 Measured Values Display measured analog values on fault detector DSP module.

2 Phase Angle Display phase angles on fault detector DSP module.

3 Cal Values Display measured values for debugging on fault detector DSP module.

8.2.3 Status
This menu is used to display real time binary inputs and alarm signals of the protective device.
These data can help users to acquaint the operation condition of the protective device. This menu
comprises following submenus. Please refer to Section 8.3.5 about the details of binary inputs and
Section 4.5 about the details of alarm signals.

No. Item Description

1 Inputs Display the status of binary inputs

2 Superv State Display the status of alarm signals

3 Logic Links State Display the status of logic links

8-8 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

8.2.3.1 Inputs

The submenu “Inputs” has following submenus.

No. Item Description

1 GOOSE Inputs Display the status of GOOSE binary inputs

Display the status of binary inputs that used for calculation of protection DSP
2 Prot Inputs
module

Display the status of binary inputs that used for calculation of fault detector
3 FD Inputs
DSP module

Display the status of other binary inputs (such as time synchronizing binary
4 Contact Inputs input, printing binary input, maintenance binary input, resetting binary input
and opto binary inputs).

(1) The submenu “Prot Inputs” includes the following command menus.

No. Item Description

1 Bay Inputs Display the status of binary inputs about each bay on protection DSP module.

Display the status of function enabling binary inputs on protection DSP


2 Function Input
module.

(2) The submenu “FD Inputs” includes the following command menus.

No. Item Description

Display the status of binary inputs about each bay on fault detector DSP
1 Bay Inputs
module.

Display the status of function enabling binary inputs on fault detector DSP
2 Function Input
module.

8.2.3.2 Superv State

The submenu “Superv State” has following submenus.

No. Item Description

1 Prot Superv Display the status of self-supervision signals on protection DSP module

2 FD Superv Display the status of self-supervision signals on fault detector DSP module

3 GOOSE Superv Display the status of GOOSE self-supervision signals

4 SV Superv Display the status of SV self-supervision signals

5 MiscBrd Superv Display the status of self-supervision signals of modules of process layer

The submenu “Prot Superv” includes the following command menus.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 8-9


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

No. Item Description

Display the status of self-supervision signals about each bay on protection


1 Prot Bay Superv
DSP module.

Display the status of other self-supervision signals on protection DSP


2 Prot Misc Superv
module.

The submenu “FD Superv” includes the following command menus.

No. Item Description

Display the status of self-supervision signals about each bay on fault detector
1 FD Bay Superv
DSP module.

Display the status of other self-supervision signals on fault detector DSP


2 FD Misc Superv
module.

8.2.3.3 Logic Links State

The submenu “Logic Links State” has following submenus.

No. Item Description

1 Function Links Display the status of function links.

2 GOOSE Send Links Display the status of GOOSE sending links.

3 GOOSE Recv Links Display the status of GOOSE receiving links.

8.2.4 Records
This menu displays protection tripping report, self-supervision report, binary input change report
and control report. The protective device can store 1024 pieces of recorders for each kind of report
in non-volatile memory.

No. Item Description

1 Disturb Records View the tripping report

2 Superv Events View the self-supervision report

3 IO Events View the binary input change report

4 Device Logs View the control report

5 Clear Records Clear all the device records

8.2.5 Settings
This submenu is used to browse, modify and set all settings including device settings,
communication parameters, label settings, function links, GOOSE links, system settings and
protection settings.

This menu includes the command menus and submenus as follows:

The submenu “Settings” includes the following command menus.

8-10 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

No. Item Function description

1 System Settings Set the system settings

2 Prot Settings Set the protection settings

3 Logic Links Includes function links and GOOSE links

4 Device Setup Set the settings related to device setup

8.2.5.1 Device Setup

The submenu “Device Setup” includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description

1 Device Settings Set the device settings

2 Comm Settings Set the communication settings.

3 Label Settings Set the label settings of each protected element.

8.2.5.2 Logic Links

The submenu “Logic Links” includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description

1 Function Links Set the function links.

2 GOOSE Send Links Set the GOOSE sending links.

3 GOOSE Recv Links Set the GOOSE receiving links.

8.2.5.3 Prot Settings

The submenu “Prot Settings” includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description

1 BBP Settings Set the settings about busbar differential protection

2 50DZ Settings Set the settings about dead zone fault protection

3 BC BFP Settings Set the settings about BC/BS breaker failure protection

4 Fdr BFP Settings Set the settings about feeder breaker failure protection

5 SOTF Settings Set the settings about switch-onto-fault protection

6 OC Settings Set the settings about overcurrent protection

7 PD Settings Set the settings about pole disagreement protection

8 Copy Settings To copy protection settings from one group to another group

8.2.6 Print
This menu is used to print the self-supervision report, binary input change report, waveform and
the information related with settings, fault report and 103 protocol, and so on.

This menu includes the command menus and submenus as follows:

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 8-11


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

No. Item Description

1 Device Info Print the description information of protective device.

Print settings, includes device settings, communication parameters, label


settings, function links, GOOSE links, system settings, and protection
2 Settings
settings. It can print by different classifications as well as printing all settings
of the device. Besides, it can also print out the latest changed setting item.

3 Disturb Records Print trip reports.

4 Superv Events Print self-check alarm and device operation abnormal alarm reports.

5 IO Events Print status change of binary signal.

6 Device Status Print all the values measured by the device

7 Waveforms Print recorded waveforms.

Print 103 Protocol information, including function type (FUN), information


8 IEC103 Info serial number (INF), general classification service group number, and
channel number (ACC).

9 Cancel Print Cancel the print command

8.2.6.1 Settings

The submenu “Settings” includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description

1 System Settings Print the system settings.

2 Prot Settings Print the protection settings

3 Logic Links Print the function links or GOOSE links

4 Device Setup Print the settings related to device setup

Print the content of all settings including device setups, system settings,
5 All Settings
protection settings and logic links.

6 Latest Chgd Settings Print the content of the latest changed setting

(1) The submenu “Device Setup” includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description

1 Device Settings Print the device settings.

2 Comm Settings Print the communication settings.

3 Label Settings Print the label settings of protective device.

4 All Settings Print all the settings related to device setup

(2) The submenu “Logic Links” includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description

1 Function Links Print the function links.

2 GOOSE Send Links Print the GOOSE sending links.

8-12 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

No. Item Function description

3 GOOSE Recv Links Print the GOOSE receiving links.

4 All Settings Print the all the logic links

(3) The submenu “Prot Settings” includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description

1 BBP Settings Print the settings about busbar differential protection

2 50DZ Settings Print the settings about dead zone fault protection

3 BC BFP Settings Print the settings about BC/BS breaker failure protection

4 Fdr BFP Settings Print the settings about feeder breaker failure protection

5 SOTF Settings Print the settings about switch-onto-fault protection

6 OC Settings Print the settings about overcurrent protection

7 PD Settings Print the settings about pole disagreement protection

8 All Settings Print the all the protection settings

8.2.6.2 Waveforms

The submenu “Waveforms” has following submenus.

No. Item Description

1 Diff Wave To print differential current waveforms and busbar voltage waveforms

2 Bay Wave 1 To print current waveforms of Bay 01~04

3 Bay Wave 2 To print current waveforms of Bay 05~08

4 Bay Wave 3 To print current waveforms of Bay 09~12

5 Bay Wave 4 To print current waveforms of Bay 13~16

6 Bay Wave 5 To print current waveforms of Bay 17~20

7 Bay Wave 6 To print current waveforms of Bay 21~24

8.2.7 Local Cmd


This menu is used to reset the latched tripping relay, protection device signal lamp and LCD
display. It can record the currently acquired waveform of the protection device under normal
condition for printing and uploading to substation automatic system (SAS). Besides, it can send
out the request of program download and clear the communication statistic information about
GOOSE, SV and optical fibre.

This menu includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description

1 Reset Target Reset the local signal, the signal indicator lamp and the LCD display.

2 Trig Oscillograph Trigger waveform recording.

3 Download Send out the download request.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 8-13


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

4 Clear Counter Clear the communication statistic information about GOOSE and SV

5 Confirm Disconnector Confirm the disconnector position

8.2.8 Information
In this menu the LCD displays current working state of each intelligent module and software
information of DSP module, MON module and HMI module.

This menu includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description

Display software information of DSP module, MON module and HMI module,
1 Version Info which consists of version, creating time of software, CRC codes and
management sequence number.

2 Board Info Monitor the current working state of each intelligent module.

8.2.9 Test
This menu is used for developers to debug the program and for engineers to maintain the device.
It can be used to check module information and item fault message, and fulfill the communication
test function. It’s also used to generate all kinds of report or event to transmit to the SAS without
any external input, so as to debug the communication on site.

This menu includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description

Automatically generate all kinds of message to transmit to the backstage,


1 Device Test including tripping, self-check and binary signal transmission. It can realize
the transmission of messages of different classification.

Display the calculated virtual binary input of bay n for differential circuit and
2 Internal Signal
relevant information about each protected bay

3 Disturb Items Check the fault report one by one.

4 GOOSE Comm Counter Display the communication statistic information of GOOSE

5 SV Comm Counter Display the communication statistic information of SV

8.2.9.1 Device Test

The submenu “Device Test” has following submenus.

No. Item Description

View the relevant information about tripping report (only used for debugging
1 Disturb Events
persons)

View the relevant information about alarm report (only used for debugging
2 Superv Events
persons)

View the relevant information about binary input change report (only used
3 IO Events
for debugging persons)

8-14 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

No. Item Description

View the relevant information about GOOSE (only used for debugging
4 GOOSE Testing
persons)

The submenu “Disturb Events” includes the following command menus.

No. Item Description

1 All Test Ordinal test of all protection elements

2 Select Test Selective test of corresponding classification

The submenu “Superv Events” includes the following command menus.

No. Item Description

1 All Test Ordinal test of all self-supervisions

2 Select Test Selective test of corresponding classification

The submenu “IO Events” includes the following command menus.

No. Item Description

1 All Test Ordinal test of change of all binary inputs

2 Select Test Selective test of corresponding classification

8.2.9.2 Internal Signal

The submenu “Internal Signal” has following submenus.

No. Item Description

1 Zone Cal BI Display the calculated virtual binary input of bay n for differential circuit

The submenu “Zone Cal BI” will display the calculated virtual binary input of bay n for differential
circuit. It can help users to know the current composition of differential current. If the value of the
calculated virtual binary input of bay n for differential circuit is “1”, it means that the current of bay n
is included in differential current.

Item Description

@Bayn.VBI_CZ Calculated binary input of bay n for check zone differential circuit

Calculated binary input of bay n for discriminating zone differential circuit of


@Bayn.VBI_DZ_@BBx
BBx

Calculated binary input of CT1 of bay n for check zone differential circuit (only
@Bayn.VBI_CT1_CZ
for double-CTs BC/BS)

Calculated binary input of CT2 of bay n for check zone differential circuit (only
@Bayn.VBI_CT2_CZ
for double-CTs BC/BS)

Calculated binary input of CT1 of bay n for discriminating zone differential


@Bayn.VBI_CT1_DZ_@BBx
circuit of BBx (only for double-CTs BC/BS)

@Bayn.VBI_CT2_DZ_@BBx Calculated binary input of CT2 of bay n for discriminating zone differential

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 8-15


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

circuit of BBx (only for double-CTs BC/BS)

8.2.10 Clock
The time of internal clock can be viewed in “Clock” option. The time is displayed in the form
YY-MM-DD and hh:mm:ss. All values are presented with digits and can be modified.

8.2.11 Language
This menu is mainly used for set LCD display language.

8.3 Understand LCD Display

8.3.1 Overview
There are five kinds of LCD display, system topology if the protective device is under the normal
condition, tripping reports, alarm reports, binary input changing reports and control reports.
Tripping reports and alarm reports will be continuously displayed until operators energizing the
resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg]. User can press “ESC” first then “ENT” simultaneously to switch
view of trip reports, alarm reports and the SLD display. Binary change reports will be displayed
before returning to the previous display interface automatically. Control reports will not pop up and
can only be viewed by navigating the corresponding menu.

8.3.2 Display during Normal Operation


After the protection device is powered and enters initiating interface, it takes 30 seconds to
complete the initialization of protection device. During the initialization, the “HEALTHY” indicator of
the protection device goes out.

Under normal condition, the LCD will display the interface similar as Figure 8.3-1. For different
busbar arrangements, the displayed interfaces are different. The LCD displays in white color
backlight which is activated if there is any keyboard operation, and is extinguished automatically
after 60 seconds without any operation.

8-16 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

Data and time of equipment clock

Communication address Addr:098 2010-09-28 10:10:00 Group:01 Active group number

Label of BB No.1
Fdr01 Fdr03 Fdr05 Fdr07 Label of each feeder
Label of BC BC
0.01A 0.01A 0.00A 0.00A Phase-A current of each feeder
Phase-A current of BC 0.01A

Disconnector (Closed)
BB1

Bus Coupler
means BC is open BB2
Disconnector (Open)
means BC is closed
0.01A 0.01A 0.00A 0.01A
Fdr02 Fdr04 Fdr06 Fdr08
Label of BB No.2

Three-phase voltage of BB No.1 U1: 57.70V 57.70V 57.70V

Three-phase voltage of BB No.2 U2: 57.70V 57.70V 57.70V

Three-phase differential current DI: 0.00A 0.00A 0.01A

Figure 8.3-1 LCD display of single line diagram

The middle part of Figure 8.3-1 displays the single line diagram of busbar with feeders whose CT
correction coefficient is not zero. The label of each feeder (at most 6 digits or characters, please
refer to label settings in Section 7.3) and feeder current is shown by the side of the corresponding
feeder. System frequency (Freq), three-phase busbar voltages (Ux), check zone differential
current (DI), discriminating zone differential current of BBx (DIx) may be shown under the single
line diagram (x=1, 2, 3 or 4).

If the protective device receives the IRIG-B signal for time synchronization and can correctly
decode it, “S” will be displayed on the top left corner of LCD.

If all feeders can not displayed in one page, the single line diagram will move automatically and
circularly from right to left if no key is pressed, and will move to left quickly by pressing key “◄”
continuously, move to right quickly by pressing key “►” continuously.

The displayed content contains: the realtime date and time of the protection device (with a format
of yy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss:), realtime valid setting group number, three-phase current and voltage
sampling values on each side and differential current etc.

8.3.3 Display When Tripping


This protection device can store 32 fault reports and 32 fault waveforms. When there is protection
element operating, the LCD will automatically display the latest fault report. PCS-915IC can
provide two different LCD display interfaces based on the availability of self-check report.

As shown in Figure 8.3-2, if the self-check report is not provided, the display interface will only
show the fault report.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 8-17


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

NO.005 2010-04-28 07:10:00:200 Trip

0000ms Pkp_FD
0006ms A 87B.Op_TrpBB1_DPFC
BC Fdr02 Fdr03 Fdr06
Fdr08

0006ms 87B.Op_TrpBC

Id_max 1.05A

Figure 8.3-2 LCD display 1 of trip report

NO.005 2010-04-28 07:10:00:200 Trip: shows the SOE number, the time when fault detector
picks up (the format is year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond) and the title of the
report.

0000ms Pkp_FD shows the fault detector of protection element and the
operation time of fault detector is fixed at 0ms.

0006ms A 87B.Op_TrpBB1_DPFC

BC Fdr02 Fdr03 Fdr06


Fdr08 shows the relative operation time of protection element,
protection elements and trip elements.
0006ms 87B.Op_TrpBC shows the relative operation time and operation element
of protection element

Id_max 1.05A shows the maximum differential current

If the fault report and the self-check alarm report occur simultaneously, as shown in Figure 8.3-2,
the upper half part on the screen is fault report, and the lower half part is self-check report. The
fault report includes fault report number, fault name, generating time of fault report (with a format
of year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond), protection element and tripping element.
If there is protection element, the relative time will be displayed on the basis of fault detector
element and fault phase. If the upper half part on the screen is not big enough to list all the
protection elements and tripping elements, the report will be automatically displayed in a cycle
without pressing any key on the front panel.

The displayed content of the lower half part is the alarm element. If the alarm element is more than
one, all the alarm elements will be displayed in a cycle.

8-18 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

NO.005 2010-04-28 07:10:00:200 Trip

0000ms Pkp_FD
0006ms A 87B.Op_TrpBB1_DPFC
BC Fdr02 Fdr03 Fdr06
Fdr08

0006ms 87B.Op_TrpBC

Id_max 1.05A

Superv Events
Alm_Maintenance

Figure 8.3-3 LCD display 2 of trip report and alarm report

All the trip information are listed in the following tables:

1. Operation elements

Table 8.3-1 Operation elements list

No. Item Description

1 87B.Op_Dly1_Biased Stage 1 of backup protection operates.

2 87B.Op_Dly2_Biased Stage 2 of backup protection operates.

3 87B.Op_Trp@BBx_Biased Steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.

4 87B.Op_Trp@BBx_DPFC DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.

5 87B.Op_A_Dly1_Biased Phase-A stage 1 of backup protection operates.

6 87B.Op_B_Dly1_Biased Phase-B stage 1 of backup protection operates.

7 87B.Op_C_Dly1_Biased Phase-C stage 1 of backup protection operates.

8 87B.Op_A_Dly2_Biased Phase-A stage 2 of backup protection operates.

9 87B.Op_B_Dly2_Biased Phase-B stage 2 of backup protection operates.

10 87B.Op_C_Dly2_Biased Phase-C stage 2 of backup protection operates.

11 87B.Op_A_Trp@BBx_Biased Phase-A steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.

12 87B.Op_B_Trp@BBx_Biased Phase-B steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.

13 87B.Op_C_Trp@BBx_Biased Phase-C steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.

14 87B.Op_A_Trp@BBx_DPFC Phase-A DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.

15 87B.Op_B_Trp@BBx_DPFC Phase-B DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.

16 87B.Op_C_Trp@BBx_DPFC Phase-C DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.

17 87B.Op_Biased Steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip any busbar.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 8-19


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

No. Item Description

18 87B.Op_DPFC DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip any busbar.

DPFC busbar differential protection or steady-state busbar differential


19 87B.Op_Trp@BBx
protection operates to trip BBx.

DPFC busbar differential protection or steady-state busbar differential


20 87B.Op
protection operates to trip any busbar.

Busbar differential protection operates to trip bay n (only for BC or BS


21 87B.Op_Trp@Bayn
bay).

Phase-A busbar differential protection operates to trip bay n (only for BC


22 87B.Op_A_Trp@Bayn
or BS bay).

Phase-B busbar differential protection operates to trip bay n (only for BC


23 87B.Op_B_Trp@Bayn
or BS bay).

Phase-C busbar differential protection operates to trip bay n (only for BC


24 87B.Op_C_Trp@Bayn
or BS bay).

25 @Bayn.50DZ.Op Dead zone fault protection of bay n operates.

Dead zone fault protection or breaker failure protection of bay n


26 @Bayn.Op_TT
operates to initiate transfer trip to remote circuit breaker.

27 @Bayn.50SOTF.Op_Trp SOTF protection of bay n operates (only for BC or BS bay).

28 @Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp Phase overcurrent protection of bay n operates.

29 @Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp Ground overcurrent protection of bay n operates.

30 @Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp Pole disagreement protection of bay n operates.

31 50BF.Op_Trp@BBx Breaker failure protection operates to trip BBx.

Breaker failure protection of bay n operates to trip busbar zone (includes


32 @Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBB
BC/BS bay and feeder bay).

33 @Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBC Breaker failure protection of bay n operates to trip BC/BS.

34 @Bayn.50BF.Op_ReTrp Breaker failure protection of bay n operates to re-trip the breaker.

Breaker failure protection operates to trip breaker of bay n (only for BC


35 50BF.Op_Trp@Bayn
or BS bay).

BC/BS breaker failure protection or feeder breaker failure protection


36 50BF.Op
operates.

Misc operation signal, it can be used to trigger LED indicator (MISC


TRIP). The signal will be issued if any of following operation signals is
issued: 87B.Op_Trp@BCy, 87B.Op_Trp@BSz, @Bayn.Op_TT,
@BCy.50SOTF.Op_Trp, @BSz.50SOTF.Op_Trp,
37 Op_Misc
@Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp, @Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp, @Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp,
@BCy.50BF.Op_TrpBB, @BSz.50BF.Op_TrpBB,
@Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBC, @Bayn.50DZ.Op, 50BF.Op_Trp@BCy,
@Bayn.50BF.Op_ReTrp, 50BF.Op_Trp@BSz.

38 Op_Prot Any of protective element operates.

8-20 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

No. Item Description

39 Op_Prot_Latched Any of protective element operates (latched signal).

40 FD.Pkp Fault detector picks up.

41 TrigDFR_Man Waveform recording function is triggered manually.

42 TrigDFR_Rmt Waveform recording function is triggered remotely.

43 BI_TrigDFR Waveform recording function is triggered by corresponding binary input.

Sampled values of Bx (GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.x)


44 Bx.TrigDFR_DataErr_SV
errors to trigger waveform recording function

2. Trip elements

No. Item Description

1 @Bayn Trip circuit breaker of bay n

Dead zone fault protection or breaker failure protection of bay n operates to


2 @Bayn.Op_TT
initiate transfer trip to remote circuit breaker

8.3.4 Display under Abnormal condition


This protection device can store 1024 self-check reports. During the running of protection device,
the self-check report of hardware errors or system running abnormity will be displayed
immediately.

Superv Events NO.26


2010-04-29 09:18:47:500ms

Alm_Maintenance 0 1

Figure 8.3-4 LCD display of alarm report

Superv Events shows the title of the report

Alm_Maintenance shows the content of abnormality alarm

If view the corresponding alarm report from the submenu “Superv Events” under the menu of

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 8-21


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

“Records”, the SOE number and the real time of the report will be indicated in the alarm report.

All the alarm elements have been listed in Chapter “Supervision”.

8.3.5 Display When Binary Input Status Changes


If the status of any binary changes or any logic link is modified, as shown in Figure 8.3-5, a new
report on the state changes will be automatically displayed on LCD. PCS-915 can store 1024
binary input change reports. During the running of the device, the signals will be displayed at the
moment when the its state changes.

IO Events NO.26
2010-04-29 09:18:47:500ms

87B.BI_En 0 1

Figure 8.3-5 Display of binary input change report

IO Events NO.26 shows the number and the title of the report

2010-04-29 09:18:47:500 shows the date and time of the report occurred, the format is
year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond

87B.BI_En 0->1 shows the state change of binary input, including the binary input
name and the original state and final state

All the binary inputs are listed in the following tables:

Table 8.3-2 Binary input list

No. Item Description

1 BI_TimeSyn Binary input of time synchronization pulse

2 BI_Print Binary input of triggering printing

Binary input of blocking communication between equipment and


3 BI_Maintenance
substation automatic system (SAS) or remote terminal unit (RTU).

4 BI_RstTarg Binary input of resetting signal of protective equipment.

8-22 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

No. Item Description

5 87B.BI_ExtBlk External binary input of blocking busbar differential protection

6 @Bayn.BI_Cls Binary input of closing circuit breaker of bay n

7 @Bayn.62PD.BI_PD Binary input indicating breaker of bay n is in pole disagreement status

8 @Bayn.BI_BFI Three-phase breaker failure initiation binary input of bay n

9 @Bayn.BI_A_BFI Phase-A breaker failure initiation binary input of bay n

10 @Bayn.BI_B_BFI Phase-B breaker failure initiation binary input of bay n

11 @Bayn.BI_C_BFI Phase-C breaker failure initiation binary input of bay n

12 @Bayn.BI_ChkBFI Common breaker failure initiation binary input of bay n

Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element of breaker failure


13 50BF.BI_RlsVCE
protection

14 @Bayn.BI_89a_@BBx Normally open auxiliary contact of BBx disconnector of bay n

15 @Bayn.BI_89b_@BBx Normally closed auxiliary contact of BBx disconnector of bay n

16 @Bayn.BI_52a Normally open auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n

17 @Bayn.BI_52b Normally closed auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n

18 @Bayn.BI_A_52a Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n

19 @Bayn.BI_B_52a Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n

20 @Bayn.BI_C_52a Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay n

21 @Bayn.BI_A_52b Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n

22 @Bayn.BI_B_52b Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n

Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay


23 @Bayn.BI_C_52b
n

24 @Bayn.BI_89a_Byp_@BBx Normally open auxiliary contact of transfer bus disconnector of bay n

25 BI_ConfirmDS Disconnector position confirm binary input

26 BI_TrigDFR Trigger waveform recording binary input

27 87B.BI_En Binary input of enabling busbar differential protection

28 87B.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling busbar differential protection

Binary input indicating that two busbars are under the inter-connected
29 BI_En_IntLinkx
operation mode, if it is not configured, its default value is “0”

Binary input of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection (it is configured
when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and
30 Fdr.50DZ.BI_En
function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay”
is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))

Binary input of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n (it is
configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary
31 @Bayn.50DZ.BI_En
input and function link of a protective element is configured according to
each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))

32 50DZ.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling feeder dead zone fault protection

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 8-23


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

No. Item Description

Binary input of enabling BC/BS SOTF protection (it is configured when the
basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of
33 50SOTF.BI_En
a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as
“Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))

Binary input of enabling SOTF of BCy (it is configured when the basic
information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a
34 @BCy.50SOTF.BI_En
protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable”
(refer to Section 3.4))

Binary input of enabling SOTF of BSz (it is configured when the basic
information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a
35 @BSz.50SOTF.BI_En
protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable”
(refer to Section 3.4))

36 50SOTF.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling BC/BS SOTF protection

Binary input of enabling overcurrent protection (it is configured when the


basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of
37 50/51.BI_En
a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as
“Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))

Binary input of enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n (it is


configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary
38 @Bayn.50/51P.BI_En
input and function link of a protective element is configured according to
each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))

Binary input of enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n (it is


configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary
39 @Bayn.50/51G.BI_En
input and function link of a protective element is configured according to
each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))

40 50/51.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling overcurrent protection

Binary input of enabling pole disagreement protection (it is configured


when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and
41 62PD.BI_En
function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay”
is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))

Binary input of enabling pole disagreement protection of bay n (it is


configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary
42 @Bayn.62PD.BI_En
input and function link of a protective element is configured according to
each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))

43 62PD.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling pole disagreement protection

44 50BF.BI_En Binary input of enabling feeder breaker failure protection

45 50BF.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling feeder breaker failure protection

Binary input indicating BC/BS breaker is used to substitute one of feeder


46 BI_En_BC_Byp
breakers

47 BI_En_RevCT_Byp Reverse the polarity mark of BC/BS CT when BC/BS breaker is used to

8-24 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

No. Item Description

substitute one of feeder breakers

8.3.6 Display Device Logs


This protection device can store 1024 pieces of the control report (i.e. user operating reports).
During the running of the protection device, the running report will be displayed after any operation
is conducted.

Device Logs NO.4


2010-04-29 10:18:47:569ms
Settings_Chgd

Figure 8.3-6 Display of control report

Device Logs NO. 4 shows the title and the number of the report

2010-04-29 10:18:47:569 shows the date and the time when the report is created, the format
is year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond

Settings_Chgd shows the state content of the user operation report.

User operating information listed below may be displayed.

Table 8.3-3 User operating event list

No. Message Description

1 Reboot The protective device has been reboot.

2 Reset_Target The protective device has been reset.

3 Settings_Chgd The settings of protective device have been changed.

4 ActiveGrp_Chgd Active setting group has been changed.

5 Report_Cleared All reports have been deleted. (User operating event can not be deleted)

6 Waveform_Cleared All waveforms have been deleted.

7 Process_Exit A subprocess has exited.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 8-25


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

No. Message Description

8 Fail_Setting_OvRange Any setting value is out of setting scope.

9 Alm_CommTest The relay is in test mode.

Mismatch between the configuration of plug-in boards and the designing


10 Fail_BoardConfig
drawing of an applied-specific project.

11 FD.Pkp Fault detector picks up.

12 TrigDFR_Man Waveform recording function is triggered manually.

13 TrigDFR_BI Waveform recording function is triggered by corresponding binary input

14 TrigDFR_Rmt Waveform recording function is triggered remotely

8.4 Keypad Operation

8.4.1 View Device Sampled Values


The operation is as follows:

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Measurements” menu, and then
press the “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu item, and then press
“ENT” to enter submenu.

4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one
display screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most).

5. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu.

6. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Measurements” menu).

8.4.2 View Status of binary signals


The operation is as follows:

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Status” menu, and then press the
“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu item, and then press
“ENT” to enter submenu.

4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one
display screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most).

5. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu.

6. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Status” menu).

8-26 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

8.4.3 View Device Records


The operation is as follows:

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Records” menu, and then press the
key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
key “ENT” to enter the submenu.

4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to page up/down.

5. Press the key “+” or “-” to select pervious or next record.

6. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu.

7. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Records” menu).

For the fault report, view the single item fault report by the command menu “Disturb Items”, and
the item fault report produces with change of any item of fault report. The item fault report can
save up to 1024 events.

The operation is as follows:

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Test” menu, and then press the key
“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Disturb Items”,
and then press the “ENT” to enter the menu.

4. Press the key “+” or “-” to select pervious or next record.

5. Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Test” menu).

8.4.4 View Device Setting


Follow the steps below to view the device settings:

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Settings” menu, and then press
“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press
“ENT” to enter the menu.

4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor.

5. Press the key “+” or “-” to page up/down.

6. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 8-27


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

7. Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings”).

NOTICE!

If the displayed information exceeds 14 lines, the scroll bar will appear on the right side
of the LCD to indicate the quantity of all displayed information of the command menu
and the relative location of information where the current cursor points at.

8.4.5 Modify Device Setting


The operation is as follows:

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Settings” menu, and then press
“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press
“ENT” to enter the menu.

4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor.

5. Press the key “+” or “-” to page up/down.

6. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu.

7. Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings” ).

8. Select the command menu “Device Settings”, “Label Settings”, or “Comm


Settings”, users need to enter the submenu “Device Setup” firstly. Select the
command menu “BBP Settings”, “50DZ Settings”, “BC BFP Settings”, “Fdr BFP
Settings”, “SOTF Settings”, “OC Settings” or “PD Settings”, users need to enter the
submenu “Prot Settings” firstly. Select the command menu “Function Links”,
“GOOSE Send Links” or “GOOSE Recv Links”, users need to enter the submenu
“Logic Links” firstly.

Following takes modification of system settings as an example.

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Settings” menu, and then press
“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “System
Settings”, and then press “ENT” to enter the menu.

4. Move the cursor to the setting item to be modified, and then press the key “ENT”.

5. Press the key “+” or “-” to modify the value (if the modified value is multi-bit, press
the key “◄” or “►” to move the cursor to the digit bit, and then press the “+” or “-” to
modify the value), press the key “ESC” to cancel the modification and return to the
displayed interface of the command menu “System Settings”. Press the key “ENT” to
automatically exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command

8-28 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

menu “System Settings”).

6. Move the cursor to continue modifying other setting items. After all setting values are
modified, press the key “◄”, “►” or “ESC”, and the LCD will display “Save or Not?”.
Directly press the “ESC” or press the key “◄” or “►” to move the cursor. Select the
“Cancel”, and then press the key “ENT” to automatically exit this menu (returning to
the displayed interface of the command menu “System Settings”).

7. Press the key “◄” or “►” to move the cursor. Select “No” and press the key “ENT”, all
modified setting item will restore to its original value, exit this menu (returning to the
menu “Settings”).

8. Press the key “◄” or “►” to move the cursor to select “Yes”, and then press the key
“ENT”, the LCD will display password input interface.

Password:

Figure 8.4-1 Display of inputting password

9. Input a 4-bit password (“+”, “◄”, “▲” or “-”). If the password is incorrect, continue
inputting it, then press “ESC” to exit the password input interface and return to the
displayed interface of the command menu “System Settings”. If the password is
correct, LCD will display “Save Settings…”, and then exit this menu (returning to the
displayed interface of the command menu “System Settings”). The device setting
modification is completed.

NOTICE!

The above modification instructions are available for all setting items.

NOTICE!

After modifying the settings in menu “System Settings” or “Prot Settings”, the
“HEALTHY” indicator of the protection device will go out, and the protection device will
automatically restart and re-check the settings. The device will be blocked until the
check process is finished. If selecting the command menu of protection element such
as “BBP Settings”, the LCD will display the following interface:

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 8-29


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

2. BBP Settings

Please Select Group for Config

Active Group: 01

Selected Group: 01

Figure 8.4-2 Display 1 of modifying settings

Then move the cursor to the modified value and press “ENT” to enter. For example, if the setting
[87B.I_Bias] need to be modified, press the “ENT” to enter and the LCD will display the interface
shown in Figure 8.4-3. Press the “+” or “-” to modify the value and then press the “ENT” to enter.

87B.I_Pkp

Current Value 5.00

Modified Value 005.00

Min Value 0.05

Max Value 20.00

Figure 8.4-3 Display 2 of modifying settings

10. If selecting the other menus, move the cursor to the setting to be modified, and then
press the “ENT”.

8.4.6 Copy Protection Setting


The operation is as follows:

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu;

8-30 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Settings” menu, and then press the
key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu;

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Protection
Settings”, and then press the key “ENT” or “►” to enter the command menu;

4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Copy Settings”,
and then press the key “ENT” to enter the menu. The following display will be shown on
LCD.

Copy Settings

Active Group: 01

Copy To Group: 02

Figure 8.4-4 Display of copy settings

Press the key “+” or “-” to modify the value. Press the key “ESC”, and return to the
menu “Settings”. Press the “ENT”, the LCD will display the interface for password input,
if the password is incorrect, continue inputting it, press the key “ESC” to exit the
password input interface and return to the menu “Settings”. If the password is correct,
the LCD will display “Copy Settings Success!”, and exit this menu (returning to the menu
“Settings”).

8.4.7 Print Device Records


The operation is as follows:

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Print” menu, and then press the
“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
“ENT” to enter the menu.

 Selecting the “Disturb Records”, and then

Press the “+” or “-” to select pervious or next record. After pressing the key “ENT”,

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 8-31


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

the LCD will display “Start Printing... ”, and then automatically exit this menu
(returning to the menu “Print”). If the printer doesn’t complete its current print task
and re-start it for printing, the LCD will display “Printer Busy…”. Press the key “ESC”
to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Print”).

 Selecting the command menu “Superv Events” or “IO Events”, and then press the
key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor. Press the “+” or “-” to select the starting and
ending numbers of printing message. After pressing the key “ENT”, the LCD will
display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the
menu “Print”). Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Print”).

4. If selecting the command menu “IEC103 Info”, “Device Status” or “Device Info”, press
the key “ENT”, the LCD will display “Start printing..”, and then automatically exit this menu
(returning to the menu “Print”).

5. If selecting the “Settings”, press “ENT” or “►” to enter the submenu.

6. After entering the submenu “Settings”, press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor, and
then press the key “ENT” to print the corresponding default value. To select items to print:

Press the key “+” or “-” to select the setting group to print. After pressing the key “ENT”,
the LCD will display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to
the menu “Settings”). Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu
“Settings”).

7. After entering the submenu “Waveforms”, press the “+” or “-” to select the printed
waveform and press “ENT” to enter. With waveform data existing:

Press the key “+” or “-” to select pervious or next record. After pressing the key “ENT”,
the LCD will display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to
the menu “Waveforms”). If the printer does not complete its current print task and
re-start it for printing, and the LCD will display “Printer Busy…”. Press the key “ESC” to
exit this menu (returning to the menu “Waveforms”). If there is no any waveform data,
the LCD will display “No Waveform Data!”.

8.4.8 Switch Setting Group


The operation is as follows:

1. Exit the main menu.

2. Press the “GRP”.

8-32 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

Change Active Group

Active Group: 01

Change To Group: 02

Figure 8.4-5 Display of switching setting group

Press the “+” or “-” to modify the value, and then press the key “ESC” to exit this menu
(returning to the main menu). After pressing the key “ENT”, the LCD will display the password
input interface. If the password is incorrect, continue inputting it, and then press the key “ESC” to
exit the password input interface and return to its original state. If the password is correct, the
“HEALTHY” indicator of the protection device will go out, and the protection device will re-check
the protection setting. If the check doesn’t pass, the protection device will be blocked. If the check
is successful, the LCD will return to its original state.

8.4.9 Delete Records


The operation is as follows:

1. Exit the main menu.

2. Press the “+”, “-”, “+”, “-” and key “ENT”; Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu
(returning to the original state). Press the key “ENT” to carry out the deletion.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 8-33


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

Press <ENT> To Clear


Press <ESC> To Exit

Figure 8.4-6 Display of deleting report

NOTICE!

The operation of deleting report will delete all messages except for user operation
reports (i.e. control reports), including tripping reports, alarm reports and binary input
change reports. The deleted reports are IRRECOVERABLE, so the function shall be
used with great cautious.

8.4.10 Modify Device Clock


The operation is as follows:

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Clock” menu, and then press the key
“ENT” to enter clock display.

8-34 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

Clock

Year: 2010
Month: 04
Day: 28
Hour: 20
Minute: 59
Second: 14

Figure 8.4-7 Display of modifying clock

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the date or time to be modified.

4. Press the key “+” or “-”, to modify value, and then press the key “ENT” to save the
modification and return to the main menu.

5. Press the key “ESC” to cancel the modification and return to the main menu.

8.4.11 View Module Information


The operation is as follows:

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Information” menu, and then press
the key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Board Info”, and
then press the “ENT” to enter the menu.

4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the scroll bar.

5. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Information” menu).

8.4.12 Check Software Version


The operation is as follows:

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Information” menu, and then press
the key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Version Info”, and
then press the “ENT” to enter the menu.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 8-35


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the scroll bar.

5. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Information” menu).

8.4.13 Communication Test


The operation is as follows:

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Test” menu, and then press the key
“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

3. Select the command menu “Disturb Events”, “Superv Events” or “IO Events”, users
need to enter the submenu “Device Test” firstly.

4. Select any command menu (takes “Disturb Events” as an example), press the key
“ENT”, two options “All Test” and “Select Test” are provided.

5. If “Select Test” is selected, press the key “ENT”. Press the “+” or “-” to page up/down,
and then press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the scroll bar. Move the cursor to select the
corresponding protection element. Press the key “ENT” to execute the communication
test of this protection element, the substation automatic system (SAS) will receive the
corresponding fault report, and view the fault report produced by communication test in
the command menu “Disturb Items”.

6. If “All Test” is selected, press the key “ENT” to execute the communication test of all
protection element one by one, the substation automatic system (SAS) will receive all the
fault report.

NOTICE!

If selecting the “Superv Events” or “IO Events”, the substation automatic system can
receive the corresponding self-check report or binary signals, and the self-check report
or binary signals produced by communication test can also be viewed by the two
command menus of “Superv Events” and “IO Events” in the menu “Records”.

8.4.14 Select Language


The operation is as follows:

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Language” menu, then press “ENT”
to enter the menu and the following display will be shown on LCD.

8-36 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

Please Select Language:

1 中文
2 English

Figure 8.4-8 Display of selecting language

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the preferred language and press the key
“ENT” to execute language switching. After language switching is finished, LCD will
return to the main menu, and the display language is changed. Otherwise, press “ESC” to
cancel language switching and return to the main menu.

NOTICE!

The LCD interfaces provided in this chapter are only for references and available for
explaining specific definition of LCD. The actual displayed interfaces maybe different
from these.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 8-37


Date: 2014-09-20
8 Human Machine Interface

8-38 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2014-09-20
9 Configurable Function

9 Configurable Function

Table of Contents
9 Configurable Function ...................................................................... 9-a
9.1 General Description ........................................................................................ 9-1
9.2 Introduction on PCS-Explorer Software ........................................................ 9-1
9.3 Device Setup.................................................................................................... 9-1
9.3.1 Device Information ............................................................................................................... 9-1

9.3.2 Hardware Configuration ....................................................................................................... 9-2

9.3.3 MOT ..................................................................................................................................... 9-3

9.3.4 Function Configuration ........................................................................................................ 9-4

9.4 Program Configuration ................................................................................... 9-5


9.4.1 LED Configuration ............................................................................................................... 9-5

9.4.2 Configuration of BI and BO .................................................................................................. 9-7

9.5 Setting Configuration ................................................................................... 9-10


9.5.1 Active Setting Group Selection .......................................................................................... 9-10

9.5.2 Browsing Settings ...............................................................................................................9-11

9.5.3 Modify Name and Value of Settings ...................................................................................9-11

List of Figures
Figure 9.3-1 Setting device information .................................................................................... 9-2

Figure 9.3-2 Hardware module configuration........................................................................... 9-3

Figure 9.3-3 MOT configuration interface ................................................................................. 9-4

Figure 9.3-4 Function configuration interface.......................................................................... 9-5

Figure 9.5-1 Setup of setting group......................................................................................... 9-10

Figure 9.5-2 Modify setting name command .......................................................................... 9-11

Figure 9.5-3 Modify setting name dialog box ......................................................................... 9-12

Figure 9.5-4 Modify a setting value ......................................................................................... 9-12

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 9-a


Date: 2014-07-02
9 Configurable Function

9-b PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2014-07-02
9 Configurable Function

9.1 General Description

By adoption of PCS-Explorer software, it is able to make function configuration, binary input and
binary output configuration, LED indicator configuration and setting configuration for PCS-915IC.

9.2 Introduction on PCS-Explorer Software

PCS-Explorer software is developed in order to meet customer’s demand on functions of UAPC


platform device such as device configuration and programmable design. It selects substation as
the core of data management and the device as fundamental unit, supporting one substation to
govern many devices. The software provides on-line and off-line functions: on-line mode: Ethernet
connected with the device supporting IEC60870-5-103 and capable of uploading and downloading
configuration files through Ethernet net; off-line mode: off-line setting configuration. In addition, it
also supports programmable logic to meet customer’s demand. Please refer to Instruction
Manual of PCS-Explorer Auxiliary Software for details and other functions.

Overall functions:

 Function configuration (off-line function)

 Programmable logic (off-line function)

 LED indicators configuration (off-line function)

 Binary input signals configuration (off-line function)

 Binary output signals configuration (off-line function)

 Setting configuration (off-line & on-line function)

 Real-time display of analogue and digital quantity of device (on-line function)

 Display of sequence of report (SOE) (on-line function)

 Analysis of waveform (off-line & on-line function)

 File downloading/uploading (on-line function)

9.3 Device Setup

Click “Device Config”→“Device Setup” node, and four labels are displayed in the edit window.
These labels are used to set device information, configure hardware module, configure the
software and hardware related function according to the selected series number of MOT and
configure ancillary protection functions respectively.

9.3.1 Device Information

Select “Device Information” page to view the basic information of the device. All these information

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 9-1


Date: 2014-07-02
9 Configurable Function

are default settings in the selected driver package for creating the device. Part of the basic
information can be modified including “Project Name”, “User File Version” and “User Modify Time”.

Figure 9.3-1 Setting device information

9.3.2 Hardware Configuration

Select page “Hardware Configuration” and configure hardware modules according to the project
requirements.

There are four columns information shown in this page, they are “Slot” (slot number), “Name” (the
selectable module name), “Current Type” (currently selected module type) and “Description”
(module description). The modules of which the currently selected module type are grey are not
configurable.

1. Slot: To simplify hardware configuration, the slot number of PCS series is defined to start with
slot 01 from left to right in rear view of device.

4U device:

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1

8U device:

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

8U+4U device:

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

9-2 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2014-07-02
9 Configurable Function

32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 P2

In the table, NR1301 located in slot P1 (and P2) is power supply, NR1102 located in slot 01 is
MON module, and others are functional modules.

2. Name: The selectable module name is fixed in a program, normally, the module name implies
its function, such as BIO means the module can be configured as a binary input module or a
binary output module.

3. Current Type: Current module type is also marked on the aluminum base where the module is
fixed on. In this column, two types of modules can be observed: mandatory and optional. As
shown in the figure below, cells in “Current Type” column marked in grey are mandatory
modules which are necessary for device normal operation, the module type is fixed. Other
cells marked in white are optional modules which can be configured according to the
application. It is convenient to change the type of optional modules by clicking the optional
module, and select the module type in the pull-down menu or select “none” to leave the slot
blank if not required.

4. Description: Module description includes the functions and parameters of the selected
module.

Figure 9.3-2 Hardware module configuration

9.3.3 MOT

Choose “MOT” page to enter MOT configuration interface as shown below. According to the
selected series number of MOT, the applied busbar arrangement, some software and hardware
related function can be configured. For detailed function configuration, please refer to Section 3.3.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 9-3


Date: 2014-07-02
9 Configurable Function

Figure 9.3-3 MOT configuration interface

9.3.4 Function Configuration

Choose “Function Configuration” page to enter function configuration interface as shown below
(the content may vary subject to created projects). Click the pull-down list in “Option” column to
perform function configuration. For detailed function configuration, please refer to Section 3.2.

9-4 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2014-07-02
9 Configurable Function

Figure 9.3-4 Function configuration interface

9.4 Program Configuration

9.4.1 LED Configuration

On front panel of PCS-915, two columns of indicators are normally provided. The first two
indicators indicate device running status (Healthy) and alarm status (Alarm). Remaining indicators
have their specific meanings according to device functions (please refer to corresponding project
configuration manual for details). Colors of these indicators may vary with functions of device.

The control of these indicators is configured by LED element configuration in PCS-Explorer.

Click “Program Config”→“Slot01:CPU” node, and select “LED” page to view and configure LED
element.

The following is an example of LED configuration:

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 9-5


Date: 2014-07-02
9 Configurable Function

Figure 9.4-1 Example of LED configuration

If the LED symbol and the connected input block are in blue, indicating that they cannot be
modified. For some fixed configuration, the necessary functions not allowed to change will be
marked in blue, even the attributes cannot be modified.

The indicators not in blue can be defined according to the application. The method is very simple:

Double click LED element to open its attributes setup window. users can see that it consists of 4
sub-pages. Switch to “Func Block Parameter” sub-page. Here, indicators LED3~20 can be set.

Each indicator has two items to be set: Parameter “ledx_latched” (x=3~20): click corresponding
entry under “Set Value” to select “yes” or “no”. If “yes” is selected, indicator attribute is “latched”,
indicating that after this indicator is lit, it will remain on even the initiation signal disappears until it
is reset. If “no” is selected, indicator attribute is “un-latched”, indicating that the indicator status will
follow the change of its initiation signal.

The other parameter is “ledx_color” (x=3~20): The color of indicator can be selected as required:
green, yellow, and red.

After completion of setup, click “OK” to close attributes setup window. The set parameters will be
displayed on the element, as shown below.

9-6 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2014-07-02
9 Configurable Function

Figure 9.4-2 LED indicators configuration interface

Next, indicators initiation signals should be placed on the page and connect them to corresponding
input interfaces of LED element: select the output signal from the “Source” tab at the right side of
the window to be used as input source. Press and hold left button of mouse, and directly drag it to
the page. When this signal passes input signal connection point, a red dot will appear to prompt
connection. After placing it at a suitable position, connection line will be automatically generated to
connect this input signal.

9.4.2 Configuration of BI and BO

PCS-915IC is normally configured with a number of IO modules. Quantities may vary with different
project.

These BI and BO modules are normally configured according to general configuration.


Corresponding modules are usually selected according to the application. However, in some
cases, addition of IO modules may be required according to the changing requirements. At this
time, configuration of signals and parameters of additional IO modules is required. After creation of
a device using the template driver package by PCS-Explorer, required configuration can be
performed on editable page.

9.4.2.1 Configuration of BI

Takes BI module in slot No.5 as an example.

Click “Program Config” node. Unfold module node “Slot05:BIO_2”, one page node: “NR1506A_A”
is shown.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 9-7


Date: 2014-07-02
9 Configurable Function

Figure 9.4-3 Module nodes and pages in program configuration

Click the page “NR1506A_A”; NR1506AS configuration graph is shown in an editing window.

Figure 9.4-4 Configuration graph of NR1506AS

In the graph, NR1506AS plug-in module symbol and respective output signals are shown with
connection to output symbol block.

Plug-in module symbol shows functions corresponding to NR1506AS input pins: numbers in the
“PIN” column are input terminal numbers of NR1506AS module, and name or function of each pin
is described in the “BI_Name” column. Pins can be configured via their output signals to form
output symbol blocks.

9-8 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2014-07-02
9 Configurable Function

[BI_COMMON] of BI module is an internal binary input, it will be energized if any other binary input
of the BI module is energized. When users configure BFI binary input via PCS-Explorer auxiliary
software by themselves, all the common BFI binary inputs ([@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI]) of related bays
must be configured to [BI_COMMON] of the BI module, so if any BFI binary input of a BI module is
energized, the common BFI binary inputs of related bays are energized (refer to Section 3.12.2.2).

On the element symbol, two parameters columns of symbols “ ” and “ ”. The former
indicates BI delay pick up time and the latter indicates BI delay drop off time. If voltage applied
between a BI input and the common terminal exceeds the BI delay pick up time, corresponding
output signal will be energized, and if the applied voltage is disappeared for a period exceeding
the BI delay drop off time, the output signal will be reset.

Connect a signal to a pin of NR1506AS module and the status of this signal is reflected by the BI
output signal and the connected output symbol block in visualized page. Double click such output
symbol block and modify its description in a pop-up dialog box (or maintain default description;
input signal will not be affected).

Besides above method for the addition of BI signal and viewing the status, outputs of all configured
binary inputs (including elements) can be viewed in the “Source” tab at the right side of the window
(variable library). Please note the variable library has to be refreshed if there is any description
modification on output symbol block. The output symbol block of these binary inputs can be
configured as input symbol block of other elements by dragging.

9.4.2.2 Configuration of BO

Takes BO module in slot No.15 as an example.

Click “Program Config” node. Unfold module node “Slot15:BIO_12”, one page node:
“NR1521A_A” is shown.

Figure 9.4-5 Configuration graph of NR1521A

In the graph, NR1521A plug-in module symbol and respective input signals are shown with

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 9-9


Date: 2014-07-02
9 Configurable Function

connection to input symbol block.

Plug-in module symbol shows functions corresponding to NR1521A input pins: numbers in the
“PIN” column are input terminal numbers of NR1521A module, and name or function of each pin is
described in the “BO_Name” column. Pins can be configured via their input signals to form input
symbol blocks.

Inputs of all configurable binary outputs can be viewed in the “Source” tab at the right side of the
window (variable library). As shown in the figure, each input corresponds to one way output
contact of the BO module. The output contact of BO module will operate (output relay pickup or
reset) in response to the status change of corresponding input signal. The output contacts of BO
modules can be configured or modified according to the application or drag the required signals
from the variable library.

9.5 Setting Configuration

After function configuration is finished, disabled protective function is hidden in device and in
setting configuration list of PCS-Explorer software.

9.5.1 Active Setting Group Selection

Click “Settings” node to enter “Settings” interface. In the middle of editing window is the setting
group setup interface, where two parameters can be set: “Active Group” and “Setting Groups:
[1-30]” (shown in Figure 9.5-1), users can change the number in the two text boxes then click the
button “Set” to modify the two parameters. The text box of “Active Group” is used for users to
change the current active setting group. The text box of “Setting Groups: [1-30]” is used for users
to change the number of active setting groups, the number of sub-nodes of “Setting” node will
change with this parameter.

Several sub-nodes: “Global” and “Group x” (x: 1~n, n is the number that inputted in the text box of
“Setting Groups: [1-30]”, n should not be larger than 30). Among them, global settings (the
sub-node “Global”) are common for all setting groups. In setting groups Group 1~Group n, only
one group is the current active setting group used in device operation, and mainly includes
protection settings, the current active setting group can be switched among Group 1~Group n
when required.

Figure 9.5-1 Setup of setting group

9-10 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2014-07-02
9 Configurable Function

9.5.2 Browsing Settings

Click “Settings”→“Global” node, five sub-nodes are unfolded (number of sub-nodes may vary with
different device models) in the edit window. These sub-nodes are used to set system settings,
logic links, device settings, communication settings and label settings.

Click “Settings”→“Group x” node, all the protective settings of corresponding group can be shown
by clicking corresponding setting menu item.

9.5.3 Modify Name and Value of Settings

Although there are many setting group nodes, settings under these nodes have the same layout in
editing page. Therefore, steps of modification of settings are basically the same. It is seen from the
graph that when any setting node is clicked and open, the editing page will display name, value,
range, step, and unit of the settings in this sequence. Here, user can modify name and set value of
the settings according to actual application requirements.

Figure 9.5-2 Modify setting name command

The name of a setting is the name user will finally see on the device. Users can suitably modify
this name according to actual project requirements: right click on the name entry to be modified to
pop up a right-key context menu, execute command “Modify Name”; the following window will pop
up:

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 9-11


Date: 2014-07-02
9 Configurable Function

Figure 9.5-3 Modify setting name dialog box

In the “Modify Name” dialog box, users will see two entries, “Original Name” is the default name of
this setting in the symbol library, and “Name” is the name currently used, and can be modified.

Modified setting value must not exceed its range (if there has an ordain). There are two types of
set value modification operation: direct input of the value after double clicking corresponding entry
of the setting value, or selection from a pull-down menu.

User can also right click the entry of set value and select “Get Default Value” in the right-key
context menu, so as to obtain default set value of this entry from the symbol library.

During modification and editing operations of settings in the customizing editing window, modified
item will become red, till users perform saving operation.

Figure 9.5-4 Modify a setting value

9-12 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2014-07-02
10 Communications

10 Communications

Table of Contents
10 Communications ........................................................................... 10-a
10.1 General Description .................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Rear Communication Port Information ..................................................... 10-1
10.2.1 RS-485 Interface.............................................................................................................. 10-1

10.2.2 Ethernet Interface ............................................................................................................ 10-3

10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication .................................................................................... 10-4

10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port ................................................ 10-4


10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer ............................................................................... 10-5

10.3.2 Initialization ...................................................................................................................... 10-5

10.3.3 Time Synchronization ...................................................................................................... 10-5

10.3.4 Spontaneous Events ........................................................................................................ 10-5

10.3.5 General Interrogation ....................................................................................................... 10-6

10.3.6 General Functions ........................................................................................................... 10-6

10.3.7 Disturbance Records ....................................................................................................... 10-6

10.4 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Ethernet .................................................... 10-6


10.5 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol .......................................... 10-6
10.5.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 10-6

10.5.2 Communication Profiles ................................................................................................... 10-7

10.5.3 MMS Communication Network Deployment ................................................................... 10-8

10.5.4 Server Data Organization ...............................................................................................10-11

10.5.5 Server Features and Configuration ............................................................................... 10-13

10.5.6 ACSI Conformance ........................................................................................................ 10-15

10.5.7 Logical Nodes ................................................................................................................ 10-20

10.6 DNP3.0 Interface........................................................................................ 10-23


10.6.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 10-23

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 10-a


Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications

10.6.2 Link Layer Functions...................................................................................................... 10-23

10.6.3 Transport Functions ....................................................................................................... 10-23

10.6.4 Application Layer Functions........................................................................................... 10-23

List of Figures
Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements ..................................................... 10-2

Figure 10.2-2 Ethernet communication cable ........................................................................ 10-3

Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication structure .................................................................. 10-4

Figure 10.5-1 Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the RCB block instance ......................... 10-9

Figure 10.5-2 Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance ..................... 10-10

Figure 10.5-3 Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances .................. 10-11

10-b PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications

10.1 General Description

This section introduces NR’s remote communications interfaces. The protective device is
compatible with three protocols via the rear communication interface (RS-485 or Ethernet). The
protocol provided by the protective device is indicated in the submenu in the “Comm Settings”
column. Using the keypad and LCD to set the parameter [Protocol_RS485A] and
[Protocol_RS485B], the corresponding protocol will be selected.

The rear EIA RS-485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection no matter
whichever protocol is selected. It has advantage that 32 protective devices can be “daisy chained”
together in electrical connection using a twisted pair.

It should be noted that the descriptions in this section do not aim to fully introduce the protocol
itself. The relevant documentation for the protocol should be referred for this information. This
section serves to describe the specific implementation of the protocol in the relay.

10.2 Rear Communication Port Information

10.2.1 RS-485 Interface


This protective device provides two rear RS-485 communication ports, and each port has three
terminals in the 12-terminal screw connector located on the back of the relay. Each port has a
ground terminal for earth shield of communication cable. The rear ports provide RS-485 serial data
communication and are intended for permanently wired connection to a remote control center.

10.2.1.1 EIA RS-485 Standardized Bus

The EIA RS-485 two-wire connection provides a half-duplex fully isolated serial connection to the
product. The connection is polarized and whilst the product’s connection diagrams indicate the
polarization of the connection terminals it should be borne in mind that there is no agreed
definition of which terminal is which. If the master is unable to communicate with the product, but
the communication parameters match, then it is possible that the two-wire connection is reversed.

10.2.1.2 Bus Termination

The EIA RS-485 bus must have 120Ω (Ohm) ½ Watt terminating resistors fitted at either end
across the signal wires (refer to Figure 10.2-1). Some devices may be able to provide the bus
terminating resistors by different connection or configuration arrangements, in which case
separate external components will not be required. However, this product does not provide such a
facility, so an external termination resistor is required when it is located at the bus terminus.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 10-1


Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications

EIA RS-485
Master 120 Ohm

120 Ohm

Slave Slave Slave

Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements

10.2.1.3 Bus Connections & Topologies

The EIA RS-485 requires that each device is directly connected to the physical cable i.e. the
communications bus. Stubs and tees are strictly forbidden, such as star topologies. Loop bus
topologies are not part of the EIA RS-485 standard and are forbidden also.

Two-core screened cable is recommended. The specification of the cable will be dependent on the
application, although a multi-strand 0.5mm2 per core is normally adequate. Total cable length
must not exceed 500m. The screen must be continuous and connected to ground at one end,
normally at the master connection point; it is important to avoid circulating currents, especially
when the cable runs between buildings, for both safety and noise reasons.

This product does not provide a signal ground connection. If a signal ground connection is present
in the bus cable then it must be ignored, although it must have continuity for the benefit of other
devices connected to the bus. The signal ground shall not be connected to the cables screen or to
the product’s chassis at any stage. This is for both safety and noise reasons.

10.2.1.4 Biasing

It may also be necessary to bias the signal wires to prevent jabber. Jabber occurs when the signal
level has an indeterminate state due to inactively driven of tubs. This can occur when all the slaves
are in receive mode and the master unit is slow to turn from receive mode to transmit mode. The
reason is that the master purposefully waits in receive mode, or even in a high impedance state,
until it has something to transmit. Jabber can result in the loss of first bits of the first character in
the packet for receiving device(s), which will lead to the rejection of messages for slave units,
causing non-responding between master unit and slave unit. This could brings poor response
times (due to retries), increase in message error counters, erratic communications, and even a
complete failure to communicate.

Biasing requires that the signal lines shall be weakly pulled to a defined voltage level of about 1V.
There should be only one bias point on the bus, which is best situated at the master connection
point. The DC source used for the bias must be clean; otherwise noise will be injected. Please
note that some devices may (optionally) be able to provide the bus bias that the external
components will not be required.

NOTICE!

It is extremely IMPORTANT that the 120Ω termination resistors are fitted. Failure to do

10-2 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications

so will result in an excessive bias voltage that may damage the devices connected to
the bus.

As the field voltage is much higher than that required, NR CANNOT assume
responsibility for any damage that may occur to a device connected to the network as a
result of incorrect application of this voltage.

ENSURE that the field voltage is not being used for other purposes (i.e. powering logic
inputs) as this may cause noise to be passed to the communication network.

10.2.2 Ethernet Interface


This protective device can provide four rear Ethernet interfaces (optional) and they are unattached
to each other. Parameters of each Ethernet port can be configured in the submenu “Comm
Settings”.

10.2.2.1 Ethernet Standardized Communication Cable

It is recommended to use twisted screened eight-core cable as the communication cable. A picture
is shown bellow.

Figure 10.2-2 Ethernet communication cable

10.2.2.2 Connections and Topologies

Each device is connected with an exchanger via communication cable, and thereby it forms a star
structure network. Dual-network is recommended in order to increase reliability. SCADA is also
connected to the exchanger acting as the master station, and every device which has been
connected to the exchanger will act as a slave unit.

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 10-3


Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications

SCADA

Exchanger A

Exchanger B

Equipment Equipment Equipment

Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication structure

10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication


The IEC specification IEC60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission
Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards IEC60870-5-1 to IEC60870-5-5 to perform
communication with protective device. The standard configuration of IEC60870-5-103 protocol is
using a twisted pair EIA RS-485 connection over distances up to 500m. It also supports an
Ethernet for communication between devices. The relay operates as a slave unit in the system to
respond commands received from master station